JP2022111249A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of optimally improving taste of a game.

SOLUTION: A ROM 263 stores a plurality of types of high probability-mode win/failure tables A, B, C having mutually different jackpot winning probabilities. When a first probability variable mode flag is set in a RAM 264 and the number of game rounds executed after termination of an opening/closing execution mode are 20 times or less, the game machine executes win/failure determination processing by referring to a highest probability-mode win/failure table A having the highest jackpot winning probability. Further, when a second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game rounds executed after termination of the opening/closing execution mode are 10 times or less, the game machine executes win/failure determination processing by referring to a high probability-mode win/failure table B. When the jackpot is not won in the abovementioned conditions, the game machine executes win/failure determination processing by referring to a low probability-mode win/failure table C having a lowest jackpot winning probability among the high probability-mode win/failure tables A, B, C.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding a pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which a game state is shifted to a predetermined game state when a winning result is obtained in a lottery or when a game ball passes through a predetermined area. Then, when a predetermined game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides a predetermined ball entry portion into which a game ball flowing down a game area can enter,
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion;
grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to grant correspondence information;
a state transition means for shifting a game state to a specific game state advantageous to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result is a grant correspondence result in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
with
As modes of the grant determination, a low-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively low, a first high-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than that in the low-probability mode, and the grant correspondence result and a second high-probability mode having a higher probability than the first high-probability mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) A vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion in the non-guiding state, and (b) a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion in the guiding state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (A) A time chart showing an operation mode of the distribution winning device in the first distribution execution mode, and (B) a time chart showing an operation mode of the distribution winning device in the second distribution execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine and the display contents on the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the game time, the prize-winning effective period of the through prize-winning part for distribution, and distribution execution mode. (A) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an opening/closing execution mode generated from a first distribution execution mode; (B) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an opening/closing execution mode generated from a second distribution execution mode; It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the sound and light MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU; It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution standby|waiting in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing distribution start processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of distribution in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special electric start processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special electric open processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how a game progresses. (A) and (B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the distribution winning device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for distribution standby performed by main side MPU in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the main-side ROM in the fourth embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for each winning result. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a table group; It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution standby|waiting in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an allocation table; It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing in main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device corresponding to the gaming state in which the winning/failure determination process and the allocation determination process are executed using the second high probability table group; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device corresponding to the game state in which the winning/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group or the fifth high probability table group; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the success/failure determination process that can be selected in the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination, and (b) the distribution determination process that can be selected in the probability lottery process of the distribution determination. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision performed by main side MPU in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first game state transition processing in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing second game state transition processing in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game state transition processing performed by main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing second game state transition processing in the main side MPU. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of winning results in the eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the processing for distribution in main side MPU. (a) It is a front view of the game board in 9th Embodiment, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the variable winning device provided in the game board. It is a rear view for explaining various winning detection sensors. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table for the high-probability mode, and (c) is for explaining the distribution table. is an explanatory diagram of . It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various game results. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing a game round control process executed by the MPU of the main control device; It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing master-side command handling processing executed by the MPU of the sound emission control device; It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining various count number distribution tables. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 10th Embodiment. (a) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the hole on a croon, (b) It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the croon longitudinally so that three holes provided on the croon might become a cross section. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing count number identification processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of the main control unit in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing total payout lottery table identification processing in the MPU of the main controller; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining various payout total lottery tables. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the read-in process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a large winning opening open continuation lottery process executed by the MPU of the main control device. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various open continuation lottery tables; 29 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment; (a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device cut in the vertical direction so that the count hole and the passage for counting in the fourteenth embodiment are the cross section; (b) the continuous hole and the continuous passage are the cross section; (c) A longitudinal sectional view for explaining a state in which the movable member is inclined toward the continuous hole with the opening/closing door and the front wall removed. and (d) is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining a state in which the movable member is tilted toward the counter hole with the opening/closing door and the front wall removed. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the read-in process performed by MPU of a main control unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various continuation lottery tables; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening control process executed by the MPU of the main control device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tilting direction of the movable member according to the number of rounds and the number of counts; It is a flowchart which shows the read-in process performed by MPU of a main control unit. 29 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the read-in process performed by MPU of a main control unit. 29 is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening process executed by the MPU of the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an open duration table; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low-probability mode success/failure table in the seventeenth embodiment; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-probability mode success/failure table A; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode; (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table; It is an explanatory diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control unit. (a) is the number of times the game is played, (b) is a period in which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high probability mode, and (c) the second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM. (d) a period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode; (e) In the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM, it is a period in which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode, and (f) the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. is the period during which the acceptance/rejection determination process is performed with reference to . FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU of the main controller in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by the MPU of the main controller in the twentieth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 16 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 22 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 23 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 23 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 23 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 22 of the resin base 21 .

The configuration of the game board 23 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 23. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 23 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 22 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 75a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or a shooting handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and game balls are shot.

The game board 23 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general prize winning section 31, a first operating section 32, a second operating section 33, a special through prize winning section 34, a distribution through prize winning section 35, a distribution prize winning device 36, a special electric prize winning device 37, variable A display unit 41, a special figure unit 42, a general figure unit 43, and the like are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the special through winning portion 34 and the sorting through winning portion 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any one of the general winning section 31, the first operating section 32, the second operating section 33, the distribution winning device 36, and the special electric winning device 37, the number of game media available to the player is A predetermined number of game balls are put out in order to increase the . Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning portion 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the first operating portion 32, When three game balls are put out and a ball enters the second operating section 33, one game ball is put out and a ball enters the distribution winning device 36. 15 game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 37, the same 15 game balls as when a ball enters the distributed prize winning device 36 are paid out. is executed.

As will be described later, the distribution winning device 36 is provided with a discharge passage area 65b and a V winning passage region 65c. Although it will pass through either of the areas 65c, the same number (specifically 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of whether the game balls pass through either the discharge passage area 65b or the V winning passage area 65c. be done. Also, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls of the first operation unit 32 and the number of the second operation units 33 may be the same, and the number of prize balls of the distribution winning device 36 is the number of special electric prizes. The number of prize balls of the device 37 may be greater than or less than the number of prize balls.

In addition, an out port 23a is provided at the bottom of the game board 23, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 23a. Further, the game board 23 is provided with a large number of nails 23b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball into the out port 23a, the general winning portion 31, the first operating portion 32, the second operating portion 33, the special figure through winning portion 34, The entry of a game ball into the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution prize winning device 36, and the special electric prize winning device 37 is also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 41 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 41 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 23, an area where the game balls shot to the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, an upper area PA1, which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 41 in the game area PA, and a lower area continuous with the upper area PA1 and higher than the variable display unit 41. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left, a right area PA3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 41, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 41 continuously below it.

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the amount of rotation in the first range which is less than the reference amount of rotation as the first shooting operation, the game ball is ejected to the left of the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper area PA1. flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→left area PA2→lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as a second shooting operation, the upper area PA1 is positioned to the right of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball can flow down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3. A game can be played so that game balls flow down PA3. Incidentally, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4.

The 1st operation|movement part 32 is installed in lower side area|region PA4. The first operating portion 32 is open upward, and a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing entry of a game ball into the first operating portion 32 is not provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating section 32 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating portion 32 is always capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operating portion 32 . In addition, the first operating portion 32 is arranged directly below the stage 41a formed in the variable display unit 41, and the game ball that has flowed onto the stage 41a through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 41. A game ball ejected from the center of the stage 41 a to the outside of the variable display unit 41 easily enters the first operating section 32 . A detection sensor 32a is provided in the first operating portion 32, and a game ball that has won the first operating portion 32 is detected by the detection sensor 32a.

Here, as described above, the first operating portion 32 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the game flowed down the right side area PA3 on the upstream side toward the right side area PA3 with respect to the first operating portion 32 A control nail 23c is provided to prevent the ball from reaching the first operating portion 32. As shown in FIG. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a is provided for the left side area PA2 and is not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to win the first operation unit 32, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, winning to the first operating section 32 is disabled. However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right area PA3 by not providing the control nail 23c or by providing the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a to the right area PA3. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to win a prize to the first operation unit 32 even when the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to do so.

The second operating portion 33 is installed in the right side area PA3. That is, the second operation unit 33 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the second operating portion 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). FIG. 4(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating portion 33 in the non-receiving state. The second operating portion 33 includes a base unit 51 formed with a discharge passage 53 for discharging game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 23, and a discharge passage 53 for discharging game balls flowing down the game area PA. and a guiding unit 52 for guiding to. An entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A detection sensor 54 is provided on the exit portion 53 b side of the discharge passage 53 , and the game ball that has entered the second operating portion 33 is detected by the detection sensor 54 .

Guidance unit 52 receives from below the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA, guide member 55 for guiding the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, into the discharge passage 53 A situation in which the guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the guidance of the game ball is disabled and the guidance position where the guidance is possible, and the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position is placed in the blocking position for blocking the inflow of the game balls into the discharge passage 53, and in the situation where the guide member 55 is arranged in the guiding position, it is arranged in the non-blocking position in which the inflow of the game balls into the discharge passage 53 is not blocked. A blocking member 57 is provided. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the vertical direction so that the guide member 55 faces downward. A transmission unit 58 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving portion 56 to the guide member 55 and blocking member 57 .

When the guide driving portion 56 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is not guided into the second discharge passage 53. The ball flows downward in the game area PA without entering the operating portion 33. - 特許庁Further, since the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 is less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 33 when the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position.

When the guide driving portion 56 is driven, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, so that the guide member 55 is placed at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is released. placed in the blocking position. FIG. 4(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 33 in the guided state.

When the guide member 55 is arranged at the guiding position, the tip side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive from below the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA. Since the upper surface of the tip of the guide member 55 slopes downward toward the inlet 53a of the discharge passage 53, the game ball received from below at the tip of the guide member 55 is , and is guided into the discharge passage 53 . Further, when the blocking member 57 is arranged at the non-blocking position, the tip of the blocking member 57 is displaced so as to be positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The ball flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57 . As a result, the guide driving portion 56 is driven, and the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance portion 53 a in the game area PA enters the second operating portion 33 . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide driving portion 56 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position will be referred to as the non-guiding state (or the second operation) of the guide unit 52 . the closed state of the second operating portion 33, the non-receiving state of the second operating portion 33, and the non-guiding state of the second operating portion 33). is located at the non-blocking position is referred to as the guiding state of the guiding unit 52 (or the open state of the second operating portion 33, the receiving state of the second operating portion 33, or the guiding state of the second operating portion 33).

The second operating portion 33 has a cover member 59 provided to face the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The cover member 59 is formed in the shape of a gate so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the area in front of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA. It is provided so as to limit the number of game balls to one and to regulate the forward movement and lateral movement of the game ball in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, when the guide unit 52 of the second operating portion 33 is in the guided state, a plurality of game balls are prevented from being guided into the discharge passage 53 of the second operating portion 33 at the same time. It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guided state.

As shown in FIG. 3, above the second operation part 33 in the right area PA3, a special through winning part 34 and a sorting through winning part 35 are vertically arranged side by side. That is, the special figure through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the right side area PA3 Winning is possible when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down. The special figure through winning portion 34 and the sorting through winning portion 35 have through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A sorting thru winning section 35 is provided at the lower position. The distance between the special figure through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 is about one game ball, and the through hole of the special figure through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion No obstacle member such as a nail 23b is provided between the portion 35 and the through hole. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special through winning portion 34 in the vertical direction surely passes through the sorting through winning portion 35. - 特許庁In addition, a second operating portion 33 is provided at a position vertically below the distribution through winning portion 35, and a special electric winning device 37 and a shaking A minute winning device 36 is provided. Therefore, it is possible for the game ball that has won the special figure through winning section 34 or the distribution through winning section 35 to win the second operation section 33, the special electric winning device 37, or the distribution winning device 36. .

The right side area PA3, in which the second operating portion 33, the special figure through winning portion 34, and the sorting through winning portion 35 are collectively arranged, has a variable display unit 41 on the left side, which is in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 23. The right side is defined by a regulation wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 23 . The right side area PA3 is set to have a lateral dimension narrower than that of the lower side area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game to the second operation unit 33, the special figure through winning unit 34, and the distribution through winning unit 35 It is easier for the ball to enter the ball.

The arrangement mode of a plurality of nails 23b on the upstream side of the special figure through winning portion 34 in the right side area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to the special figure through winning portion 34. . As a result, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is easy to enter the special figure through winning portion 34, and the second operating portion 33 and the second operating portion 33 and It is easy for the ball to enter the through winning section 35 for sorting.

A detection sensor 34a is provided in the special figure through winning section 34, and the game ball that has won the special figure through winning section 34 is detected by the detection sensor 34a. Further, a detection sensor 35a is provided in the distribution through winning section 35, and the game ball that has won the distribution through winning section 35 is detected by the detection sensor 35a.

The guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning to the special figure thru winning section 34 . Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the special figure through winning part 34 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 43 provided in the lower left corner, which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA Variation display of the pattern is performed in the figure display section 43a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is winning of the induction execution state, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 43a is finished, the transition to the induction execution state is made. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

The general pattern display unit 43a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 44 to be described later in the normal map display unit 43a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the normal map display unit 43a. Become. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the pattern displayed in the normal figure display section 43a includes a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. is displayed.

In the normal map unit 43, a normal map holding display portion 43b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal map display portion 43a. The number of game balls won by the special figure thru winning part 34 is reserved up to four at maximum, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display part 43b.

Incidentally, the display range of the normal pattern display unit 43a is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 44, which will be described later. Furthermore, the display range of both the normal pattern display portion 43a and the normal pattern reservation display portion 43b is also narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 44. FIG. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the pattern display device 44 rather than the normal pattern display unit 43a and the normal pattern reservation display unit 43b.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of the winning of the first operating portion 32 or the second operating portion 33 . When the winning lottery is carried out, the special figure unit 42 performs the variable display of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

In detail about the special figure unit 42, the special figure display part 42a is provided in the special figure unit 42. As shown in FIG. In the special figure display section 42a, a variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery based on the occurrence of winning to the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33. - 特許庁Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The period from when the variable display of the pattern is started in the special figure display section 42a to when the variable display of the pattern is finished after displaying a predetermined result corresponds to one game cycle.

The special figure display unit 42a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 44 described later in the special figure display unit 42a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 42a. Become. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 42a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 42, a special figure reservation display section 42b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 42a. The number of winning game balls in the first operation part 32 or the second operation part 33 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display part 42b. The display range of the special figure display unit 42a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44, which will be described later. In addition, the entire display range of the special figure display portion 42a and the special figure reservation display portion 42b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 44 rather than the special figure display unit 42a and the special figure reservation display unit 42b.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display part 42a, the display effect is performed in accordance with it in the pattern display device 44 provided in the variable display unit 41. - 特許庁The pattern display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The display contents of the pattern display device 44 will be described later in detail. The pattern display device 44 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device. may

A winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 results in a winning result, and when the game cycle corresponding to the winning result ends, the winning to the distribution through winning part 35 is valid. Become. Then, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period, the game shifts to a distribution execution mode in which a prize in the distribution prize winning device 36 becomes possible. If a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period and a shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, the prize in the distribution through prize winning section 35 is invalidated again.

As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 is provided at a position lower than the second operating portion 33 in the right side area PA3. That is, the distribution winning device 36 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 in addition to FIG. FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 36. As shown in FIG.

The distribution winning device 36, as shown in FIG. A distribution side opening/closing member 62 is provided for switching between an open state through which balls can pass. The distribution side opening/closing member 62 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 63 for the distribution entrance.

A game ball that has entered the sorting entrance 61 is guided to a branch passage 65 formed in a base body 64 of the sorting prize winning device 36, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 65 has an upstream passage region 65a which is set so that the passage direction is inclined downward in the lateral direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 65 to the middle position of the branch passage 65, and the upstream passage region 65a. and a discharge passage area 65b set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and a side different from the discharge passage area 65b provided by branching from the middle position of the discharge passage area 65b. A V winning passage area 65c for guiding the ball is provided. In this case, the dimension of the upstream passage area 65a in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction is equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls, so the direction perpendicular to the passage direction A game ball is prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 65a in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls simultaneously reach the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b.

A switching piece 66 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 65b to the V winning path area 65c is provided at the branch point of the discharge path area 65b to the V winning path area 65c. The switching piece 66 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 65c with respect to the discharge passage region 65b in the base body 64, and is entirely retracted outside the discharge passage region 65b. and a V-guide position projecting into the discharge passage area 65b. The driving force of the switching driving portion 67 is transmitted to the switching piece 66 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching driving portion 67 is in the non-driving state, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). The switching piece 66 is displaced against the urging force and placed at the V-guiding position.

When the switching piece 66 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 flows down the discharge passage region 65b without being guided to the V prize passage region 65c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by a count detection sensor 68 provided downstream of the branch position of the switching piece 66 in the discharge passage area 65b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 is received by the switching piece 66 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 66 in the state of being arranged at the V guide position slopes downward toward the V winning path area 65c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 66 flows into the V winning path area 65c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning path area 65c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 provided in the V winning path area 65c.

When the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 68 or when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 are paid out. be done. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur.

During the period of the distribution execution mode, the distribution display section 42c provided in the special figure unit 42 performs a variable display of the pattern. In detail about the period during which the variable display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display section 42c, the winning valid period during which the winning result is displayed in the special figure display section 42a and the winning to the distribution through winning section 35 becomes effective When it is started, the variable display of the pattern is started in the distribution display section 42c. Then, when the distribution execution mode ends, the variable display of the pattern ends. In this case, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the fluctuation display of the pattern on the distribution display section 42c ends in a state where the stop result at the time of the V winning is displayed. When the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect a game ball in the allocation execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the allocation display section 42c ends in a state in which the stop result of the non-V winning is displayed. be done. When the stop result at the time of V winning is displayed, the opening and closing execution mode is generated after that, and when the stop result at the time of non-V winning is displayed, the opening and closing execution is triggered by the execution of this distribution execution mode. Mode transitions do not occur.

The distribution display section 42c is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display such as that of the pattern display device 44 in the sorting display section 42c, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the sorting display section 42c. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed in the sorting display unit 42c include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. is displayed.

The display range of the distribution display section 42c is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 44. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the pattern display device 44 rather than the distribution display section 42c.

In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize to the special electric prize winning device 37 . As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 37 is provided at a position below the second operating portion 33 and above the sorting prize winning device 36 in the right area PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 37 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation device 37 makes the game ball flow down the right side area PA3. 28 is operated, winning is possible.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 37 is provided with a large prize winning opening 37a which is large enough for a game ball to pass through. It is provided with a special electric side opening/closing member 37b that switches to an open state through which the electric power can pass. The special electric side opening/closing member 37b is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the special electric drive unit 37c. The special electric prize winning device 37 is provided with a game ball passage with the large prize winning port 37a serving as an entrance portion, and the game ball that has flowed into the game ball passage through the special electric prize winning port 37a is detected by a special electric prize winning detection sensor provided in the game ball passage. After being detected by 37d, it is ejected behind the game board 23. FIG.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 23 having the above structure is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 71 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 71 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 72 is fitted therein. The window panel 72 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 73 is provided above the window portion 71 . A pair of left and right speaker units 74 are also provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 75 and a lower bulging portion 76 that bulge forward are arranged vertically below the window portion 71 . An upper plate 75a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 75, and a lower plate 76a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 76. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 75a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 76a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 75a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 23), a main control device 81 that controls the main game is mounted. The main controller 81 has a main control board housed in a board box. It should be noted that the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving traces of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving traces of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the joint part that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been sealed is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 81 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 82 made of a transparent synthetic resin, to which a payout mechanism 83 and a controller collective unit 84 are attached.

The payout mechanism 83 includes a tank 85 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are successively replenished, and a payout device 86 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 85 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 86 are discharged to the upper tray 75a or the lower tray 76a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 86. The payout mechanism 83 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power.

The control device assembly unit 84 includes a payout control device 87 having a function of controlling a payout device 86, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 88 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 87 and the power supply/launch control device 88 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 87 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 81 has a main control board 91 that controls the main game. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 92 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 95 provided in the main controller 81 and to a payout controller 87 . A power supply/emission control device 88 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 95 , and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95 .

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 34a, 35a, 37d, 54, 68 and 69 (hereinafter referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 69) are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. FIG. The various prize detection sensors 32a to 69 include the detection sensor 32a provided in the first operation unit 32, the detection sensor 54 provided in the second operation unit 33, and the detection sensor 34a provided in the special figure thru winning unit 34. , a detection sensor 35a provided in the distribution through prize winning unit 35, a count detection sensor 68 and a V prize detection sensor 69 provided in the distribution prize winning device 36, and a special electric prize detection sensor 37d provided in the special electric prize winning device 37 is included. In addition, detection sensors provided in the general prize winning section 31 are included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 32a to 69, the MPU 92 determines the winning of each winning-corresponding ball winning section. Further, the MPU 92 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operating section 32 and the second operating section 33 .

The output side of the MPU 92 is connected with a power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 87 and a sound emission control device 101. FIG. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 87 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. When receiving the prize ball command, the payout control device 87 drives and controls the payout device 86 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball command is paid out. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 101 .

On the output side of the MPU 92, a guide driving section 56 for switching the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 between the non-guiding state and the guiding state (in other words, opening and closing the entrance section 53a of the second operating section 33). , a drive unit 63 for the distribution entrance that opens and closes the distribution side opening/closing member 62 of the distribution winning device 36, and a switching device that displaces the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 between the retracted position and the V guidance position. A drive unit 67, a special electric drive unit 37c for opening and closing the special electric side opening/closing member 37b of the special electric prize winning device 37, a special electric unit 42 and a general electric unit 43 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 42 is provided with a special figure display section 42a, a special figure reservation display section 42b and a distribution display section 42c, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU92. Similarly, the normal map unit 43 is provided with a normal map display unit 43a and a normal map reservation display unit 43b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU92. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, when the induction state of the guidance unit 52 is won, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the guide driving section 56 so that the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state, and when the return condition to the non-induction state is satisfied. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the induction unit 52 is returned to the non-induction state. Further, when the opening start condition of the distribution entrance 61 is satisfied in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a driving signal to the driving unit 63 for the distribution entrance so that the distribution entrance 61 is in an open state, When the condition for closing the sorting inlet 61 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped to bring the sorting inlet 61 into a closed state. Further, when the conditions for starting the guidance to the V winning passage area 65c are established in the allocation execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the switching drive section 67 so that the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guidance position. , the output of the drive signal is stopped and the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position when the return condition to the retracted position is satisfied. Further, when the conditions for starting the opening of the big winning hole 37a are established in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 sends a drive signal to the drive unit 37c for the special electric so that the big winning hole 37a becomes an open state in which game balls can win. When the closing condition of the big winning hole 37a is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the big winning hole 37a is brought into a closed state in which the winning of game balls is impossible. Further, in each game round, during the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35 and in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 performs display control of the special figure unit 42 . Further, when the lottery result of whether or not the guidance unit 52 is to be in the guidance state is specified, the MPU 92 performs display control of the general figure unit 43 .

The blackout monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply/launch controller 88, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch controller 88, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 87 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 86 based on prize ball commands input from the MPU 92 of the main control device 81 .

The power supply/emission control device 88 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a game hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control device 81, the payout control device 87, etc. are each generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 88 is provided with a power supply section 88a for power supply and a power supply section 88b for power interruption. The power-on power supply unit 88a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power. It has the function to The power-off power supply unit 88b is composed of a capacitor, and supplies electric power from the power-on power supply unit 88a when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (when power is being supplied from an external power supply). is charged by In addition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or in a power interruption state (when the power supply from the external power supply is interrupted) such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply during power interruption 88b discharges the main power. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 81 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 87 . Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 and the RAM of the payout control device 87 is not erased while the backup power is supplied from the power supply unit 88b for power failure. stored in memory.

Here, the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 87 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. be done. In this case, the backup power is supplied to these RAMs from the power supply section 88b for power interruption as described above, so that the current game can be played even in a situation where there is no power supply from the power supply section 88a for power supply. It is possible to store and hold the state, progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 from the power supply section 88b for power failure. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 88a is stopped. erased.

A relatively large capacity is ensured for the power supply section 88b for power interruption, and the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 before the power interruption is held for a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). be. The power supply section 88b for power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply/launch control device 88 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) that is different from the power supply unit 88b for power failure. In the power supply/launch control device 88, even after the stable 24 volt DC power supply becomes less than 22 volts, by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure, It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power source for the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main controller 81 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply/launch control device 88 is provided with a launch control section 88c in addition to various power supply sections 88a and 88b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control section 88c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is sent to the firing control unit 88c. output to Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the shooting control section 88c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operating handle. In addition, the firing control unit 88c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. to grasp the amount of rotation operation.

The launch control unit 88c transmits a condition fulfillment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 of the main control unit 81 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 88c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. is received from the push sensor 28b, the HI-level condition establishment signal (signal corresponding to the establishment of the condition) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 92 . If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 92 . However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition establishment signal corresponding to the establishment of the condition.

In the MPU 92, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the shooting of the game ball can be permitted, a HI level firing permission signal (a signal corresponding to the firing permission) is sent to the firing control unit 88c. continue to send. When the MPU 92 does not receive a HI level condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 88c, it transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to firing permission). The relationship between level and HI level may be reversed.

The shooting control unit 88c is electrically connected to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and when receiving the HI level shooting permission signal from the MPU 92, drives and controls the game ball shooting mechanism 27 periodically. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, one game ball is shot to the game area PA in a specific shooting period (specifically 0.6 sec). . In addition, since the shooting intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of shooting, the game ball is shot with intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle.

The audio emission control device 101 includes an audio emission control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 103, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 104. A RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 103 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74 based on commands received from the main control device 81 , and transmits commands to the display control device 111 .

The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113 is mounted. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 113, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 114. A RAM 115, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 113 controls the pattern display device 44 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 101 .

In addition to the MPU 113, the display control board 112 also includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 44 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and causes the pattern display device 44 to display the image data. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 44 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 44, and the display content of the pattern display device 44 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the main controller 81 are referred to as the main MPU 92, the main ROM 93 and the main RAM 94, and the MPU 103, ROM 104 and RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 are referred to as sound and light. The side MPU 103, the sound and light side ROM 104 and the sound and light side RAM 105 are called, and the MPU 113, the ROM 114 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 are called the display side MPU 113, the display side ROM 114 and the display side RAM 115.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to set the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display unit 42a, the lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 44, the general symbol display unit 43a, and more specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for lottery of winning generation and a type counter C2 used for determining the type of winning. , a distribution counter C3 used for the lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a game in the special figure display unit 42a and the pattern display device 44 and a variation type counter CS used when determining the variable display period of times. Furthermore, a general electric random number counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the guidance unit 52 of the second operating section 33 should be in the guidance state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 94. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds "1" to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 provided in the main side RAM 94 when the winning to the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 occurs. . The special figure reservation area 122 is provided with a first area 123a, a second area 123b, a third area 123c and a fourth area 123d, according to the winning history of the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33, Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in one of the areas 123a to 123d as the reserved information on the first special figure side.

In this case, in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, when the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 wins a plurality of consecutive times, the first area 123a→second area 123b→ Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the third area 123c→fourth area 123d. Since the four areas 123a to 123d are provided in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 123 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

In the special figure reservation area 122, an execution area 124 for special figures is provided in addition to the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d. The execution area 124 for the special figure is an area in which reservation information of the target for performing the propriety determination and the type determination for the special figure is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started in the special figure display section 42a. To the execution area 124 for the special figure, the reservation information stored in the first area 123a is shifted when the variable display of the special figure display section 42a is started.

Information corresponding to the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a winning to the distribution through winning section 35 occurs. The distribution execution area 125 is an area in which numerical information for determining the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is stored when the distribution execution mode in the distribution winning device 36 is started. In the distribution execution area 125, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period in which the prize winning in the distribution through prize section 35 is valid, a distribution counter C3 is displayed. is stored.

Information corresponding to the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general general drawing reservation area 126 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a prize to the special drawing through winning section 34 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 126 includes a first area 127a, a second area 127b, a third area 127c and a fourth area 127d. The numerical information of C4 is stored in one of the areas 127a to 127d as reserved information on the normal map side.

In this case, in the first area 127a to the fourth area 127d, when winning to the special figure thru winning section 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area 127a→second area 127b→third area 127c → Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area 127d. By providing the four areas 127a to 127d in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the special figure through winning section 34 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the general pattern reservation area 126 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. may be

The normal map reservation area 126 is provided with an execution area 128 for the normal map. The execution area 128 for the normal map is an area in which pending information to be used for determination of propriety for guidance is stored when the variable display is started in the normal map display unit 43a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 43a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 127a of the normal map reservation area 126 is shifted to the execution area 128 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric random number counter C4 will be described. The general electric random number counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of "0 to 250" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the general electric random number counter C4 at that point in time is stored in the general electric drawing reservation area 126 at the timing when the game ball wins the special drawing through winning section 34.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the guidance unit 52 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general electrical random number counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as the support mode so that the guidance unit 52 has different support modes. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency of the guidance unit 52 being in the guidance state per unit time is relatively high when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so as to be relatively high and low.

The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the induction state in the induction state lottery using the general electric random number counter C4 (for example, both 4/5), but the high frequency support mode , the number of times that the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state when the guidance state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the guidance unit 52 is maintained in the guidance state in one guidance control execution time. The upper limit induction period is set long. In this case, when the guidance state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the guidance state of the guidance unit 52 occurs multiple times, the closed period from the end of one guidance state to the start of the next guidance state is , is set shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next induction state lottery after one induction state lottery is performed (that is, the normal figure display unit 43a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation unit 33 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation unit 32 is higher than in the second operation unit 33, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is more likely than the first operation unit 32. The probability of winning the part 33 is increased. When a winning to the second operation unit 33 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to be in the induced state per unit time is not limited to the above. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of becoming high. In addition, the time secured after one guidance state lottery is performed and the next guidance state lottery is performed In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than the low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be Furthermore, the number of times the induction state is executed is increased, the upper limit induction period is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured after one induction state lottery is performed and the next induction state lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. .

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 399" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 399). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the value of the winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 32 or the second operation part 33. - 特許庁Then, using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1, determination of winning or losing is performed.

The value of the random number that will be won in the judgment of success or failure is stored in the main ROM 93 as a success or failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as win/fail lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in winning is ten. On the other hand, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in winning is twenty. As long as the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary. In the case of a winning result, a prize valid period occurs during which the prize winning to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution becomes effective, and distribution is executed with the occurrence of the prize winning to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution as a trigger. mode will be changed.

The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 29" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of winning results are set. These multiple winning results are divided into (1) win/fail lottery mode in a winning lottery after the end of the branch execution mode or after the end of the opening/closing execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and (2) without transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It is set by providing a difference between the two conditions, that is, the support mode in the guidance unit 52 of the second operating section 33 after the end of the branch execution mode or after the end of the open/close execution mode.

The distribution destination of the winning result for the type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a type table. And, as such a distribution destination, a low probability jackpot result and a high probability jackpot result are set. Specifically, in the type table, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 15" corresponds to a low probability result, and "16 to 29" is a high probability result. Yes.

The low-probability result is that the winning/failure lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end of the branch execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode or after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This is the result. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The high-probability result is that the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end of the branch execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode or after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This is the result. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the winning lottery result becomes a winning result and the prize-winning valid period of the through prize-winning section 35 for sorting shifts accordingly.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state does not mean the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35, the distribution execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode, and the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode. It refers to a state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

The sorting counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 29" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The distribution counter C3 is periodically updated, and at the timing when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the value of the distribution counter C3 at that time is changed. It is stored in the execution area 125 for distribution. Then, the distribution execution mode is executed in an execution mode corresponding to the numerical information stored in the execution area 125 for distribution.

Here, in the distribution execution mode, a predetermined number of times the distribution entrance 61 is opened with a predetermined distribution open period as an upper limit is executed a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined distribution side upper limit It continues until one of the conditions that the number of game balls wins in the sorting winning device 36 is satisfied. In addition, one opening mode of the distribution winning device 36 is set in a plurality of types with different distribution opening periods from opening of the distribution entrance 61 to closing thereof. Specifically, the distribution-side long-term mode is set to 29 sec, which is a long distribution open period, and the distribution-side middle mode is set to 15 sec, which is a medium-time period shorter than the long distribution period. A period mode and a short-term mode in which the distribution open period is set to 0.5 sec, which is a short time shorter than the middle time, are set. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. be done. In addition, the distribution side upper limit number in the distribution execution mode is set to ten. Then, in the distribution-side long-term mode and the distribution-side medium-term mode among the above-described open modes, the distribution-opening period is set to be longer than the product of the firing period of the game ball and the distribution-side upper limit number. It will happen. On the other hand, in the sorting-side short-term mode, a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the sorting-side upper limit number, more specifically, a sorting open period of time shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set. It is Therefore, when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution side long-term mode or the distribution side medium-term mode, prizes corresponding to the distribution side upper limit number are generated at the distribution entrance 61. Therefore, it is expected that no winning to the distribution entrance 61 occurs when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution side short-term mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of execution modes of the distribution execution mode are set. Specifically, a first distribution execution mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened only once in the distribution-side long-term mode, and a distribution-side short-term mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened once. After that, there is a second distribution execution mode in which the distribution entrance 61 is opened once according to the distribution side middle period mode.

The operation modes of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIGS. 8(a1) and 8(a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIGS. 8(b1) and 8(b2) show the distribution open period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 8(c2) show the period during which the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is arranged at the V-leading position.

First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8(A). At the timing of t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8(a1), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8(b1). In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, opening is performed in the distribution-side long-term mode.

After that, at timing t2, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 sec) elapses after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started, the switching piece 66 is V-guided from the retracted position as shown in FIG. 8(c1). position. After that, at timing t3, the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from timing t2, and the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-lead position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 8(c1).

In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution entrance 61 is executed in the distribution side long-term mode, and the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position is determined in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. Even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning the prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 from before the start of the first distribution execution mode, the number of winning prizes to the distribution prize winning device 36 surely reaches the distribution side upper limit number. It's time not to. Therefore, if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize in the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance 61 will win a prize in the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is reliably guided to the passage area 65c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. - 特許庁When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the first distribution execution mode is finished.

After that, when the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 8(b1) and shown in FIG. 8(a1). Thus, the first distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number before the distribution open period elapses, the distribution entrance 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t4 and the first Distributed execution mode ends. However, even in this case, as already explained, the first distribution execution mode ends after the game ball is guided to the V winning path area 65c.

Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8(B). At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8(a2), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8(b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the number of opening times of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side short-term mode. The distribution opening period in the distribution side short-term mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened to when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V-induction position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8(b2) and 8(c2), at timing t12, which is timing prior to timing t13, which is timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position, the distribution inlet 61 is closed. Closed. However, even if the distribution entrance 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode is continued without ending.

After that, at timing t13, which is the situation in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution inlet 61 continues to be closed, a predetermined After a lapse of time (for example, 3 seconds), the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V-guided position as shown in FIG. 8(c2). After that, at timing t14 in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution entrance 61 continues to be closed, a V-induction continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from timing t13. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 8(c2).

In this case, in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short-term mode, so no winning to the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Also, even if a prize is awarded to the distribution winning device 36, the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first open round ends is branched in the distribution winning device 36. The longest period required for the path 65 to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c is the period from the end of the first opening turn to the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position. shorter than (timing of t12 to timing of t13). Therefore, even if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize in the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 may detect the game ball. sex is low. Since the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is not started after the second apportionment execution mode ends.

At the timing t15, which is the timing after the timing t14 at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 8(b2). . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 correspond to the distribution-side intermediate period mode. After that, at the timing of t16, the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side middle period mode elapses, and the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 8(b2), and shown in FIG. 8(a2). Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side middle period mode, the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number during the distribution open period by the distribution side middle period mode. obtain. Then, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number before the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side intermediate period mode elapses, at a timing earlier than the timing of t16. The distribution entrance 61 is closed and the second distribution execution mode ends.

As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if a game ball aimed at winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 is normally launched, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and the second The open/close execution mode occurs after the end of the one-distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, even if a game ball aimed at winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 is normally launched, detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. Therefore, the open/close execution mode does not occur after the second distribution execution mode ends. As a result, the player expects that the first distribution execution mode will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Incidentally, in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that the opening times in which the large winning opening 37a is opened is executed a predetermined number of times with a predetermined special electric open period as the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is the large winning opening. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions for winning 37a is met. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode is set to 15 times, and in each round game, the special electric signal opening period is 29 seconds, and the opening of the big winning opening 37a whose upper limit number is 10 is 1. is executed only once. In this case, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player as already explained. Since it is controlled, the special electric discharge period in each round game is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if game balls aimed at winning a prize to the special electric prize winning device 37 are normally launched, a number of game balls equal to or larger than the upper limit number will win the big prize winning opening 37a in each round game. Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 37 is paid out each time a prize to the big prize winning port 37a is generated. Therefore, when a shift to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the player is given the benefit of an increase in the number of game balls that the player can use.

In addition, even if any of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode occurs, the distribution side upper limit number of game balls to the distribution winning device 36 is won in the corresponding distribution execution mode. can occur. Therefore, the total number of prizes awarded to the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode can be made the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to make the total number of game balls to be put out the same or substantially the same in these branch execution modes. As a result, even if the second distribution execution mode is basically not accompanied by a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the increase in the number of game balls that the player can use is the same as in the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to obtain a profit, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage due to the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

The mode of selection of the distribution execution mode for the distribution counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a distribution table. Specifically, in the distribution table, among the values of the distribution counter C3 of "0 to 29", "0 to 2" correspond to the first distribution execution mode, and "3 to 29" correspond to the first distribution execution mode. It corresponds to the second distribution execution mode. That is, the selection probability is set lower in the first distribution execution mode than in the second distribution execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may have the same or substantially the same selection probability, and the second distribution execution mode may be the first distribution execution mode. A configuration in which the selection probability is set lower than in the one-distribution execution mode may be employed.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 198" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side MPU 92 determines the variation display period in the special figure display section 42a. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 42a.

<Regarding the relationship between the flow of the game and the contents displayed on the symbol display device 44>
Next, the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display contents on the symbol display device 44 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display contents on the symbol display device 44. As shown in FIG.

In a situation where none of the game times, the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode are executed, the game ball is placed in either the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33 is won, or if the reservation information is reserved and stored in the special drawing reservation area 122, as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, the variable display of the pattern is started in the special figure display section 42a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9A, the pattern display device 44 also starts an effect for the game cycle.

FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the winning effective period of the game round and distribution through winning section 35 and the display contents of the symbol display device 44 in the distribution execution mode. In the following description, the period during which the game times, the prize-winning effective period of the distribution-use through-winning section 35, and the distribution execution mode are executed are also referred to as the unit variation execution period.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), during the unit variation execution period, the pattern display device 44 has three variation display areas 131, a first variation display area 131, a second variation display area 132 and a third variation display area 133. .about.133 are set. In each of these three variable display areas 131-133, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed. As these plural kinds of symbols, 9 kinds of symbols with numbers "1" to "9" are set. When the patterns are varied and displayed in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133, the nine patterns are sequentially displayed in ascending numerical order in any of the variable display areas 131 to 133. FIG. After the symbol "9" is displayed, the symbol to be displayed returns to the symbol "1". The first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 are set side by side in the upper area of the display surface of the pattern display device 44, and the third variable display area 133 on the display surface of the pattern display device 44 is the first variable display area. The area below the display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 is set so as to include the center position in the horizontal direction.

When the success/failure determination process is executed for the reserved information on the special figure side in the main side MPU 92 and the effect for the game round is started, that is, when the unit variation execution period is started, shown in FIG. 9 (A) As described above, the variable display of the symbols is started in all of the first variable display area 131, the second variable display area 132 and the third variable display area 133 in the symbol display device 44. FIG. After that, the variable display of the symbols is sequentially stopped in the order of the first variable display area 131→the second variable display area 132→the third variable display area 133. FIG. In this case, if the prize-winning effective period of the distribution through prize-winning section 35 does not occur, the symbol display device 44 does not display the reach fluctuation as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 is terminated without stopping the combination of the ready-to-win symbols and the combination of the winning symbols.

9 ( As shown in c) and FIG. 9(C), a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed when the stop symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 are the same symbol, and in that situation, the third variation is displayed. In the display area 133, reach variable display is performed in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In other words, in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132, the stop result after the variable display of the pattern corresponds to the result of the validity determination process for the reservation information on the special figure side, and the result of the validity determination process is hit. If the result is not the result, the same symbol will not be stop-displayed in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132, and if the result of the winning/failure determination process is the winning result, the first variation display area. The same symbols are stopped and displayed in 131 and the second variable display area 132 .

The timing at which the reach variation display is started on the symbol display device 44 corresponds to the end timing of the effect for the game round, and the winning effective period of the distribution through winning section 35 is started at this timing. When the valid winning period of the distribution through winning section 35 is started, as shown in FIG. A winning target notification image 134 is displayed to notify that the player should aim for a prize. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special figure through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 and The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special figure thru winning unit 34, the distribution thru winning unit 35, the second operation unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distribution winning device 36 An image is displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode, and furthermore, an image indicating that a prize in the distribution through prize winning portion 35 should be aimed at is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that it is the valid winning period of the through winning section 35 for sorting. Therefore, it becomes easy to carry out a shooting operation aimed at winning a prize in the through prize-winning portion 35 for sorting.

A shooting operation aimed at winning a prize to the distribution through prize winning section 35 is performed, and as shown in FIG. Judgment processing is executed. When the target selected in the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 starts the first distribution execution mode as shown in FIG. 9(e). Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. Further, even when the first allocation execution mode is started, the display of the winning target notification image 134 is continued together with the reach variation display. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special figure through winning portion 34, the sorting through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 and The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special figure thru winning unit 34, the distribution thru winning unit 35, the second operation unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distribution winning device 36 The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the prize-winning notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that the player should aim for the distribution through prize-winning section 35 to an image indicating that the player should aim for the distribution prize-winning device 36 . The content of the prize-winning notification image 134 is the same when the second allocation execution mode is started.

As already explained, in the first allocation execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 basically detects the game ball. As shown in FIG. 9(f), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the variable display of the pattern in the third variable display area 133 ends even during the first distribution execution mode. do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9D, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is a symbol forming a combination of ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132. be. In other words, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 ends in a state in which the winning symbol combination is stopped and displayed even in the middle of the distribution execution mode. It will happen. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur.

After that, when the first distribution execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. 9(g). When the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display device 44 starts a display effect corresponding to the start of the opening/closing execution mode in a state in which the prize-winning notification image 134 is displayed. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special figure through winning portion 34, the sorting through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 and The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special figure thru winning unit 34, the distribution thru winning unit 35, the second operation unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distribution winning device 36 The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the prize-winning notification image 134 is changed from the image showing that the player should aim for the distribution prize-winning device 36 to the image showing that the special telegraph prize-winning device 37 should aim for the prize. The content of the prize-winning target notification image 134 is the same when the game ball is detected by the V-winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode and the open/close execution mode is generated.

On the other hand, when the target selected in the distribution determination process of the main MPU 92 is the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 starts the second distribution execution mode as shown in FIG. 9(h). be done. Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. As already explained, in the second distribution execution mode basically the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, so basically the opening and closing execution mode does not occur after the second distribution execution mode ends. Also, the variable display of the pattern in the third variable display area 133 ends at the timing when the second distribution execution mode ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9E, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is the symbol forming the combination of the ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132. are different designs. In other words, when the distribution execution mode ends without the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 ends without the combination of winning symbols being stopped and displayed. Become. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will not occur. Even if the first distribution execution mode occurs, if the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect the game ball, the opening and closing execution mode does not occur, so the combination of the winning symbols is stopped and displayed. The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated without being executed.

Here, even if the second distribution execution mode is executed in the distribution winning device 36 as shown in FIG. detection can occur. For example, in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is first opened once in the distribution side short term mode. Winning to the minute winning device 36 occurs, and the winning game ball stays for some reason upstream of the branch position to the V winning passage area 65c in the discharge passage area 65b, and the switching piece 66 moves to the V guiding position. It is conceivable that by reaching the branch position after being arranged, it will be guided to the V winning path area 65c. Such an event can occur due to ball jamming or the like even when a game is played legally, and can also occur due to fraudulent behavior.

As shown in FIG. 9(j), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the pattern in the third variable display area 133 of the pattern display device 44 is displayed even during the second distribution execution mode. The fluctuation display of ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9F, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is the symbol forming the combination of the ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132. are different designs. That is, when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the second distribution execution mode, the combination of winning symbols is not stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44 . Furthermore, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is a symbol that is not included in the symbols to be displayed when the variable display of the symbol is performed in the third variable display area 133. Specifically, " The pattern is "E". This pattern is stopped and displayed only when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the second allocation execution mode. As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player and the manager of the game hall that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in spite of the second allocation execution mode.

After that, when the second distribution execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. 9(k). In the opening/closing execution mode, although the prize-winning notification image 134 corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode already explained on the pattern display device 44 is displayed, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening/closing execution mode is not started. Instead, the display mode of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 9(E) is maintained. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify that the opening/closing execution mode is generated from the second branch execution mode even during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode is different from the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode.

The execution manner of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode and the execution manner of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described below with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11(A) shows the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode, and FIG. 11(B) shows the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode. 11(a) shows the period during which the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and FIG. 11(b) shows the opening/closing status of the special electric prize winning device 37. FIG. 11(A) and 11(B) show the case where the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 37 does not occur in each round game.

First, with reference to FIG. 11(A), the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first allocation execution mode will be described.

At the timing of t1, the opening/closing execution mode is entered, and at the timing of t2 when the special electric opening period T1 has passed, opening of the special electric winning device 37 in the first round game is started. Also, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing t3 when the special electric open period T2 has passed. After that, at the timing of t4 when the first special electric closing period T3 (specifically, 2 sec) has passed, opening of the special electric winning device 37 in the second round game is started. Then, at timings t5 to t10, the closing of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the special electric power open period T2 and the opening of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the first special power electric power closing period T3 are repeated.

After that, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started at the timing of t11, which is the timing when the special electric open period T2 in the last round game has passed. Then, at timing t12 when the ending period T4 has passed, the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the manner of execution of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second allocation execution mode will be described.

At the timing of t21, the opening/closing execution mode is entered, and at the timing of t22, which is the timing after the special electric opening period T1, which is the same as the situation triggered by the first allocation execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 37 in the first round game is activated. opening is started. Also, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing of t23, which is the timing after the special electric open period T2 has passed, which is the same as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

After that, at the timing of t24 when the second special electric closing period T5 (specifically, 60 sec) longer than the first special electric closing period T3 has passed, the opening of the special electric winning device 37 in the second round game is started. . Then, at the timing of t25 to t30, the closing of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the special electric power open period T2 and the opening of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the second electric power closing period T5 are repeated.

After that, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started at the timing of t31, which is the timing when the special electric open period T2 in the last round game has passed. Then, at the timing of t32, which is the timing after the ending period T4 that is the same as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the special electric closing period between rounds is longer than in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting section 73 and the speaker section 74, informs to that effect. As a result, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware of the fact during the opening/closing execution mode, and to give the manager sufficient time to deal with it. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to reduce the rate of execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the unit time due to the fraudulent act can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the amount of profit obtained per hit.

Also, the period during which the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation in which the game ball is shot, etc., by lengthening the closed period, opening and closing triggered by the second distribution execution mode It is possible to reliably extend the execution mode for a long time.

Further, instead of lengthening the opening/closing execution mode by extending only the ending period, the special electric closing period before the last round game is lengthened to lengthen the opening/closing execution mode. It is designed to be As a result, when the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by a fraudulent act, the fraudulent act is dealt with at a stage before the payout of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to

In addition, the upper limit number of each round game and the special electric open period are the same in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode, in contrast to the case where the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode as a result of regular play rather than by cheating. It is possible to make the payout of game balls equivalent to .

<Regarding various processes executed by the main MPU 92>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 92 to progress the game will be described. The processing of the main MPU 92 can be roughly classified into main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 sec has elapsed since the main process was started, without proceeding to the next process. After that, access to the main RAM 94 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 92 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM deletion button provided in the power supply/launch control device 88 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase button has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main-side RAM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 87 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 87 .

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the main MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining processing, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S110). Also, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 94, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S113). After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a period of 4 msec.

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 95, and when the occurrence of power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the sorting counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After that, as in step S111, random number initial value update processing is executed (step S203), and as in step S112, variation counter update processing is executed (step S204). After that, game stop determination processing is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. After that, on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 37c, 56, 63, 67 is executed. For example, when the information to switch the distribution entrance 61 of the distribution winning device 36 to the open state is set, the output of the driving signal to the driving unit 63 for the distribution entrance should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 to the V-leading position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started, and the information for switching to the retracted position is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when information is set to switch the guidance unit 52 of the second operating section 33 to the guidance state, output of the drive signal to the guide drive section 56 is started, and information to be switched to the non-guided state is set. If so, the output of the driving signal to the guide driving section 56 is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, winning detection processing is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, signals received from various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 are read, and the general winning section 31, the first operating section 32, the second operating section 33, the special figure thru winning section 34, the distribution A process of specifying whether or not there is a prize to the through-prize winning unit 35, the distribution prize-winning device 36, and the special electric prize-winning device 37 is executed.

After that, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 94 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

Thereafter, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S211). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, setting for game stop is performed in the above step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S212). In a situation where the shooting operation is continued with respect to the shooting operation device 28, one game ball is shot every 0.6 sec so as to have a predetermined shooting cycle, as already explained.

After that, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 33a to 59b and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed (step S213).

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round in the special figure display unit 42a, display control of the distribution display unit 42c, execution control of the distribution execution mode and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed ( step S214). In addition, the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 is a guidance propriety judgment for determining whether or not to be in the guidance state, and a normal diagram for switching the guidance unit 52 between the guidance state and the non-guidance state. A power control process is executed (step S215). In the general/universal power supply control process, if the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35 is not in the distribution execution mode or the opening/closing execution mode, and if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it corresponds to the low frequency support mode. The display control of the normal map display unit 43a and the drive control of the guidance unit 52 are performed by the content, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display control and guidance of the normal map display unit 43a are performed with the content corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Drive control of the unit 52 is performed. In addition, in the general-to-universal power control process, if the prize-winning effective period of the distribution through prize-winning unit 35, the distribution execution mode, or the opening and closing execution mode, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is high-frequency support until just before that Set the support mode to the low-frequency support mode regardless of whether or not it was set to the mode. As a result, the guide unit 52 prevents the flow of game balls directed to the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode or the flow of game balls directed to the special electric prize winning device 37 in the opening/closing execution mode. becomes possible.

After that, based on the processing result of step S214 to step S215 just before, the setting of the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of the reserved information on the special figure side to the special figure reserved display unit 42b, and the reserved information on the general figure side The output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number in the general pattern reservation display unit 43b is set (step S216). In addition, based on the processing result of step S214 to step S215 just before, setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 42a, the output information for updating the display content of the distribution display unit 42c Setting and setting of output information for updating the display contents of the normal map display unit 43a are performed (step S216).

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 87 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S217). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S218). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S219).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S219 is executed, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 has occurred, the processing for acquiring the special figure side reservation information is executed, and the special figure side reservation When the information is stored, a decision is made as to whether or not the reservation information is valid, and further, with the decision as a trigger, a process for performing an effect for the game cycle is executed. In addition, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a winning result, the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is generated after the performance for the game round is executed, and the distribution through prize winning section 35 is generated during the prize valid period. When a prize is won, a process for shifting to a sorting execution mode is executed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, a process of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the distribution execution mode ends.

Concretely, in special figure special electric control processing first execution of reservation information acquisition processing of special figure side (step S301). In the special figure side hold information acquisition process, in a situation where the number of special figure side hold information stored in the special figure reservation area 122 is less than the upper limit storage number To the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 When the winning occurs, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the type counter C2 as the reservation information of the special figure side, the special figure side in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d of the first special figure reservation area 123 It is stored in the area on the side of the earlier consumption order among the areas in which the pending information is not stored. In addition, when the reservation information on the special figure side is acquired, the data for updating the display contents of the special figure reservation display unit 42b in accordance with the increase in the number of the reservation information on the special figure side this time Make settings. Moreover, when the hold information on the special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 . As a result, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the special figure in the design display device 44 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the reserved information on the side of the special figure.

Then, the special figure special electric address table memorize|stored in main side ROM93 is read (step S302). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set. The special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing contents to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main side MPU 92 .

The special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game cycle, a process for controlling the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, and a process for controlling the distribution execution mode. and processing for controlling the open/close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game round, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305) which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and for advancing the effect for the game round Special figure fluctuation process (step S306), which is the process of , and special figure determination process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, a distribution standby process (step S308) is set as a process for controlling the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35. FIG. In addition, as processing for controlling the distribution execution mode, distribution start processing (step S309), which is processing for controlling the opening of the distribution execution mode, and control of the period after the opening of the distribution execution mode A distribution process (step S310), which is a process for doing so, is set. Further, as processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, special electric start processing (step S311) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 37. special electric open process (step S312), special electric closed process (step S313) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 37, the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and the end of the opening and closing execution mode A special electric end process (step S314), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state, is set.

The special special electric counter can take a value of "0" to "9", and each value of "0" to "9" corresponds to the start address SA0 to SA9 of each process (step S305 to step S314). ing. Specifically, when the special figure special electric counter value is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305) is executed, and when the special figure special electric counter value is "1" When the figure fluctuation process (step S306) is executed, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure confirmation process (step S307) is performed, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is " 3", the distribution standby process (step S308) is to be executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "4", the distribution start process (step S309) is to be executed, When the value of the special special electric counter is "5", the distribution processing (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "6", special electric start processing (step S311) is to be executed, and if the value of the special special electric counter is "7", the special electric open processing (step S312) will be executed, and if the value of the special electric electric counter is "8", the special electric will be closed The medium processing (step S313) is to be executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "9", the special electric end processing (step S314) is to be executed.

In the special special electric control process, after reading the special special electric address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric address table (step S303), and the acquired Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). Hereinafter, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305), special figure fluctuation processing (step S306), special figure determination processing (step S307), distribution standby processing (step S308), distribution start processing (step S309 ), allocation processing (step S310), special electric start processing (step S311), special electric open processing (step S312), special electric closed processing (step S313), and special electric end processing (step S314) will be described separately.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of pieces of reservation information on the special figure side is one or more (step S401: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S402). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 123a of the special figure reservation area 122 is moved to the execution area 124 for the special figure. Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of the special figure reservation area 122 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 123a to 123d to the lower area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of first area 123a, third area 123c→second area 123b, fourth area 123d→third area 123c. Further, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the special figure reservation display section 42b are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 . Thereby, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the special figure in the design display device 44 is updated corresponding to the decrease of the reserved information on the side of the special figure.

After executing the data setting process, the propriety determination process is executed (step S403). In the success/failure determination process, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is read from the main ROM 93. read from After reading the success/failure table, the information for success/failure determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is the above-mentioned success/failure table. is matched with any of the numerical information set as the winning result.

If the result of the win/fail determination process is a hit result (step S404: YES), the type determination process is executed (step S405). In the type determination process, the type table is read from the main ROM 93, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type counter C2 is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical value is read. It is determined whether the information corresponds to either the low-probability result or the high-probability result set in the type table.

After executing the type determination process, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of winning result specified in the type determination process (step S406). Specifically, when it corresponds to the low probability hit result, the low probability flag is set to "1", and when it corresponds to the high probability hit result, the high probability flag is set to "1". . It should be noted that, in the following description, the process of determining whether or not there are various winning results is performed by determining whether or not the corresponding flag in the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". Further, when "1" is set in step S406, the game state transition processing is executed when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends or when the opening/closing execution mode ends. Cleared to "0" when

After executing the winning result flag setting process, the winning result stop result setting process is executed (step S407). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for the hit result stored in advance in the main side ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94 . In this stop result table for winning results, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a are set differently for each type of winning result. The main side RAM 94 stores the information of the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of the winning result specified by . The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the winning results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for winning results for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is not a winning result (step S404: NO), a stopping result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S408). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the game round this time is specified from the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main ROM 93, and the The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of a winning result.

After executing one of the stop result setting processes, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S409). In the process of specifying the variable display period, a process for specifying the variable display period of the game round is executed. Specifically, first, the variable display period table corresponding to the support mode in the current game round and the results of the success/failure determination process and the type determination process is read from the main ROM 93 . These variable display time tables are set so that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when the result of the hit/fail determination process is a hit result than when the result is a miss result, and the result of the type determination process is high. If it is a definite hit result, it is set to be easier to select a longer variable display period than if it is a low definite hit result, and if the result of the success/failure determination process is an off result, the number of reserved information on the special figure side It is set so that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when there is less than when there is more, and when the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result, the high-frequency support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A longer fluctuation display period is set so that it is easy to be selected, and if the result of the pass/fail judgment process is an outlier, the fluctuation is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. The display period is set so that it is easy to select. By setting the table for the variable display period in this way, the average value of the variable display period is longer when the result of the win/fail determination process is a winning result than when the result is a losing result. If the result of the type determination process is a high probability result, the average value of the variable display period will be longer than if the result is a low probability result. The average value of the variable display period is longer when the number of pending information is smaller than when it is large. The average value of the variable display period is longer than in the case where the variable display period is longer, and if the result of the pass/fail judgment process is an outlier, the variable display period is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. longer average. Note that the average value of the variable display periods as a whole is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect for the game round on the pattern display device 44 is such that the game round with a longer variable display period increases the player's expectation. For example, the number of characters for effect that appears increases in game rounds with a longer variable display period.

Information on the variable display period specified by the variable display period specifying process is set in a timer counter provided in the main RAM 94 . When the variable display period information is set in the timer counter, every time the timer update process (step S210) of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed until the value of the timer counter becomes "0" subtracted.

After that, the command for variation and the type command are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S410). The variable command includes information on the variable display period specified in step S409. The type command includes information on game results (results of winning/failure determination processing and results of type determination processing).

Thereafter, after reading the variation display table for the special figure display section 42a from the main side ROM 93 to the main side RAM 94 (step S411), the variation display of the design is started in the special figure display section 42a (step S412). The variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a is a table in which the variation display pattern of the pattern in the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a is predetermined. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display unit 42a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display section 42a, the variation display table for the special figure display section 42a is repeatedly used until the variation display period determined in step S409 elapses.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S413). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter that was added by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation processing ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step S306).

<Processing content of the sound and light side MPU 103>
The variable display period information read out as described above is set in the command for variation and transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 as described above. A processing configuration for performing execution control of the effect for the game round by the sound and light side MPU 103 will be described below. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 103 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, a table setting process for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 92 is executed (step S501). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing table setting processing. When the variable command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 92 (step S601: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S602). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the results of the winning/failure determination process and the type determination process determined by the main side MPU 92 at the start of the current game cycle are specified, and the specified information is sent to the sound light. Write to the side RAM 105 .

After that, an effect lottery process for determining the content of the effect for the game round is executed (step S603). In the effect lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 44 is to perform an advance notice display in the current game round. The advance notice display is a state in which the pattern is displayed in all of the first variable display area 131, the second variable display area 132, and the third variable display area 133 in the symbol display device 44, or the first variable display area. In 131, the variable display of the symbols is stopped, but in the situation where the variable display of the symbols is performed in both the second variable display area 132 and the third variable display area 133, the state of the symbol display device 44 is displayed for advance notice. This is a display effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a winning result will occur in the current game round, in other words, the degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in the current game round. The modes for notice display include a mode for using the background image of the pattern display device 44 as a background image for notice display, a mode for displaying a character image for notice display, and a mode for displaying a character image for notice display. The aspect etc. which are made into a kind are mentioned.

In the effect lottery process, the effect lottery table corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is read from the main side ROM 93, and the value of the lottery counter whose value is periodically updated in the main side RAM 94 is read. Then, the value of the lottery counter is collated against the present effect lottery table to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice display and the type of advance notice display to be executed. In this case, the probability of occurrence of the advance notice display is set higher in the game times corresponding to the winning result than in the game times corresponding to the losing result. In addition, it is easier to select a type of advance notice display with a higher degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in game rounds corresponding to winning results than in game rounds corresponding to losing results. In addition, a game round corresponding to a high-probability result is more likely to select a type of advance notice display with a higher degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed than a game round corresponding to a low-probability result. Further, the longer the variation display period of the game cycle, the higher the probability of occurrence of the announcement display is set, and the more likely it is to select the kind of announcement display with a high degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed.

After executing the effect lottery process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S604). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is a loss result, the stop result is that the same symbols are not combined in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 of the symbol display device 44. The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game round. In this case, since the prize-winning effective period of the distribution through prize-winning section 35 does not occur after the game round ends, not only the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 but also the third variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 In the display area 133 as well, the variable display of the symbols is ended. Therefore, as the stop result information in this case, not only the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 but also the third variable display area 133 determines the type of symbols to be stopped. The combination of the stop symbols in the first variable display area 131, the second variable display area 132 and the third variable display area 133 in the case of a misalignment result is determined by lottery while avoiding the combination of the ready-to-win symbols and the combination of the same symbols. be done.

In addition, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low-probability result, a combination of the same even number of symbols is displayed in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 of the symbol display device 44. is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game cycle. In this case, after the game cycle is finished and the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variable display area 133 in a state in which the ready-to-win symbols are formed by the same even symbols. will be displayed. The type of combination of ready-to-win symbols with even-numbered symbols is determined by lottery. Also, if the stop result of the current game cycle is a high-probability hit result, the stop result will be a combination of the same odd-numbered symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 in the symbol display device 44. The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game cycle ends and the prize winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variable display area 133 in a state in which the ready-to-win symbols are formed by the same odd number symbols. will be displayed. The kind of combination of ready-to-win symbols with odd-numbered symbols is determined by lottery.

Even in the case of a low probability hit result, a combination of reach symbols with the same odd number of symbols can be formed, and even in the case of a high probability hit result, a combination of reach symbols with the same even number of symbols can be formed. may be formed. In this case, when the result is a high probability hit result, it is easier to select an odd number of patterns as a combination of reach patterns than when the result is a low probability hit result. It is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the result is a certain hit result. In addition, when the result is a low probability hit result, odd patterns are not selected as a combination of reach patterns, while when the result is a high probability hit result, an even pattern or an odd pattern is selected as a combination of reach patterns. may be In addition, instead of the configuration in which the combination of reach patterns with odd-numbered patterns corresponds to a high-probability result and the combination of reach-patterns with even-numbered patterns corresponds to a low-probability result, the pattern of "3" or the pattern of "7" A combination of ready-to-reach symbols based on some symbols corresponds to a high-probability result, and a combination of ready-to-reach symbols based on other symbols corresponds to a low-probability result.

After that, readout processing of the control table corresponding to the content of execution of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S605). In this process, information on the variable display period is specified from the content of the command for variation received this time, information on the variable display period, information on the game result specified in step S602, and the effect lottery in step S603. A control table corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the process and the stop result information determined in step S604 is read from the sound and light side ROM 104 and written to the sound and light side RAM 105. FIG. In the control table, the content of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the effect for the current game round and the content of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 corresponding to the effect for the current game round are set. Light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are performed according to the control table.

Thereafter, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S606). The variation pattern command includes information on the variable display period of the game round to be started, information on the combination of stop symbols, information on whether or not to execute the advance notice display, and if the advance notice display is executed, the execution target. Information on the type of advance notice display is included. When the display side MPU 113 receives the variation pattern command, the symbol display device 44 starts display control for executing the effect for the game round.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), after executing the table setting process, the command transmission process is executed (step S502). In the command transmission process, in a situation where the control table is read in the sound and light side RAM 105, when the transmission timing of the command set in the control table comes, the command of the type set in the control table is sent. to the display side MPU 113.

After that, light emission control processing is executed (step S503), and sound output control processing is executed (step S504). In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting section 73 is performed according to the table read out to the sound and light side RAM 105 in the table setting process of step S501. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is performed according to the table read out to the sound/light side RAM 105 in the table setting process of step S501. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed (step S505). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the table read out in the table setting process of step S501 to the data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing content of the display side MPU 113>
Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing execution control of an effect for a game cycle in the display side MPU 113. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec, by the display-side MPU 113 .

In the V interrupt process, when a command is received from the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S701: YES), the display pattern table corresponding to the received command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written to the display side RAM 115 (step S702). . For example, when a variation pattern command is received from the sound and light side MPU 103 , the display pattern table of the type corresponding to the variation pattern command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written to the display side RAM 115 . This display pattern table contains the variable display period in the current game cycle, the type of combination of stop symbols, whether or not to execute advance notice display, and the type of advance notice display to be executed when the advance notice display is executed. Compatible with combinations. Therefore, display control is executed by the display-side MPU 113 according to the display pattern table, so that the symbol display device 44 executes the effect for the game round over the variable display period determined by the main-side MPU 92. When it is determined that the sound and light side MPU 103 executes the notice display, the kind of notice display determined by the sound and light side MPU 103 is executed by the symbol display device 44 during the performance for the game round. be done. Further, when the effect for the game cycle ends, the symbol display device 44 displays the combination of stop symbols determined by the sound and light side MPU 103 .

When a negative determination is made in step S701, or when the processing of step S702 is executed, pointer update processing is executed (step S703). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the display pattern table read out in step S702 to the data corresponding to the current control process. After that, task processing is executed (step S704). In the task processing, parameters necessary for displaying one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing on the pattern display device 44 are calculated. After that, drawing list output processing is executed (step S705). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of an image corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created on the pattern display device 44, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 112. It is transmitted to the VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP creates drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM (not shown) according to this drawing list, thereby causing the pattern display device 44 to display an image for one frame.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S306 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the fluctuation display period of the current game round in the special figure display section 42a has not passed (step S801: NO), and when it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display section 42a (step S802: YES) , Data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 42a by referring to the variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a read at step S411 in the special figure variation start process (Fig. 15) ( step S803). As a result, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a are updated to the display contents of the next order.

Aspect at the time of starting the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a, and the update aspect of the variation display of the pattern are performed in a constant manner regardless of the processing result of the processing result of the propriety determination process and the type determination process, It is carried out in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the game round effect on the symbol display device 44 . For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once, and a display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern The stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the order of display. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 42a.

On the other hand, when the variable display period has passed (step S801: YES), the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display section 42a stored in the main side RAM 94 at the start of the game round is read out (step S804). As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display section 42a. The mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the special figure display unit 42a is the winning valid period of the distribution through winning unit 35, regardless of whether it is in the distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode, in the special figure display unit 42a This is maintained until the next pattern variation display is started. Also, information of the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S805). Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started.

After that, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S806). When receiving the final stop command from the main MPU 92, the sound/light MPU 103 transmits the final stop command to the display MPU 113 in other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the final stop command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 stops and displays the combination of the stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. Read the display pattern table for As a result, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game cycle is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44 over the final stop period.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S807). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special electric counter corresponds to the special figure fixed processing (step S307) by adding 1 becomes "2".

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step S307 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the final stop period has passed (step S901: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a loss result (step S902: NO), the value of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0". (step S903). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S305).

When the final stop period has passed (step S901: YES) and the game result of the current game cycle is a winning result (step S902: YES), the variation display table for the distribution display section 42c is displayed. After reading from the main-side ROM 93 to the main-side RAM 94 (step S904), the sorting display section 42c starts the variable display of the pattern (step S905). The variable display table for the sorting display unit 42c is a table in which pattern variable display patterns are predetermined when the sorting display unit 42c performs variable display of patterns. The same variable display table is used when the variable display of patterns is executed in the sorting display section 42c. When the variable display of patterns is performed in the sorting display section 42c, the variable display of patterns according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of patterns is performed in the sorting display section 42c, the variable display table for the sorting display section 42c is repeatedly used until the sorting execution mode ends.

Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S906). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure confirmation processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special electric counter that became the addition target by adding 1 is the distribution standby processing ( It becomes "3" corresponding to step S308).

Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S907). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the distribution display start command from the main side MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S607 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and outputs the control table corresponding to the distribution display start command. It is read from the light-side ROM 104 to the sound/light-side RAM 105 (step S608). In the control table, light emission control data for the display light emitting section 73 and sound output control data for the speaker section 74 are set during the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 . By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the winning effective period, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the winning effective period. Also, a sort display start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S609). When the display side MPU 113 receives the distribution display start command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 reads out the display pattern table for continuing the reach fluctuation display during the winning valid period. . As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . Further, the symbol display device 44 displays the prize-winning notification image 134 for notifying that the player should aim for the prize-winning of the distribution through prize-winning section 35, as described above.

<Distribution standby processing>
Next, the distribution standby process executed in step S308 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the distribution standby process, first, update processing of the distribution display section 42c is executed (step S1001). In the update process, when it is time to update the display contents of the distribution display section 42c, refer to the fluctuation display table for the distribution display section 42c read at step S904 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 20) to set data for updating the display contents of the distribution display section 42c. As a result, the display contents of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c are updated to the display contents of the next order.

The mode at the start of the variable display of patterns in the distribution display section 42c and the update mode of the variable display of patterns are the types of winning results in the immediately preceding game cycle and the duration of the variable display of patterns in the distribution display section 42c. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the pattern display device 44, and is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the effect on the pattern display device 44.例文帳に追加For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once, and the display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeated, and when the distribution execution mode ends, the display Regardless of the order in which the patterns are displayed, the stop result corresponding to the game result in the distribution execution mode is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the distribution display section 42c.

After that, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution (step S1002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution occurs only in step S1002. As a result, the valid winning period for the distribution through winning section 35 occurs only when the game cycle corresponding to the winning result is completed.

If a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S1002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1003). Then, using the numerical information stored in the allocation execution area 125, allocation determination processing is executed (step S1004). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches with any of

If the result of the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode (step S1005: YES), the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1006). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode by the main side MPU 92, When the value of the first distribution execution flag is "1", it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed, and when the value of the first distribution execution flag is "0", specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. The value of the first distribution execution flag is cleared to "0" when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

After that, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1007). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the first distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S610 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and outputs the control table corresponding to the first distribution command. It is read from the light-side ROM 104 to the sound/light-side RAM 105 (step S611). Data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the first distribution execution mode are set in the control table. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. be done. In addition, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to these 1st distribution execution modes differ from the light emission effect and sound output effect corresponding to the 2nd distribution execution mode. Also, the first distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S612). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the first distribution command from the sound and light-side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display pattern for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the first distribution execution mode is displayed. read the table. As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed at, as already described. In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the first distribution execution mode among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode is to be executed this time. be done.

On the other hand, when the result of the distribution determination process is the second distribution execution mode (step S1005: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1008). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the second distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S613 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and outputs the control table corresponding to the second distribution command. It is read from the light-side ROM 104 to the sound/light-side RAM 105 (step S614). Data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the second distribution execution mode are set in the control table. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. be done. In addition, the light emission effect and sound output effect corresponding to these second distribution execution modes are different from the light emission effect and sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Also, the second distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S615). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second distribution command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), the display pattern for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the second distribution execution mode read the table. As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed at, as already described. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the second distribution execution mode of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode is to be executed this time. be done.

After that, the timer counter of the main RAM 94 is set with the information of the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) (step S1009). As a result, the measurement of the distribution opening period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1010). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the distribution standby processing is executed is "3", the value of the special special electric counter corresponds to the distribution start processing (step S309) by adding 1. It becomes "4".

<Distribution start processing>
Next, the distribution start processing executed in step S309 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the distribution start process, first, the distribution display section 42c is updated (step S1101). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

In the distribution start process, when the opening period for distribution has passed (step S1102: YES) and the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1103: YES), "1" is set in the opening/closing number counter SOC provided in the main RAM 94, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1104). The opening/closing number counter SOC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times the distribution entrance 61 of the distribution winning device 36 is opened and closed in the current distribution execution mode. The winning counter PC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number remaining in the distribution side upper limit number in the current distribution execution mode. Also, the first distribution open period (specifically, 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1105).

On the other hand, if the distribution opening period has passed (step S1102: YES) and the value of the first distribution execution flag in the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S1103: NO), the main The opening/closing number counter SOC of the side RAM 94 is set to "2", and the winning counter PC of the main side RAM 94 is set to "10" (step S1106). Also, the second distribution open period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1107).

When the process of step S1105 or step S1107 is executed, the open setting process for distribution is executed (step S1108). In the open setting process, "1" is set in the register corresponding to the drive unit 63 for the sorting entrance in the main MPU 92 . As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the distribution entrance is started to switch the distribution entrance 61 to the open state. . In this case, after the processing of step S1105 is performed, the distribution entrance 61 is opened in the distribution side long-term mode, and after the processing of step S1107 is performed, the distribution side short-term mode The sorting inlet 61 is opened.

Thereafter, a distribution open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1109). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the distribution open command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S616 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the distribution open command to the sound and light side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S617). In the control table, data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 after the distribution opening period has passed in the distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes the corresponding light emitting effect after the distribution opening period in the distribution execution mode has passed, and the speaker unit 74 performs distribution in the distribution execution mode. After the opening period has passed, the corresponding sound output effect is executed. It should be noted that these light emission effects and sound output effects are different between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Also, a distribution release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S618). When the display side MPU 113 receives the distribution release command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), it reads the display pattern table for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the distribution execution mode. . As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed at, as already described. Also, on the symbol display device 44, an image is displayed to allow the player to recognize the current execution target of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the sorting entrance 61 is in an open state.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1110). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the distribution start processing is executed is "4", the value of the special special electric counter is "4" corresponding to the distribution processing (step S310) by adding 1. 5”.

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution processing executed in step S310 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the sorting process, first, the sorting display section 42c is updated (step S1201). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

In the sorting process, on the condition that it is time to switch the switching piece 66 of the sorting winning device 36 from the retracted position to the V-leading position (step S1202: YES), the register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 "1" is set (step S1203). As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started to switch the switching piece 66 to the V-lead position. As already explained, the timing of switching the switching piece 66 to the V-lead position is the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) has passed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 was first started in the distribution execution mode.

In the sorting process, on the condition that it is time to return the switching piece 66 of the sorting winning device 36 from the V guidance position to the retracted position (step S1204: YES), the register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is stopped so as to switch the switching piece 66 to the retracted position. The timing for returning the switching piece 66 to the retracted position is, as already explained, the timing when the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after switching the switching piece 66 to the V-lead position.

In the distribution processing, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 (step S1206: YES), the V winning flag provided in the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". ” is set (step S1207). The V winning flag is a flag for the main side MPU 92 to specify that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and when the V winning detection sensor 69 is already set to "1", When a game ball is detected in the state in which "1" is set, the state is maintained.

After that, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1208). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the V prize command from the main side MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S619 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and downloads the control table corresponding to the V prize command from the sound and light side ROM 104. It is read out to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S620). In the control table, data for light emission control of the display light emitting section 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker section 74 after the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize is executed in the display light emitting part 73 and the sound output effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize is executed in the speaker part 74 .

Also, a V winning command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S621). When the display side MPU 113 receives the V winning command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the V winning detection sensor 69 notifies that the game ball has been detected. Read the display pattern table of In this case, as the display pattern tables, a first display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of a V prize in the first distribution execution mode and a second display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of a V prize in the second distribution execution mode. A display pattern table is provided. When the first display pattern table is read out, as shown in FIG. 9(D), the same symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 are displayed. The display of the symbol display device 44 is controlled so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area 133 . In addition, an image notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the pattern display device 44 separately from the patterns in the respective variable display areas 131-133.

On the other hand, when the second display pattern table is read, as shown in FIG. are different symbols and are not included in the symbols to be displayed when the variation display of the symbols is performed in the third variation display region 133. Device 44 is display controlled. In addition, an image notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the pattern display device 44 separately from the patterns in the respective variable display areas 131-133.

In the sorting process, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not it is during the sorting closed period. The distribution closed period is a period from the end of the first opening of the distribution entrance 61 to the start of the second opening of the distribution entrance 61 in the second distribution execution mode. If it is not during the distribution closed period (step S1209: NO), the distribution open period (first distribution open period, second distribution open period and third distribution open period) set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 ) has elapsed (step S1213). If the distribution open period has passed, a distribution closing setting process is executed (step S1214). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the distribution entrance drive unit 63 in the main MPU 92 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the sorting entrance is stopped so as to switch the sorting entrance 61 to the closed state. . After that, the value of the opening/closing number counter SOC of the main RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S1215). A sorting closing period (specifically, 6 sec) is set in the timer counter of the side RAM 94 (step S1217). As a result, the measurement of the distribution closing period is started.

If the distribution closed period has been set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1209. Then, when the distribution closed period has passed (step S1210: YES), the third distribution open period (specifically, 15 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1211). Then, open setting processing for distribution is executed (step S1212). In the open setting process, "1" is set in the register corresponding to the drive unit 63 for the sorting entrance in the main MPU 92 . As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the distribution entrance is started to switch the distribution entrance 61 to the open state. . In this case, the distribution entrance 61 is opened in the distribution-side intermediate period mode.

As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the opening/closing number counter SOC of the main-side RAM 94 in step S1215, if the value of the opening/closing number counter SOC becomes "0" (step S1216: NO), the distribution end processing of step S1222 is executed. Run. Also, when it is determined that the distribution open period has not passed in step S1213, it is determined that the game ball is detected by either the count detection sensor 68 or the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. As a condition (step S1218: YES), the value of the winning counter PC in the main RAM 94 is subtracted by 1 (step S1219), and under the condition that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" (step S1220: YES), step Similar to S1214, a closing setting process for distribution is executed (step S1221). After that, in step S1222, distribution end processing is executed.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the sorting end process in step S1222. When the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1301: NO), stop result setting processing when V winning does not occur is executed (step S1302). In the stop result setting process, the information on the pattern stop mode of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the V winning detection sensor 69 not detecting the game ball is read. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the fact that the V prize is not generated in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display section 42c. The state of the pattern stopped and displayed in the distribution display section 42c is until the next fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started regardless of whether it is the execution period of the game round and whether it is in the open/close execution mode. maintained. In addition, without being limited to this, when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display up to that point in the distribution display section 42c It may be configured to be erased. In this case, the allocation display section 42c may have a configuration in which nothing is displayed, or a configuration in which the display indicating the non-fluctuation is continued.

Thereafter, game state transition processing is executed (step S1303). In the game state transition processing, if the winning result that triggered the distribution execution mode this time is a low probability winning result, the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. do. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the win result that triggered the distribution execution mode this time is a high-probability win result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the result of the win/fail determination process becomes a winning result and the prize-winning valid period of the sorting-through prize-winning section 35 shifts accordingly.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S1304). In the flag clearing process, the various flags used in the game round that triggered the current distribution execution mode and the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode are cleared to "0". Moreover, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1305). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S305).

On the other hand, when the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), a stop result setting process when the V winning occurs is executed (step S1306). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read. This pattern stop mode information is information on a stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when V winning does not occur in step S1302. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display section 42c. Further, in step S1306, information on different stop modes is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode, and when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, shaking is performed. The patterns are stopped in a different manner when the variable display of the patterns on the minute display portion 42c ends. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the distribution display section 42c which distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the opening and closing execution mode that will occur thereafter. . In addition, as already described, the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the sorting display unit 42c is maintained until the next variable display of the pattern in the sorting display unit 42c is started. continues to be displayed. As a result, by checking the allocation display section 42c at any timing during the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which allocation execution mode the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. It is possible to confirm.

After that, the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 is set with the information of the special electric opening period (for example, 3 sec) (step S1307). As a result, the measurement of the opening period for the special electric is started. Further, in step S1308, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1". Determine which of the execution modes it is. If it is the first distribution execution mode (step S1308: YES), the first opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1309). If the mode is the second distribution execution mode (step S1308: NO), the second opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1310).

When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the first opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S622 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the first opening command to the sound and light side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S623). In the control table, light emission control data for the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data for the speaker unit 74 in the open/close execution mode triggered by the first allocation execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the first distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered is executed. Also, the first opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S624). When the display side MPU 113 receives the first opening command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is performed. Read the display pattern table for executing As a result, the symbol display device 44 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the second opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S625 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the second opening command to the sound and light side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S626). In the control table, light emission control data for the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data for the speaker unit 74 in the open/close execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the second distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered is executed. Also, the second opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S627). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second opening command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is performed. Read the display pattern table for executing As a result, the symbol display device 44 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

When the process of step S1309 or step S1310 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1311). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the sorting process is executed is "5", the value of the special special electric counter is "6" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S311) by adding 1. becomes.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric power start processing executed in step S311 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special electric start process, if the special electric opening period has passed (step S1401: YES), the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "15" (step S1402), and the winning of the main RAM 94 is performed. Set the counter PC to "10". The round counter RC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the winning counter PC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the remaining maximum number of prizes that can be won by the special electric winning device 37 in each round.

After that, the special electric discharge period of the round game (specifically 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1404). Then, a special electric open setting process is executed (step S1405). In the open setting process, "1" is set in the register corresponding to the drive unit 37c for the special electric in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 37c for the special electric power is started in order to switch the big winning opening 37a to the open state.

After that, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1406). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the open command from the main side MPU 92, it transmits the open command to the display side MPU 113 in other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the opening command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the big winning opening 37a is being opened. Read the display pattern table. As a result, the symbol display device 44 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the big winning opening 37a is being opened.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1407). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "6", by adding 1, the value of the special electric electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S312). becomes.

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, the processing during opening of the special electric power which is executed in step S312 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the tokuden open period has not elapsed (step S1501: NO), on condition that a prize to the tokuden winning device 37 has occurred (step S1502: YES), the value of the winning counter PC is subtracted by 1 (step S1503). Then, if the value of the winning counter PC after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1504: YES), the value of the round counter RC is subtracted by 1 (step S1505). Also, when the special electric release period has passed (step S1501: YES), the value of the round counter RC is subtracted by 1 (step S1505).

Thereafter, by determining whether or not the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode. (Step S1506). If the first distribution execution flag is set to "1" (step S1506: YES), the first special electric closing period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1507), and the first distribution execution flag If "1" is not set (step S1506: NO), the second special electric closing period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1508).

The second special electric closing period is set longer than the first special electric closing period as already explained, and is set longer than the special electric open period. Specifically, the first special electric closing period is set to 2 seconds, while the second special electric closing period is set to 60 seconds, which is more than twice as long as the special electric open period. Also, the setting of the second special electric closing period is always performed between round games in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the ball in the first distribution execution mode. As compared with the case where the opening/closing execution mode is started when the game ball is detected, the minimum time required for the end is longer.

When the process of step S1507 or step S1508 is executed, the closing setting process for the special train is executed (step S1509). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the drive unit 37c for the special electric in the main side MPU 92 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive section 37c for the special electric power is stopped in order to switch the big winning opening 37a to the closed state.

After that, a closing command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1510). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the close command from the main side MPU 92, it transmits the close command to the display side MPU 113 in other processes of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the close command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the closing of the big winning opening 37a. Read the display pattern table. As a result, the symbol display device 44 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the big winning opening 37a is being closed.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1511). Since the value of the special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "7", the value of the special electric electric counter is "8" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S313) by adding 1. becomes.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing executed in step S313 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" (step S1601: NO), the special electric closing period (first special electric closing period) is determined by checking whether the timer counter value of the main side RAM 94 is "0". period or second special electric closing period) has passed (step S1602). If the special electric power closing period has passed (step S1602: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter PC of the main side RAM 94 (step S1603), and the special electric power opening period (specifically 29 sec) of the round game is set. It is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1604). After that, as in step S1405 in the special electric start processing (FIG. 25), the opening setting processing for special electric is executed (step S1605), and similarly to step S1406 in the special electric electric start processing (FIG. 25), the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1606). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1607). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "8", the value of the special electric special electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S312) by subtracting 1. ”.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is "0" (step S1601: YES), an ending command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1608). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the ending command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 downloads the control table corresponding to the ending command from the sound and light side ROM 104 in other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). Read out to the side RAM 105 . Data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the ending period are set in the control table. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the display light emitting part 73 and the sound output effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the speaker part 74 . Also, the sound and light side MPU 103 transmits an ending command to the display side MPU 113 . When the display-side MPU 113 receives the ending command from the sound and light-side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display-side MPU 113 reads the display pattern table for executing the display effect corresponding to the ending period. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the ending period is executed on the symbol display device 44 .

After that, information of the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1609). Thereby, the measurement of the ending period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1610). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "8", the value of the special electric electric counter is "9" corresponding to the special electric end processing (step S314) by adding 1. becomes.

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step S314 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special electric ending process, if the ending period has passed (step S1701: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S1702). In the game state transition processing, if the winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low-probability winning result, the winning/failure lottery mode is set to a low-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. . However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the win result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a high-probability win result, the winning/failure lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the result of the win/fail determination process becomes a winning result and the prize-winning valid period of the sorting-through prize-winning section 35 shifts accordingly.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S1703). In the flag clearing process, various flags used in the game round that triggered the execution of this distribution execution mode, various flags used in this distribution execution mode, and various flags used in this opening and closing execution mode Clear the flag to "0". Also, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1704). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S305).

<How the game progresses>
Next, how the game progresses in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 29(a) shows the execution period of the game round, FIG. 29(b) shows the timing when the winning to the distribution through prize winning section 35 occurs, and FIG. 29(c) shows the execution period of the distribution execution mode. , FIG. 29(d) shows the timing when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, FIG. 29(e) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, and FIG. f) shows the period during which the variable display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display section 42a, FIG. h) indicates a period during which the game cycle effect is executed on the pattern display device 44 and a period during which the reach variation display is not executed, and FIG. FIG. 29(j) shows a period during which a combination of the same three symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44. FIG.

First, a case in which the result of the success/failure determination is an outlier will be described.

At the timing of t1, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 29(a), and as shown in FIG. As shown in 29(h), the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, by the elapse of the variable display period of the game round, as shown in FIG. As shown, the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is terminated, and the current game round is terminated as shown in FIG. 29(a). In this case, in the special figure display section 42a, the result of the success/failure determination process is out and the pattern corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed. In addition, in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, a combination of symbols different from the combination of the ready-to-win symbols and the combination of the same symbols is stop-displayed.

Next, a case will be described in which the hit result is determined in the win/fail determination process, and the shift to the distribution execution mode does not occur, although the shift to the open/close execution mode does not occur.

At the timing of t3, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 29(a), and as shown in FIG. As shown in 29(h), the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is started. After that, at the timing of t4, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29(f), the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, in the special figure display section 42a, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process (low probability hit result or high probability hit result) is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 29(h) and 29(i), in the pattern display device 44, the first variable display region 131 Then, in the second variable display area 132, the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is stop-displayed, and in the third variable display area 133, the variable display of the symbols is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has started, the player can clearly recognize that the valid prize winning period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 has started.

Also, at the timing t4, which is the timing at which the game cycle ends, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variable display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display part 42c in the situation where the variable display of the reach is performed in the pattern display device 44, thereby the variation of the reach. It becomes possible to grasp whether the display is legitimate or not.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 29(b), a prize is awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, and the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29(c). It should be noted that even when the distribution execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29(d), while the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 does not detect the game ball, the distribution execution mode is entered at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 29(c). finish. In this case, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 29(g), the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c ends. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when no V prize is generated is displayed in the sorting display section 42c. Also, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 29(i), the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated. When the variable display is terminated, the symbols different from the symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed in the third variable display area 133 of the symbol display device 44 . As a result, the player is notified that the open/close execution mode will not occur after the allocation execution mode.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the hit result is determined in the win/fail determination process, and the mode shifts to the distribution execution mode, and then shifts to the opening/closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode ends.

At the timing of t7, by starting the game round as shown in FIG. 29(a), as shown in FIG. As shown in 29(h), the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is started. After that, at the timing of t8, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29(f), the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, in the special figure display section 42a, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process (low probability hit result or high probability hit result) is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 29(h) and 29(i), in the pattern display device 44, the first variable display region 131 Then, in the second variable display area 132, the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is stop-displayed, and in the third variable display area 133, the variable display of the symbols is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has started, the player can clearly recognize that the valid prize winning period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 has started.

Also, at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the game cycle ends, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variable display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display part 42c in the situation where the variable display of the reach is performed in the pattern display device 44, thereby the variation of the reach. It becomes possible to grasp whether the display is legitimate or not.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 29(b), a prize is awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, and the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29(c). It should be noted that even when the distribution execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

After that, at the timing of t10, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. 29(d). In this case, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 29(i) and 29(j), in the third variable display area 133 of the pattern display device 44, the same pattern as the pattern forming the ready-to-win pattern combination is displayed. appears stopped. As a result, the symbol display device 44 stops displaying the same combination of symbols in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 . Even if a V win occurs, the allocation execution mode is continued as shown in FIG. be.

After that, at the timing of t11, the distribution execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 29(c). In this case, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 29(g), the variable display of the pattern in the sorting display section 42c ends. When the variable display is terminated, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V winning occurs is stopped and displayed in the distribution display section 42c. Then, at the timing of t11, the opening/closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29(e).

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the distribution execution mode is entered, even if a game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur. Thus, in the distribution execution mode, the player not only sees the game ball entering the distribution winning device 36, but also the game ball entering the distribution winning device 36 is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. It is expected that Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. A first distribution execution mode and a second distribution execution mode are set as distribution execution modes. can occur, on the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect the game ball. As a result, the player expects that the first distribution execution mode will be executed. Therefore, the number of objects expected by the player increases, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the first distribution execution mode is not selected in the distribution determination process, the second distribution execution mode is executed. As a result, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 and the distribution determination process is executed, the distribution execution mode is executed regardless of the result of the distribution determination process. The Rukoto. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the distribution execution mode to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When a game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 37 is opened/closed occurs. As a result, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the game ball is entered into the distribution winning device 36 in the open state, and the special electric winning in the open state is performed. The state shifts to the state in which the game ball is entered into the device 37, and the state in which the game ball is entered into the device in the open state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long game execution period in which a game ball is entered into the device in the open state.

In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 37 is in the open state, so that the target to generate the winning ball changes according to each mode. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the difference between each mode in a configuration in which a game is performed in which a game ball is entered into a device that is in an open state in either the distribution execution mode or the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

In either of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, when game balls enter the distribution winning device 36, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. As a result, even when the second distribution execution mode occurs, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely lowered.

In either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode, the total period in which the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state is determined by the distribution winning device 36 in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. It is set to a period that allows the entry of game balls of the upper limit number on the minute side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage due to the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

Even if a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur. There is a high possibility that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode due to fraud. , it is possible to prevent profits from being given to such fraudulent acts.

A distribution execution mode is generated by entering a game ball into the distribution through winning section 35. - 特許庁In other words, in order to generate the opening and closing execution mode, the distribution execution mode is started by first entering the game ball into the distribution through winning section 35, and in the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is activated. It is necessary to enter a game ball to generate a V prize. As a result, the target to which the game ball is aimed is changed step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35, a transition to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the winning valid period occurs. Even if a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during a period different from , the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which the distribution execution mode is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the distribution through winning section 35 .

Different notifications are made in the symbol display device 44 depending on whether the V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode or the V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode. Similarly, when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, different notifications are executed in the distribution display section 42c. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp in which distribution execution mode the V winning occurred.

When the winning/failure determination process is executed, the variable display of the symbols is started in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, and when the winning valid period of the sorting through winning section 35 occurs, the first The reach variation display is performed in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed in the variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. This is continued even in the valid prize winning period and the distribution execution mode. Then, when a V winning occurs in the sorting execution mode, the ready-to-win fluctuation display in the third variable display area 133 is stopped in a state in which the same symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, When the distribution execution mode ends without generating a V prize, the reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped so that the combination of the same symbols is not displayed. As a result, not only is the fact that the game cycle is being executed and the result of the winning/failure determination process is notified by using the variable display of the symbols in the respective variable display areas 131 to 133, but also the winning of the through prize winning section 35 for sorting is notified. The validity period, the distribution execution mode, and the occurrence or non-occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode are notified. Therefore, it is possible to inform various information by using the variable display of the patterns in the variable display areas 131 to 133 .

During the execution of the game cycle, the special figure display part 42a performs the variable display of the pattern, and when the variable display of the pattern ends, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process is stopped and displayed. In addition, during the winning effective period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 and in the sorting execution mode, the sorting display section 42c performs the variable display of the pattern, and when the variable display of the pattern ends, the A pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the V winning is stopped and displayed. As a result, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed in the game rounds in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, in the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, and in the distribution execution mode, special symbol display is performed. By checking the part 42a and the distribution display part 42c, it is possible to individually monitor each period.

When the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started, the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started. As a result, the administrator of the game hall or the like confirms whether or not the variable display of the pattern has started in the distribution display section 42c, thereby determining whether or not the valid prize winning period of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution has started. It becomes possible to grasp clearly.

The variable display of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a is ended before the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35 is started. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the valid winning period of the through winning section 35 for sorting to be generated after that is regular by checking the special figure display section 42a. becomes.

Both the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c are directly controlled by the main side MPU92. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the contents displayed on the special figure display section 42a and the distribution display section 42c.

In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the special electric closing period between rounds is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting section 73 and the speaker section 74, informs to that effect. As a result, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware of the fact during the opening/closing execution mode, and to give the manager sufficient time to deal with it. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to reduce the rate of execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the unit time due to the fraudulent act can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the amount of profit obtained per hit.

Also, the period during which the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation in which the game ball is shot, etc., by lengthening the closed period, opening and closing triggered by the second distribution execution mode It is possible to reliably extend the execution mode for a long time.

Also, instead of lengthening the opening/closing execution mode by lengthening only the ending period, the special electric closing period before the last round game is lengthened to lengthen the opening/closing execution mode. is planned. As a result, when the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by a fraudulent act, the fraudulent act is dealt with at a stage before the payout of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to

In addition, the upper limit number of each round game and the special electric open period are the same in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode, in contrast to the case where the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode as a result of regular play rather than by cheating. It is possible to make the payout of game balls equivalent to .

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a winning result, the sorting execution mode of the type corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process or the type determination process is not executed, but the sorting is executed after the game round is completed. A type of distribution execution mode corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process executed when a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the through winning section 35 for distribution is executed. be. As a result, the player can perform the shooting operation while expecting that the kind of the sorting execution mode will be advantageous to the player during the valid prize winning period in which the sorting execution mode is confirmed to occur. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Since the distribution determination process is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35, it is possible to clarify the execution timing of the distribution determination process. Further, when a game ball enters the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period, not only the distribution determination process is executed but also the distribution execution mode is started. As a result, it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game content compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

In the sorting execution mode, the sorting display section 42c performs a variable display of patterns, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the sorting execution mode is being executed by checking the sorting display section 42c. becomes. In addition, in a configuration in which a transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs and a case in which the transition to the opening and closing execution mode does not occur depending on whether or not V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, in the distribution execution mode The stop result of the distribution display section 42c changes depending on whether or not the V winning has occurred. As a result, the distribution display section 42c is not only used as a display section for notifying that the distribution execution mode is being executed, but also as a display for notifying whether or not V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. It is possible to function as a part.

The content of the stop result when the variable display of the pattern in the sorting display section 42c ends corresponds to the presence or absence of the V winning in the sorting execution mode. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not a V win has occurred in the distribution execution mode by checking the stop result when the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of confirmation when confirming whether or not a V prize has been generated based on the contents of the distribution display section 42c easy to understand.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the distribution execution mode is executed. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 30 is a time chart showing operation modes of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. 30(a1) and 30(a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIGS. 30(b1) and 30(b2) show the distribution open period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 30(c2) show the period during which the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is arranged at the V-leading position.

First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 30(A). At the timing of t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30(a1), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30(b1). In this case, the distribution-side long-term opening is performed.

After that, at timing t2, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 was first started, the switching piece 66 is V-guided from the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30(c1). position. After that, at timing t3, the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from timing t2, and the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-lead position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30(c1).

In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the distribution entrance 61 is first opened by the distribution side long-term mode, and the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. The timing is such that the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 is guaranteed to be the upper limit number on the distribution side even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning the prize to the distribution winning device 36 before the start of the first distribution execution mode. It is the timing when it does not reach Therefore, if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize in the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance 61 will win a prize in the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is reliably guided to the passage area 65c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. - 特許庁When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the first distribution execution mode is finished.

After that, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30(b1) by the elapse of the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side long-term mode at the timing of t4. At the subsequent timing t5, the sorting entrance 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30(b1). In this case, release is performed in the sorting-side short-term mode.

After that, when the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side short term mode elapses at the timing of t6, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30(b1), and as shown in FIG. , the first distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number before the distribution open period elapses, the distribution entrance 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing t6 and the first Distributed execution mode ends. For example, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, the first distribution execution mode ends at that point, and the distribution side short term mode The re-opening of the sorting inlet 61 due to does not occur. However, even in this case, as already explained, the first distribution execution mode ends after the game ball is guided to the V winning path area 65c.

Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 30(B). At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30(a2), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30(b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the number of opening times of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side short-term mode. The distribution open period in the distribution side short-term mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened to when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V-induction position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 30(b2) and 30(c2), at timing t12, which is timing prior to timing t13, which is timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position, the distribution inlet 61 is closed. Closed. However, even if the distribution entrance 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode is continued without ending.

After that, at timing t13, which is the situation in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution inlet 61 continues to be closed, a predetermined After a lapse of time (for example, 3 seconds), the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V-guided position as shown in FIG. 30(c2). After that, at timing t14 in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution entrance 61 continues to be closed, a V-induction continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from timing t13. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30(c2).

In this case, in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short-term mode, so no winning to the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Also, even if a prize is awarded to the distribution winning device 36, the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first open round ends is branched in the distribution winning device 36. The longest period required for the path 65 to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c is the period from the end of the first opening turn to the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position. shorter than (timing of t12 to timing of t13). Therefore, even if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode, there is a possibility that the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 detects the game ball. is low. Since the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is not started after the second apportionment execution mode ends.

At the timing t15, which is the timing after the timing t14 at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30(b2). . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 also correspond to the distribution side short-term mode. After that, when the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side short-term mode elapses at the timing of t16, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends.

As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if a game ball aimed at winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 is normally launched, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and the second The open/close execution mode occurs after the end of the one-distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, even if a game ball aimed at winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 is normally launched, detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. Therefore, the open/close execution mode does not occur after the second distribution execution mode ends. As a result, the player expects that the first distribution execution mode will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first distribution execution mode, game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number on the distribution side to the distribution winning device 36 can win prizes, whereas in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 Winning of game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number on the distribution side cannot be expected. Furthermore, in the second distribution execution mode, there is a high possibility that the distribution winning device 36 will not win a prize. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the first distribution execution mode over the second distribution execution mode.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the distribution standby process executed by the main MPU 92 . The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the distribution standby process, if a prize has been won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S1801: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1802). Then, using the numerical information stored in the allocation execution area 125, allocation determination processing is executed (step S1803). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches with any of

Thereafter, the display table for the distribution display section 42c is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1804). In the display table for the distribution display section 42c, data for specifying the display content of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set. That is, the display table includes data for specifying the display contents of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode and the display contents of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. data for specifying the is set. For example, when the distribution display unit 42c is a so-called 7-segment display, data for displaying "1" on the distribution display unit 42c as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is set, and data for displaying "2" on the distribution display section 42c as the display content of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is set.

After that, data corresponding to the result of the current distribution determination process is specified from the display table for the distribution display unit 42c, and the specified data is set as data for display control of the distribution display unit 42c (step S1805). ). As a result, the result of the distribution determination process is displayed on the distribution display section 42c. That is, in the present embodiment, when the distribution determination process is executed, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed in the distribution display section 42c, and the pattern changes in the distribution display section 42c. No display is performed. By displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display section 42c in this way, when the distribution execution mode is started, the distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to notify which of the minute execution modes is supported by the distribution display section 42c.

In addition, when the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is the distribution execution mode that does not involve the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. is terminated when the distribution execution mode is terminated, and is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode occurs. As a result, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode can be either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. In addition, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the opening and closing execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

Instead of the configuration in which the display on the distribution display section 42c is erased at the end of the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode or at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. It may be configured to be deleted at the end of the distribution execution mode regardless of whether or not it is, or may be configured to be deleted when a new game round is started. In addition, the distribution display unit 42c continues to display the pattern corresponding to the result of the previous distribution determination process, and when the distribution determination process is executed, the pattern is displayed corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process. A configuration in which the content can be changed is also possible.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution mode has been selected in the distribution determination processing in step S1803 (step S1806). If the first distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: YES), the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1807). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode by the main side MPU 92, When the value of the first distribution execution flag is "1", it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed, and when the value of the first distribution execution flag is "0", specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. After that, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1808). The processing contents of the sound and light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the first distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if the second distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1809). The processing contents of the sound and light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the second distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S1808 or step S1809 is executed, the information of the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1810). As a result, the measurement of the distribution opening period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1811). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the distribution standby processing is executed is "3", the value of the special special electric counter corresponds to the distribution start processing (step S309) by adding 1. It becomes "4".

Note that in the present embodiment, processing for updating the display contents in the distribution display section 42c is not executed in the distribution start processing (FIG. 22) and the distribution processing (FIG. 23).

As described above, when the distribution determination process is executed, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed on the distribution display section 42c. By displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display section 42c in this way, when the distribution execution mode is started, the distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to notify which of the minute execution modes is supported by the distribution display section 42c.

When the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is the distribution execution mode that does not involve transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It is terminated when the distribution execution mode ends, and when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode occurs. As a result, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode can be either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. In addition, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the opening and closing execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

The distribution display unit 42 c is directly controlled by the main MPU 92 . This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the information displayed on the distribution display section 42c.

A special figure display part 42a is provided separately from the distribution display part 42c, and the variation display of the pattern during the game is performed in the special figure display part 42a. As a result, the display unit for notifying that the game round is being executed and the result of the win/fail determination process, and the display unit for notifying the result of the distribution determination process, the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution It is provided separately as the display section 42c. Therefore, it becomes possible to monitor each content individually by checking the special figure display section 42a and the distribution display section 42c.

In the present embodiment, when the valid winning period for the distribution through winning section 35 is started, the variable display of the pattern is started in the distribution display section 42c, and the winning to the distribution through winning section 35 is started. When the distribution determination process is executed, the pattern variation display on the distribution display section 42c may be terminated while the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the prize winning period for the sorting through prize winning section 35 is valid by confirming whether or not the variable display of the pattern is being executed in the distribution display section 42c. becomes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a display unit directly controlled by the main side MPU 92 is provided separately from the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c, and in the distribution execution mode, the display unit displays the fluctuation of the pattern. may be configured to perform In this case, in the display unit, similarly to the distribution display unit 42c in the first embodiment, depending on whether or not V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, when ending the variable display of the pattern A configuration may be adopted in which the types of patterns to be stopped are varied.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is reliably performed. In the present embodiment, even if a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize winning effective period, the transition to the distribution execution mode may not occur. In addition, when a prize is won in the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, the probability of transitioning to the distribution execution mode and winning varies depending on the game state. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the types of winning results in this embodiment will be described. The winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being a winning result in the win/fail determination process (step S403) in the main side MPU 92, as in the first embodiment. A plurality of types of winning results are common in that they serve as triggers for starting the valid winning period of the through prize winning section 35 for sorting, but there is a combination of the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process and the winning probability in the sorting judgment process. It becomes an opportunity to change the type to a mutually different type. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, the selected winning result will be handled as long as the game cycle in which the type determination process is executed does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The setting of each winning probability is not performed.

A type table 93a is provided in the main-side ROM 93 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 32(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table 93a. In the type table 93a, there are a low probability winning result, a first high probability winning result, a second high probability winning result, a third high probability winning result, and a fourth high probability winning result, as allocation destinations of the winning results for the type counter C2. There is a high probability result and a fifth high probability result. Specifically, in the type table 93a, of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability hit result, "10 to 13" is the first high probability hit result , "14-17" corresponds to the second high probability result, "18-21" corresponds to the third high probability result, "22-25" is the fourth It corresponds to the high probability hit result, and "26 to 29" corresponds to the fifth high probability hit result.

Corresponding to each of these winning results, as shown in FIG. A third high-precision table group 93e, a fourth high-precision table group 93f, and a fifth high-precision table group 93g are provided. If any winning result is selected in the type determination process in a predetermined game round, and a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs with the predetermined game round as a trigger, the type determination is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends. A game state corresponding to the winning result selected in the process is set. Then, when a game round is performed in that game state, the win/fail determination process is executed using the win/fail tables included in the table group 93b to 93g corresponding to the game state, and the game round is followed by shaking. When the valid prize winning period of the split through prize winning section 35 occurs, the distribution determination process is executed using the distribution tables included in the table group 93b to 93g corresponding to the game state. In addition, the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, which is the winning result in the winning/failing determination process, is set in the winning/failing table. Further, in the distribution table, the numerical range of the distribution counter C3, which is the winning result in the distribution determination process, is set. A numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 and a numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 for winning the execution of the second distribution execution mode are set.

FIG. 32(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to each winning result. When the winning result is a low certainty, the probability of winning in the win/loss determination process is 1/40, and the probability of winning in the distribution determination process is 1/5. In this case, the combination probability of winning results in the winning/failure determination process and winning one of the distribution execution modes in the distribution determination process is 1/200. When the first high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/4 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is the same as that of the low probability result. It will be the same 1/5, and the combined probability will be 1/20, which is higher than for the low probability outcome. In the case of the second high probability result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/8 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. is also high 2/5, and the combined probability is 1/20, which is the same as in the case of the first high probability winning result. In the case of the third high probability result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/10 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. 2/5, and the combined probability is 1/25, which is lower than the first and second high-probability results and higher than the low-probability result. When the fourth high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/20 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. is also high 4/5, and the combined probability is 1/25, which is the same as in the case of the third high-probability result. In the case of the fifth high probability result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is the same as the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. is also high 1/1 (ie 100%), and the combined probability is 1/40, which is lower than for the first to fourth high-probability outcomes and higher than for the low-probability outcomes.

If the hit/fail determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a manner corresponding to one of the high probability hit results as described above, the hit/fail determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a manner corresponding to the low probability hit result. The combination probability is higher than when executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of having one of the high-probability results.

Depending on the type of high certainty hit result, the type of combination of the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the allocation determination process, and accordingly, it is possible to diversify the games.

The combined probability is different depending on the type of high probability winning result. This makes it possible to create advantages and disadvantages even in high-probability results. In addition, even when triggered by any of the high-probability winning results, the combined probability is 1/20 or less, which is the upper limit reference probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

There is a high probability winning result in which the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is lower than the other high probability results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the other high probability results. There is a high certainty result in which the winning probability of the determination process is higher than the other high certainty results, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment process is lower than the other high certainty results. As a result, it is possible to separately generate a situation in which the probability of winning in the win-or-fail judgment process and a situation in which the probability of winning in the sorting judgment process increases, and to diversify the targets for which the degree of advantage increases. Become.

Depending on the type of the high probability result, one of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the low probability result, and the other is the same as the low probability result. situation arises. As a result, one of the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process is extremely advantageous compared to the case of the low probability hit result, while the other is possible to make the advantage the same as the case of the low probability hit result. , it is possible to sharpen the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process.

The winning probability of the fifth high probability winning result is the same as that of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, and a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is assured. will occur. In this situation, as long as the winning result is obtained in the winning judgment process, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the winning result in the winning judgment process. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process regardless of which table group 93b to 93g is selected is 1/1 of the winning result in the distribution determination process. 2 is constant.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling execution of the win/fail determination process and the allocation determination process corresponding to the hit results as described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process in this embodiment. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start process is executed in step S305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of reservation information on the special figure side is one or more (step S1901: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S1902). In the data setting process, the same process as the data setting process (step S402) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, the success/failure table corresponding to the current game state is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1903). Specifically, the main RAM 94 stores a first high-precision state flag, a second high-probability state flag, a third high-probability state flag, a fourth high-probability state flag, and a A status flag and a fifth high probability status flag are provided. The state in which "1" is set in the first high-probability state flag means that it is a game state after the first high-probability winning result and the opening and closing execution mode occur after that, and the second high-probability state flag is set to "1". The state in which "1" is set means that it is a game state after the second high probability win result and the open/close execution mode is generated after that, and "1" is set to the third high probability state flag. It means that it is a game state after the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the third high probability hit result, and the state where "1" is set to the fourth high probability state flag is the fourth high probability. It means that it is a game state after the win result is obtained and the opening and closing execution mode is generated after that, and the state where the fifth high probability state flag is set to "1" becomes the fifth high probability winning result and then the opening and closing execution. It means that it is a game state after the mode has occurred, and the state where "1" is not set to all high probability state flags will result in a low probability hit result. It means that there is

In step S1903, the states of the first to fifth high-probability flags of the main RAM 94 are specified, and the right/fail table is read out of the table groups 93b to 93g of the main ROM 93 corresponding to the specified result. After that, read out the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 in the pending information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is set as the hit result in the read success table It is determined whether or not it matches with any of them (step S1904).

If the result of this win/fail determination process is a winning result (step S1905: YES), the type table 93a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1906). Since only one type of type table 93a is provided, the one type of type table 93a is read. After that, read out the numerical information obtained from the type counter C2 in the pending information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, the read numerical information is set in the type table 93a low probability result, the first high probability A hit result, a second high probability hit result, a third high probability hit result, a fourth high probability hit result and a fifth high probability hit result are determined (step S1907).

After executing the type determination process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 corresponding to the type of winning result specified in the type determination process is set to "1" (step S1908). Specifically, the main RAM 94 has a low probability winning flag, a first high probability winning flag, a second high probability winning flag, a third high probability winning flag, a fourth high probability winning flag, and a fifth high probability winning flag. At step S1908, only the winning flag corresponding to the result of the type determination processing among those winning flags is set to "1".

After that, stop result setting processing for winning results is executed (step S1909). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for the hit result stored in advance in the main side ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94 . In this stop result table for the winning result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a is set differently for each type of winning result, and in step S1909, in step S1907 The main side RAM 94 stores the information of the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of the winning result specified by . The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the winning results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for winning results for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

The processing contents of steps S1910 to S1915 are the same as the processing contents of steps S408 to S413 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the distribution standby process in this embodiment. In addition, the distribution standby process is executed in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

In the distribution standby process, first, update processing of the distribution display section 42c is executed (step S2001). In addition, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display part 42c is started in step S905 in the process (FIG. 20) during special figure determination like the said 1st Embodiment. Further, the processing content of the update processing is the same as step S1001 of the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S2002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 is made only in step S2002. As a result, the valid winning period for the distribution through winning section 35 occurs only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is completed.

If a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S2002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S2003). After that, the states of the first to fifth high-probability flags of the main RAM 94 are specified, and the distribution table is read from the table group corresponding to the specified result among the table groups 93b to 93g of the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94. By doing so, the distribution table corresponding to the current game state is read out (step S2004). FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining distribution tables included in the low-occupancy table group 93b and the first high-occupancy table group 93c. In the distribution table, out of the distribution counter C3 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" correspond to the result of deviation, and "24 to 26" correspond to the transition to the first distribution execution mode. , and "27 to 29" correspond to the transition to the second distribution execution mode. In this case, a winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/5, and a transition to the first distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 1/2 of the winning results, and 1/5 of the winning results. A transition to the second distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 2.

After that, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches any of the numerical information set as the winning result in the distribution table read out. In addition, in the distribution determination process of step S2005, when the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches the numerical information of the winning result, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution are performed. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information in the execution mode.

If the result of the distribution determination process is a winning result (step S2006: YES), a stop result setting process at the time of distribution winning is executed (step S2007). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the distribution display section 42c is read from the main ROM 93 . This pattern stop mode information is information on different stop modes when the first distribution execution mode occurs, when the second distribution execution mode occurs, and when none of the distribution execution modes occurs. is set. In step S2007, when the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, the pattern stop mode information corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is read, and the pattern in the mode corresponding to the information is stopped. Display control is performed on the distribution display section 42c so that it is displayed, and when the second distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is read. At the same time, display control is performed on the sorting display section 42c so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed.

After that, setting processing for the distribution execution mode is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, the same processes as those of steps S1005 to S1010 of the distribution standby process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, the transition setting to the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode is performed.

After that, after reading the variation display table for the V winning determination display section from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2009), the V winning determination display section starts varying display of patterns (step S2010). In the present embodiment, the result of the distribution determination process is displayed in the distribution display section 42c, so that the display for notifying that it is in the distribution execution mode and whether or not V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode As a part, a V prize judgment display part is provided separately. The V winning judgment display section is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is not possible to perform a complicated display such as that of the symbol display device 44 in the V winning judgment display section, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the V winning judgment display section. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the V winning judgment display section, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors are displayed. is displayed. The display range of the V prize determination display section is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 . As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the symbol display device 44 rather than the V winning determination display portion.

The variation display table for the V winning determination display section is a table in which the variation display pattern of the pattern to be displayed in the V winning determination display section is predetermined. The same variable display table is used when variable display of patterns is executed in the V prize determination display section. When the variable display of patterns is carried out in the V winning determination display section, the variable display of patterns according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display section, the variable display table for the V winning determination display section is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode ends. Note that in step S1101 of the distribution start processing (FIG. 22) and step S1201 of the distribution processing (FIG. 23) in the present embodiment, the updating processing of the V winning judgment display unit is performed instead of the updating processing of the distribution display unit 42c. is executed based on the above-mentioned fluctuation display table.

When the result of the distribution determination process is the result of the deviation (step S2006: NO), the stop result setting process for the result of the distribution deviation is executed (step S2011). Specifically, the pattern stop mode information corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process being the result of being out of line is read from the main-side ROM 93 . This pattern stop mode information is the pattern stop mode information that is not selected in the stop result setting process (step S2007) at the time of sorting winning. In step S2011, the information of the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the sorting determination processing being the outlier is read out, and the sort display section 42c is displayed so that the pattern in the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed. Control.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2012). In the flag clearing process, various flags used in the current game round and the current winning valid period are cleared to "0". Also, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

Here, when the result is out in the distribution determination process, the special figure fluctuation start process is executed without shifting to the distribution execution mode, but the game state transition process is not executed. Therefore, in the case of a loss result in the distribution determination process, the transition of the game state corresponding to the winning result that occurred in the game round that triggered the transition to the winning valid period of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution this time. That is, there is no change in the combination of the winning probability in the success/failure determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing sorting end processing in this embodiment. Note that the distribution end processing is executed in step S1222 in the distribution processing (FIG. 23).

In the distribution end process, when the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the stop result setting process at the time of V winning is executed (step S2102). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the V winning determination display portion corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read. This pattern stop mode information is information on a stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when V winning does not occur in step S2108. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize in the distribution execution mode of this time is displayed in the V prize determination display section. Further, in step S2102, information on different stop modes is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode and when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, V There is a difference in the way the symbols are stopped when the variable display of the symbols in the winning determination display section is finished. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the V winning judgment display section which opening/closing execution mode that will occur thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in which sorting execution mode. . In addition, the state of the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the V winning judgment display section is maintained until the next fluctuation display of the pattern in the V winning judgment display section is started. be. As a result, by checking the V prize determination display portion at any timing during the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to determine which sorting execution mode the opening and closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. It is possible to confirm.

Thereafter, in steps S2103 to S2107, the same processes as steps S1307 to S1311 of the sorting end process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag in the main RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), stop result setting processing when V winning does not occur is executed (step S2108). In the stop result setting process, the information of the stop mode of the pattern of the V winning determination display portion corresponding to the fact that the V winning detection sensor 69 did not detect the game ball is read. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the fact that the V prize has not been generated in the distribution execution mode of this time is displayed in the V prize determination display section. The state of the pattern stopped and displayed in the V winning judgment display section is until the next fluctuation display of the pattern in the V winning judgment display section is started regardless of the execution period of the game cycle and whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode. maintained. In addition, it is not limited to this, and when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display up to that point in the V winning judgment display section It may be configured to be erased. In this case, nothing may be displayed in the V prize determination display section, or a configuration may be adopted in which the display indicating the non-fluctuation is continued.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2109). In the flag clearing process, various flags used in the current game round, the current winning valid period, and the current allocation execution mode are cleared to "0". Also, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S305).

Here, when V winning does not occur in the distribution execution mode, the game state transition processing is not executed although the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed without shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, when V winning does not occur in the distribution execution mode, the transition of the game state corresponding to the winning result that occurred in the game round that triggered the transition to the distribution execution mode this time, that is, the winning/failing determination process There is no change in the combination of winning probabilities of and sorting determination processing.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in this embodiment. The game state transition process is executed at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

In the game state transition process, when "1" is set to any one of the first high probability winning flag, second high probability winning flag, third high probability winning flag and fourth high probability winning flag of the main side RAM 94 (Step S2201: YES), among the first high-precision state flag, the second high-precision state flag, the third high- certainty state flag and the fourth high- certainty state flag of the main side RAM 94, the high A high probability state flag corresponding to the probability winning flag is set to "1" (step S2202). As a result, the high-probability table group 93c to 93f corresponding to the high-probability hit result of this time will be referred to in the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process. The state of the high probability state flag set here is held until the game state transition processing (FIG. 37) is executed next time.

After that, the first high-frequency support flag in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2203). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. The state in which the first high-frequency support flag is set to "1" is maintained until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time. However, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, in the case of any of the winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode, the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode until just before that. Regardless of whether it was set or not, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, a state transition command corresponding to the high probability state flag set to "1" this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2204). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the state transition command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 stores the control table corresponding to the current state transition command in the table setting processing (step S501) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16). to the sound and light side RAM 105. As a result, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a manner corresponding to the high probability winning result of this time, and sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed in a manner corresponding to the high probability winning result of this time. Also, the sound and light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the state transition command received this time to the display side MPU 113 . When the display-side MPU 113 receives the command, it reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the pattern display device 44 based on the table.

The display contents of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the game state in which the win/fail determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the second high probability table group 93d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 38(a). do. As shown in FIG. 38(a), a probability display area 151 is displayed on the symbol display device 44 in a situation where the win/loss determination process and the distribution determination process are executed. In the probability display area 151, a probability corresponding image corresponding to the winning probability of the current win/fail determination process is displayed. In this case, the probability corresponding image is displayed based on the winning probability of the winning/failure determining process in the gaming state in which the winning/failure determining process and the allocation determining process are executed using the low-probability table group 93b. Specifically, when the second high probability table group 93d is referred to, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/4, and when the low likelihood table group 93b is referred to, the success/failure determination process is won. It is ten times the probability of 1/40. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the second high-probability table group 93d is referred to, the probability display area 151 displays the "10 times" image as the probability corresponding image. On the other hand, the winning probability of the allocation determination process including the symbol display device 44 is not reported. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to predict the probability of winning in the allocation determination process while clearly indicating the probability of winning in the winning/failure determination process to the player.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 37), when the fifth high probability winning flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the fifth high probability state flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2206). As a result, the fifth high-probability table group 93g is referred to in the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Also, as in step S2203, the first high frequency support flag in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2207). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. After that, a common shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2208). Processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 103 when the common transfer command is received will be described later.

In the game state transition process, when none of the first to fifth winning flags of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2205: NO), the first to fifth high probability state flags of the main side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2209). As a result, the low-probability table group 93b is referred to in the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Also, the second high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "1", and the end reference counter provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "100" (step S2210). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. Also, the value of the end reference counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed, and when the value of the end reference counter becomes "0", the second high frequency support flag is cleared to "0". As a result, when 100 games have been completed, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. After that, as in step S2208, a common transfer command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2211).

When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the common transfer command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 sets the control table corresponding to the common transfer command from the sound and light side ROM 104 in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). Read out to the light-side RAM 105 . As a result, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a manner in which the player cannot identify which of the low-usage table group 93b and the fifth high-usage table group 93g is to be used. Sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed. Also, the sound and light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the common transfer command to the display side MPU 113 . When the display-side MPU 113 receives the command, it reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the pattern display device 44 based on the table.

FIG. 38(b) shows the display contents of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the game state in which the winning/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b or the fifth high probability table group 93g. Description will be made with reference to explanatory drawings. As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the probability display area 151 of the pattern display device 44, a "normal" image is displayed as the probability-corresponding image. In addition, since the support mode of the induction unit 52 is set to the high frequency support mode in any of the cases where the low probability hit result and the fifth high probability hit result are obtained, the operation mode of the induction unit 52 Therefore, the player cannot grasp which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. As a result, the player plays the game while predicting which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used.

In particular, when the fifth high-probability table group 93g is used, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is the same as in the case of the low-probability table group 93b, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. It has become. In other words, if the hit result is obtained in the win/fail determination process, the sorting execution mode is surely generated. Then, when "normal" is displayed as the probability corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the pattern display device 44, the player plays the game expecting that the fifth high probability table group 93g is set. It will happen.

On the other hand, in the case of a low probability hit result, the support mode of the induction unit 52 becomes a low frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are consumed, while the fifth high probability hit result is obtained. The support mode of the guidance unit 52 is kept in the high-frequency support mode even if 100 game rounds are completed. As a result, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode is executed while allowing the player to predict which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. When the game cycle is repeatedly executed without transition to , it is possible for the player to recognize which table group is to be used.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process can vary, and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process can vary. . This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which each determination process is executed. Also, both the probability that the winning result will be selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be selected in the distribution determination process are in a situation where the low probability table group 93b is used. may have different probabilities. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution modes of both the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are fluctuating at the same time. It is possible to make it different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the case of this embodiment, in order for the transition to the open/close execution mode to occur, it is necessary that at least the winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the transition to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution judgment process. be. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes to which the player who expects the shift to the open/close execution mode will pay attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of a hit result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will affect the probability of transition to the open/close execution mode. . In this case, as described above, the low probability table group 93b is used for both the probability of winning in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning in the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. The probability may be different from the situation. This makes it possible to diversify the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode compared to a configuration in which only one of the probability of the success/failure determination process and the probability of the distribution determination process varies. In addition, even if the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are not greatly changed, the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is greatly changed. It is possible to

There are three or more types of probabilities that winning results are selected in the win/fail determination process and three or more types of probabilities that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the probability of a winning result in each determination process, and to diversify the combined probability of those determination processes.

If the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a manner corresponding to any of the high probability results, if the success/failure determination processing and the distribution determination processing are performed in a manner that corresponds to the low probability results The above synthesis probability is higher than This makes it possible to increase the advantage of having one of the high-probability results.

Depending on the type of high probability winning result, the type of combination of the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the winning probability in the success/failure determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process, and thereby to diversify the games.

The combined probability is different depending on the type of high probability winning result. This makes it possible to create advantages and disadvantages even in high-probability results. In addition, even when triggered by any of the high-probability winning results, the combined probability is 1/20 or less, which is the upper limit reference probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

There is a high probability winning result in which the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is lower than the other high probability results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the other high probability results. There is a high certainty result in which the winning probability of the determination process is higher than the other high certainty results, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment process is lower than the other high certainty results. As a result, it is possible to separately generate a situation in which the probability of winning in the win-or-fail judgment process and a situation in which the probability of winning in the sorting judgment process increases, and to diversify the targets for which the degree of advantage increases. Become.

Depending on the type of the high probability result, one of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the low probability result, and the other is the same as the low probability result. situation arises. As a result, while one of the correctness determination process and the distribution determination process is extremely advantageous than the case of the low probability hit result, the other is possible to make the advantage the same as the case of the low probability hit result, It is possible to give sharpness to the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process.

The winning probability of the fifth high probability winning result is the same as that of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, and a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is assured. will occur. In this situation, as long as the winning result is obtained in the winning judgment process, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed, so that the player's attention to the winning result in the winning judgment process can be increased. It becomes possible.

Occurrence of a V prize can change both the probability that a winning result will be selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability that the prize will be won in the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the timing at which each probability fluctuates.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in this embodiment. The game state transition process is executed at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

In the game state transition process, if the game result of the game round that occurred before the opening/closing execution mode this time is a high probability hit result (step S2301: YES), probability lottery process for winning/failure determination is executed (step S2302). In addition, in this embodiment, there is only one type of high-probability winning result. In the probability lottery process for the win/fail judgment, the winning probability of the win/fail judgment process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probabilities of the success/failure determination process that can be selected in the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination.

1/4, 1/5, 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, which are higher than the winning probability at the time of low probability, are set as the winning probability for selection in the success/failure determination process. The lottery probabilities of the respective selection target winning probabilities in the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination are all the same, and more specifically, the probability of each selection target winning probability being selected is 20%. In the probability lottery process for judging success or failure, first, the probability lottery table for judging success or failure is read out from the main ROM 93 , and then numerical information is obtained from the success or failure lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 94 . Then, the acquired numerical information is collated against the probability lottery table for winning/failing determination.

After executing the winning probability lottery process (step S2302) for the winning/failure determination, by setting the flag of the main side RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability selected in the probability lottery process to "1", the selected winning probability is set as the winning probability in the win/fail determination process (step S2303). Thus, until step S2303 is executed next time, in step S1904 of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 33), the success/failure determination processing is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the flag set to "1".

Thereafter, probability lottery processing for distribution determination is executed (step S2304). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probabilities of the distribution determination process that can be selected in the distribution determination probability lottery process.

1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1 are set as selection target winning probabilities in the distribution determination process. The lottery probabilities of the respective selection target winning probabilities in the probability lottery process for distribution determination are all the same, and specifically, the probability of each selection target winning probability being selected is 20%. In the distribution determination probability lottery process, the distribution determination probability lottery table is first read from the main ROM 93 , and then numerical information is acquired from the distribution lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94 . Then, the obtained numerical information is collated against the probability lottery table for allocation determination.

After executing the distribution determination probability lottery process (step S2304), the product of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process set in step S2303 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2304 is calculated. Calculate (step S2305). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2306). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, if 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, and if 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the sorting determination process, the cumulative result is predetermined. value, and if 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability in the sorting determination process, the cumulative result will not be less than the predetermined value. Further, for example, if 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, the above cumulative result is predetermined regardless of which winning probability is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process. value or less.

If the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2306: NO), the distribution determination probability correction process is executed (step S2307). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the distribution determination process currently selected and is the next highest after the winning probability is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2305 and S2306 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2305 to S2307 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

If the result of integration is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2306: YES), the currently selected The probability of winning is set as the probability of winning for distribution determination processing (step S2308). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the first high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. Also, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2310). As a result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected this time are reported in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44. FIG.

In the game state transition process, if the game result of the game round that occurred before the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low probability hit result (step S2301: NO), the initial probability setting process of the win/fail judgment is executed (step S2311). ). In the setting process, the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability in the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than the winning probability of all the selection targets that can be selected in the case of a high probability winning result. Execute the flag setting process. Also, the setting processing of the initial probability of distribution determination is executed (step S2312). In the setting process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability among the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the case of a high probability winning result. setting process.

After that, as in step S2210 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the second high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the end reference counter of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". "100" is set (step S2313). As a result, the high-frequency support mode with 100 game times as the upper limit is set. Also, a low probability shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2314). As a result, the display light-emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44 inform that both the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that the winning result will be selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the winning result will be shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will be determined in separate lottery processes. selected. This makes it possible to diversify the modes of combinations of probabilities.

If the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning in the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is the predetermined value. The probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected as follows. Thereby, in the configuration in which the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are selected in separate lottery processes. It is possible to keep the combined probabilities thereof within a predetermined probability range.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment. In addition, the processing during special figure determination is executed at step S307 in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14).

When the final stop period has passed (step S2401: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a loss result (step S2402: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". (step S2403). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

When the final stop period has passed (step S2401: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a winning result (step S2402: YES), the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main-side ROM 93 to the main-side RAM 94 (step S2404), the sorting display section 42c starts the variable display of the pattern (step S2405). After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S2406). Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2407). The processing contents of these steps S2404 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S904 to S907 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, first game state transition processing is executed (step S2408). In other words, the first game state transition process is executed when the game round resulting in a winning result ends. In other words, the first game state transition process is executed irrespective of the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35 and the game contents of the distribution execution mode. In the first game state transition process, as will be described later, a process for changing the winning probability of the winning/failure determination process is executed. By being executed irrelevantly, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process can change even if the shift to the distribution execution mode does not occur, and can change even if the shift to the open/close execution mode does not occur.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the first game state transition processing. First, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability hit result of the success/failure determination process (step S2501). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, one of the high probability hit result and the low probability hit result is selected in the type determination processing that is executed when the hit result is obtained in the propriety determination processing. Also when a lottery result is obtained in the sorting determination process, either a high probability winning result or a low probability winning result is selected by using a lottery counter and a lottery table different from the type determination process. In other words, there are high probability hit results and low probability hit results of the success/failure determination process, and there are high probability hit results and low probability hit results of the distribution determination process.

When it is a high-probability hit result of the success/failure determination process (step S2501: YES), the probability lottery process of success/failure determination is executed (step S2502). In the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination, as in step S2302 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/4, 1/5 set as the selection target winning probability of the success/failure determination process , 1/8, 1/10 and 1/20.

After that, the product of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process selected in step S2502 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2503). Then, it is determined whether or not the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the allocation determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the winning determination process. As follows, when 1/4, 1/5 or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability in the success/failure determination process, the cumulative result does not become less than or equal to the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2504: NO), the probability correction processing of the success/failure determination is executed (step S2505). In the probability correction process, the winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the currently selected winning/failure determining process and is the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2503 and S2504 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. If the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504: YES), the currently selected flag in the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is set to "1". The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the win/fail determination process (step S2506).

If it is not a high-probability hit result of the success/failure determination process (step S2501: NO), an initial probability setting process of the success/failure determination is executed (step S2507). In the setting process, the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability in the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than the winning probability of all the selection targets that can be selected in the case of a high probability winning result. Execute the flag setting process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the second game state transition processing. It should be noted that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

If the result is a high probability hit result of distribution determination processing (step S2601: YES), probability lottery processing of distribution determination is executed (step S2602). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, as in step S2304 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/5, 2, which are set as the selection target winning probabilities of the distribution determination process. Select one winning probability among /5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1.

After that, the product of the current winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2602 is calculated (step S2603). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2604). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already explained. Therefore, for example, if 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, if 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the sorting determination process, the cumulative result is a predetermined value. When 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability in the sorting determination process, the cumulative result does not become less than or equal to the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2604: NO), the distribution determination probability correction process is executed (step S2605). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the distribution determination process currently selected and has the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2603 and S2604 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2603 to S2605 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the cumulative result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2604: YES), by setting "1" to the flag in the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected allocation determination process, The winning probability currently selected is set as the winning probability of the allocation determination process (step S2606). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the first high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. Also, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2608). As a result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected this time are reported in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44. FIG.

If it is not a high probability hit result of the distribution determination process (step S2601: NO), an initial probability setting process of the distribution determination is executed (step S2609). In the setting process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability among the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the case of a high certainty winning result. setting process.

After that, similarly to step S2210 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the second high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the end reference counter of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". "100" is set (step S2610). As a result, the high-frequency support mode with 100 game times as the upper limit is set. Also, a low probability shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2611). As a result, the display light-emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44 inform that both the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the change in the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process is performed in the distribution execution mode when the game round that resulted in the winning result in the success/failure determination process ends. It can be executed regardless of whether it is executed or not and whether V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the distribution determination process, the change of the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode can be executed when the opening/closing execution mode generated by the V prize is terminated. In other words, a situation where the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process changes, and a situation where the probability of winning a transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process changes separately. This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

In addition, if the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will occur in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process or the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. As a result, a situation in which the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process fluctuates, and a situation in which the probability of winning a transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process fluctuates separately. , it is possible to keep the combined probability within a predetermined probability range.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configurations of the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process are different from those of the sixth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the first game state transition processing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the first game state transition process is executed in step S2408 of the process during special figure determination (FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-probability continuation number counter provided in the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S2701). In this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when the winning result is selected in the winning judgment process and the high probability winning result is selected in the type judging process, the winning probability of the winning judgment process becomes higher than the normal game state. The situation continues until the first game state transition process occurs a predetermined number of times thereafter. 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times are set as the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is determined by lottery. Even if the low probability winning result is selected by the type determination processing in a situation where the number of times of continuation is one or more, the winning probability of the success/failure determination processing is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability winning result. The high-probability continuation number counter for right/wrong determination is a counter for specifying the number of continuations by the main side MPU 92 .

If the value of the high-probability continuation counter for the success/failure determination is "0" (step S2701: YES), on the condition that the high-probability hit result is selected in the type determination processing in this game round (step S2702: YES), the number of continuation lottery process for success/failure determination is executed (step S2703). As already explained, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of continuations of the state in which the winning probability in the winning/failure determination process is higher than in the normal game state. In the success/fail determination continuous count lottery process, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, numerical information is acquired from the periodically updated lottery counter in the main RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information is used. By collating against the lottery table, the number of continuations of success/failure determination is selected from 1, 2, and 3 times. Then, the number of continuations of the selected success/failure determination is set in a high-probability continuation frequency counter of success/failure determination (step S2704).

After that, probability lottery processing for success/failure determination is executed (step S2705). In the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination, as in step S2302 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/4, 1/5 set as the selection target winning probability of the success/failure determination process , 1/8, 1/10 and 1/20. These selectable winning probabilities are higher than the winning probabilities set in the case of a low certainty winning result.

After that, the product of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process selected in step S2705 and the current winning probability of the allocation determination process is calculated (step S2706). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2707). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the allocation determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the winning determination process. When 1/4, 1/5, or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability in the success/failure determination process, the cumulative result does not fall below the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2707: NO), the probability correction processing of the success/failure determination is executed (step S2708). In the probability correction process, the winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the currently selected winning/failure determining process and is the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2706 and S2707 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2706 to S2708 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. If the synthetic probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2707: YES), the currently selected flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the win/fail judgment process is set to "1". The selected probability of winning is set as the probability of winning in the success/failure determination process (step S2709).

If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for the yes/no judgment is not "0" (step S2701: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for the yes/no judgment (step S2710). Then, if the value of the high-probability continuation number counter after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S2711: NO), the processing of steps S2705 to S2709 already described is executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is not fixed. The probability of winning in the determination process can fluctuate.

On the other hand, if the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for success/failure determination after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2711: YES), the process of setting the initial probability of success/failure determination is executed (step S2712). In the setting process, the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability in the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the event of a high certainty winning result. Execute the flag setting process.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the second game state transition processing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-precision continuation number counter for allocation determination provided in the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S2801). In this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when the winning result is selected in the distribution determination process and the high probability winning result is selected, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the normal game state. However, after that, the second game state transition processing continues until it occurs a predetermined number of times. 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times and 5 times are set as the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is determined by lottery. Even if a low certainty winning result is selected by the distribution judgment processing in a situation where the number of times of continuation is one or more, the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low certainty winning result. The high-probability continuation number counter for allocation determination is a counter for specifying the number of continuations by the main side MPU 92 .

If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for distribution determination is "0" (step S2801: YES), on the condition that a high-probability hit result is selected in this distribution determination process (step S2802: YES ), a lottery process for the number of continuations of distribution determination is executed (step S2803). As already explained, 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times are set as the number of continuations of the state in which the probability of winning in the allocation determination process is higher than that in the normal game state. In the continuous count lottery process for allocation determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, numerical information is acquired from the regularly updated lottery counter in the main RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information is obtained. is collated against the lottery table to select the number of continuous allocation determinations from 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 times. Then, the number of continuations of the selected allocation determination is set in the high-probability continuation number counter of the allocation determination (step S2804).

Thereafter, probability lottery processing for distribution determination is executed (step S2805). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, as in step S2304 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/5, 2, which are set as the selection target winning probabilities of the distribution determination process. Select one winning probability among /5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1.

After that, the product of the current winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected in step S2805 is calculated (step S2806). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already explained. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the sorting determination process, the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and if 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability in the sorting determination process, the combination probability of the integration result will not be equal to or less than the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2807: NO), the distribution determination probability correction process is executed (step S2808). In the probability correction process, the winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the distribution determination process that is currently selected and has the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2806 and S2808 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2806 to S2808 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807: YES), by setting the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected allocation determination process to "1", The winning probability currently selected is set as the winning probability of the sorting determination process (step S2809).

If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for distribution determination is not "0" (step S2801: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for the distribution determination (step S2810). Then, if the value of the high-probability continuation number counter after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S2811: NO), the processing of steps S2805 to S2809 already described is executed. Thus, in a situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is not fixed, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process can fluctuate each time a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. It will happen.

On the other hand, when the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for distribution determination after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2811: YES), an initial probability setting process for distribution determination is executed (step S2812). In the setting process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability among the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the case of a high certainty winning result. setting process.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process is higher than when the probability is low, the situation is such that the winning result occurs in the success/failure determination process for the number of times it continues. continue until As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of generating a highly probable hit result in the win/fail determination process. Further, there are a plurality of types of the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability of a winning result being selected in the success/failure determination process is higher than in the case of a low probability continues.

Even in a situation where the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process continues to be higher than when the probability is low, the probability may fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the probability is set.

In the distribution determination process, when the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode becomes higher than when the probability is low, the situation continues until the open/close execution mode continues for the number of times. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the occurrence of a high-probability hit result in the distribution determination process. Further, there are a plurality of types of the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is higher than when the probability is low is maintained.

Even in a situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process continues to be higher than when the probability is low, the probability may fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the probability is set.

The number of continuations for the success/failure determination process and the number of continuations for the distribution determination process are individually determined, and the types of the number of continuations that can be selected are also different. This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

In addition, if the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will occur in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process or the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. As a result, even if the number of continuations for the propriety determination process and the number of continuations for the distribution determination process are individually determined and the types of the number of continuations that can be selected are also different, they can be kept within a predetermined probability range.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is ensured. Even if a game ball is detected at 69, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode may not occur. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, even if a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. transition does not occur. In addition, when a prize is won in the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, the probability of transitioning to the distribution execution mode and winning varies depending on the game state. The configuration different from that of the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the types of winning results in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of win results in this embodiment. The winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being a winning result in the win/fail determination process (step S403) in the main side MPU 92, as in the first embodiment. A plurality of types of winning results are common in that they serve as a trigger for starting the valid winning period of the through-winning section 35 for sorting, but the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process, the winning probability in the sorting judgment process, and the V prize. occurs, it becomes an opportunity to change the types of combinations of winning probabilities in the V winning prize lottery process to mutually different types. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, the selected winning result will be handled unless a shift to the opening/closing execution mode occurs triggered by the game round in which the type determination process is executed. The setting of each winning probability is not performed.

As the distribution destination of the hit result, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the low probability hit result, the first high probability hit result, the second high probability hit result, the third high probability hit result, and the second There are 4 high probability winning results and a 5th high probability winning result. When the result is a low certainty winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/20, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 1/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/4. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/400. In the case of the first high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/4, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 1/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the second high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/8, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 2/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the third high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/10, the winning probability in the sorting judgment process is 2/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fourth high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/20, the winning probability in the sorting judgment process is 4/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. When the fifth high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a probability lower than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/1. Thus, the winning probability of the V prize lottery process is 1/1. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40.

It should be noted that the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process regardless of which winning result is selected is fixed at 1/2 of the winning result in the distribution determination process. It's becoming

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing distribution processing in this embodiment. In addition, the process for distribution is performed in step S310 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

In the allocation process, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 (step S2901: YES), the V winning lottery process is executed (step S2902). In the V winning lottery process, the V winning lottery table corresponding to the current lottery state is read from the main ROM 93, the numerical information of the lottery counter updated periodically is read from the main RAM 94, and the read numerical information is read. is collated with the read lottery table for V winning. If the result of the V winning lottery process is V winning (step S2903: YES), the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2904). As a result, as in the first embodiment, when the current distribution execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Also, in step S2905, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, if a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the processing of step S2905 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2906). In other processes, the processes of steps S1201 to S1205 and steps S1209 to S1222 of the sorting process (FIG. 23) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in the case of executing the winning determination process, the distribution determination process and the V winning lottery process in a mode corresponding to one of the high probability hit results, it corresponds to the low probability hit result The combined probability is higher than in the case where the winning/failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V prize lottery process are executed in such a manner. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high-probability result.

Depending on the type of high certainty winning result, the combination of winning probability in win/fail judgment processing, winning probability in distribution judging processing, and winning probability in V prize lottery processing is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process, the winning probability in the distribution judging process, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process, and thereby diversify the games. Become.

The combined probability is different depending on the type of high probability winning result. This makes it possible to create advantages and disadvantages even in high-probability results. In addition, even when triggered by any of the high-probability winning results, the combined probability is 1/40 or less, which is the upper limit reference probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

In the fifth high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is lower than that in the case of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability in the distribution judgment process and the winning probability in the V prize lottery process are 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, and a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is performed. It certainly occurs, and when the V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode certainly occurs. In this situation, as long as winning results are obtained in the success/failure determination process, there is a high probability that a shift to the open/close execution mode will occur. becomes possible.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the count number of each round game is different for each type of jackpot result. The configuration will be described in detail below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Structure of game board 210>
First, the configuration of the game board 210 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48(a) is a front view of the game board 210 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 48(b) is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 222 provided on the game board 210. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), the game board 210 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning port 221, a variable winning device 222, an upper operating port (first starting ball entry portion) 223, a lower operating port (second starting ball entry portion) 224, a through gate 225, a variable display unit 226, A main display section 233, a character item display section 234, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning port 221, the variable winning device 222, the upper operating port 223, and the lower operating port 224, it is detected by various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 227 is provided at the bottom of the game board 210, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 227.例文帳に追加The game board 210 is also provided with a large number of nails 228 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. Also included is a mode in which it is not discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out port 227, the game ball entering the variable winning device 222, the upper operation port 223, the lower operation port 224 or the through gate 225 is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operating port 223 and the lower operating port 224 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 210 . Both the upper working port 223 and the lower working port 224 are opened upward. Further, the two working ports 223 and 224 are vertically aligned with the upper working port 223 facing upward. The lower operation port 224 is provided with an electric accessory 224a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 224a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 224b mounted on the back side of the game board 210, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 224b to enter a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and It is placed in either open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 224a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 224, and when the electric accessory 224a is opened, the lower operation opening 224 can be won.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and a state in which the game ball to the lower operation opening 224 is likely to win a prize, and a state in which it is not impossible to win a prize, but a state in which it is difficult to win a prize rather than the state in which the prize is likely to occur. A configuration in which the accessory 224a is switched may be employed. Alternatively, the electric accessary 224a may be defective, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the lower operating port 224 itself.

As shown in FIG. 48(b), the variable winning device 222 includes a large winning opening 222a leading to the back side of the game board 210, and an opening/closing door 222b for opening and closing the large winning opening 222a. . The open/close door 222b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 222c integrally provided as the variable winning device 222 (the connection point is not shown) and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 222c to open and close. placed in either Specifically, it is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls are likely to win prizes when the switch to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail.

Here, the various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c and 225a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a rear view for explaining various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c and 225a.

On the back of the game board 210, as shown in FIG. 49, a collective plate unit 229 is provided below the variable display unit 226. As shown in FIG. The gathering plate unit 229 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls into various winning holes, and the like. .

To explain the game ball recovery mechanism, the gathering plate unit 229 has a general winning opening 221, a variable winning device 222, an upper working opening 223 and a lower working opening 224 corresponding to the game board openings, and at one place on the downstream side. A gathering passage 229a is formed. Therefore, all the game balls that have won the general prize-winning opening 221 or the like gather below the game board 210 through the collection passage 229a. A discharge passage is provided below the game board 210, and the game balls collected under the game board 210 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage 229a. The out port 227 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports 221, 222, 223, 224 are led out into the discharge passage through the out port 227.

To explain the winning detection mechanism, the collecting board unit 229 is provided with winning opening sensors 221a at positions corresponding to the general winning openings 221 on the front side of the game board 210, respectively. In addition, a count sensor 222d is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 222, an upper working opening sensor 223a is provided at a position corresponding to the upper working opening 223, and a lower working opening sensor 224c is provided at a position corresponding to the lower working opening 224. is provided. A gate sensor 225 a for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 225 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 226 outside the gathering plate unit 229 . Winning of game balls is detected by sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a as these ball detection sensors (game medium detection means). These sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a output electrical signals to a main controller 260, which will be described later. Specifically, a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and a LOW level signal may be output when a game ball is not detected, and a HI level signal may be output when a game ball is detected. may be configured to output an electrical signal only in a state in which is detected.

In the main display section 233 shown in FIG. 48(a), the variable display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224 is displayed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the operation port 224 is clearly displayed. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 223 and the winning to the lower working port 224 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning to the upper working port 223 or the lower working port 224. The result of the internal lottery thus obtained is clearly displayed on the main display portion 233, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the main display unit 233 displays a predetermined stop result. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

The main display unit 233 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix displays. In addition, the patterns variably displayed on the main display unit 233 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed. A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the character object display unit 234, the winning of the through gate 225 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 225 is displayed. indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 225 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 234 and the display is changed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 224a provided in the lower operation opening 224 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 226 is provided with a pattern display device 231 for variably displaying (or variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern, and a center frame 232 is arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 231. It is The pattern display device 231 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device 300, which will be described later. The pattern display device 231 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen G such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a display.

In the symbol display device 231 , the variable display of symbols is started based on the winning of the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224 . That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display section 233, the variable display is performed on the pattern display device 231 accordingly.

The display contents of the pattern display device 231 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 231, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 50(a) to (j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 231 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, ie, upper, middle and lower rows, as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are statically displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are statically displayed. It's like In addition, the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5.

When an effect for playing the game is performed on the display screen G based on the winning of the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. , the variable display starts. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally predetermined symbols are statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for the game cycle. is finished.

In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of the probability variable jackpot results A and B described later, the same odd number on any of the active lines or the same on any of the active lines A combination of symbols with an even number of . Further, in the case of game rounds corresponding to the occurrence of normal jackpot results A and B, which will be described later, a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number attached to any of the activated lines is formed.

The pattern display device 231 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns variably displayed by the pattern display device 231 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

A first holding lamp section 235 corresponding to the main display section 233 and the pattern display device 231 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 232, as shown in FIG. 48(a). The number of winning game balls in the upper working port 223 or the lower working port 224 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first reservation lamp part 235. - 特許庁

A second holding lamp section 236 corresponding to the accessory display section 234 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 232 . The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 225 is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by lighting the second suspension lamp part 236. - 特許庁

An inner rail portion 241 and an outer rail portion 242 are attached to the game board 210. A guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 241 and the outer rail portion 242, and the game board 210 is mounted below the game board 210. A game ball 160 shot from a ball shooting mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 260 comprises a main control board 261 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 265 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 260, the board box housing the main control board 261 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 262 is mounted on the main control board 261 . The MPU 262 includes a ROM 263 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 262, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 263. A RAM 264, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 263 and the RAM 264 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 262, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 260 .

The MPU 262 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 262 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 265 provided in the main controller 260 and a payout controller 270 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 280 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 265 , and power is supplied to the MPU 262 via the power failure monitoring board 265 .

Various types of prize detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a are connected to the input side of the MPU 262. FIG. In the MPU 262, a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section is performed. In addition, the MPU 262 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the upper operation port 223 and the lower operation port 224. FIG.

The output side of the MPU 262 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 265, a payout control device 270 and a sound emission control device 290. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 270 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball section.

Various commands such as a variation command and a type command are output to the sound emission control device 290 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 290 is electrically connected to the main control device 260 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

Also, on the output side of the MPU 262, a variable winning driving unit 222c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 222b of the variable winning device 222, an electric accessory driving unit 224b for opening and closing the electric accessory 224a of the lower operation opening 224, and a main display unit. 233, an accessory display unit 234, and various holding lamp units 235 and 236 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 261, and the MPU 262 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 262 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 222c so that the big winning opening 222a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 224a is won in the open state, the MPU 262 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 224b so that the electric accessory 224a is opened and closed. In addition, display control of the main display section 233 is executed in the MPU 262 at each game round. Further, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 224a is to be specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 234 is executed in the MPU 262 . Moreover, when a game ball wins in the upper operation opening 223 and the lower operation opening 224, display control of various holding lamp portions 235 and 236 is executed in the MPU 262.

The blackout monitoring board 265 relays between the main control board 261 and the power supply and launch control unit 280 and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control unit 280, which is a stable 24 volts DC. The payout control device 270 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 271 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 260 .

The power supply and launch control device 280 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 261, the payout control device 270, and the like are generated with operating power required for each, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 280 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for memory retention is supplied to the RAM 264 of the control device 260 . Further, the power supply and shooting control device 280 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 281, and the game ball shooting mechanism 281 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio emission control device 290 includes an audio emission control board 291 on which an MPU 292 is mounted. The MPU 292 includes a ROM 293 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 292, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 293. A RAM 294, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 292 drives and controls the display light emitting section 73 and the speaker section 74 based on the command received from the main control device 260 . In addition, these commands are transmitted to the display control device 300 as they are or after analysis. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 290 is electrically connected to the display control device 300 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 300 includes a display control board 301 on which an MPU 302, which is an element in which a program ROM 303 and a work RAM 304 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 305, a character ROM 306, and a video RAM 307 are mounted. It has

The MPU 302 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 290 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 305 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 305).

The program ROM 303 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 302 and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The work RAM 304 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by the MPU 302, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is.

The VDP 305 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 231 . Since the VDP 305 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 305 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 302 and the video RAM 307 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 306 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 231 . The character ROM 306 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 307 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 231, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 307, the display content of the pattern display device 231 is changed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 262 of main controller 260>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 262 uses various types of counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, set the display of the main display unit 233, set the display of symbols of the pattern display device 231, set the display of the accessory display unit 234, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot generation, the jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and the pattern display device 231 deviate and fluctuate. A reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter that determines the display duration time in the main display unit 233 and the pattern display device 231 and CS are used. Furthermore, an electric accessory open counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 224a of the lower operating port 224 is to be in the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the RAM 264 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224. It is stored in the ball storage area 264a.

The reserved ball storage area 264a includes a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3 and a fourth reservation area RE4. , jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224 are retained and stored. In addition, the reservation area RE is provided with a reservation number storage area NA. In the reservation number storage area NA, in order to specify the number of pending storage of winning history to the upper operation opening 223 or the lower operation opening 224. information is stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 233. is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 264c of the RAM 264 at the timing when the game ball 160 wins the through gate 225. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric role product 224a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric role product opening counter C4.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the forms of support by the electric accessory 224a are mutually different. Specifically, in the support mode, the electric accessory 224a of the lower operation opening 224 is opened per unit time when compared with the situation where the shooting of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. A low-frequency support mode (or a low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or a high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 224a is in the open state is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 224a occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display in the character object display section 234) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operation opening 224 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working port 223 rather than the lower working port 224 is higher, but in the high-frequency support mode, the lower working port 224 is more likely than the upper working port 223. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 224, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays while not reducing the number of balls he has. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, after one electric accessory open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 225, the accessory display unit 234 In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time are prepared, high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may have been Furthermore, the number of opening times is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured after one electric accessary item opening lottery is performed and the next electric accessary item opening lottery is performed is reduced. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability. .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 264a of the RAM 264 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 263 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, the success/failure table includes the success/failure table (low-probability success/failure information group) for the low-probability mode shown in FIG. information group for probability) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, two random numbers result in a big win, as shown in FIG. 54(a). On the other hand, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a big win is 21, as shown in FIG. 54(b). In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in the jackpot result are arbitrary, and the jackpot that results in the jackpot result in the low-probability mode. The value group of the random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the big win random number counter C1 that results in a big win in the high probability mode.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss except for the value of the random number resulting in the big win result, and the result of the loss does not trigger the shift to the win/fail lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 264a of the RAM 264 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 263 . Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. 54(c).

As shown in FIG. 54(c), a normal jackpot result A, a normal jackpot result B, a probability variable jackpot result A, and a probability variable jackpot result B are set as allocation destinations of jackpot results. These jackpot results are assigned jackpot type counters C2 so as not to overlap each other.

The contents of the various game results will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

The game results set in the pachinko machine 10 are normal jackpot result A, normal jackpot result B, probability variable jackpot result A, probability variable jackpot result B, and loss result, as shown in FIG.

Among these game results, the various jackpot results are the game results selected when winning in the winning lottery, and the losing results are the game results selected when not winning in the winning lottery. In addition, different from the result of losing, various jackpot results are game results that serve as a trigger for transition to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. The probability variable jackpot results A and B are different.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this pachinko machine 10, as the opening/closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode is set in which a predetermined number of round games are executed as an upper limit.

The above-mentioned round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the big winning opening 222a. It is a game in which the state in which the big winning opening 222a is opened continues until the game is completed.

In the normal jackpot result A and the variable probability jackpot result A, the game shifts to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 10 times as the upper limit, and the big winning port 222a is opened and closed once in each round game.

In the normal jackpot result B and the probability variable jackpot result B, the game shifts to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 5 times as the upper limit number of times, and the big winning port 222a is opened and closed once in each round game.

Further, in the game rounds in which the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained, the combination of even-numbered patterns is stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 231, and in the game rounds in which the variable jackpot results A and B are obtained, the combination of even-numbered patterns or odd-numbered patterns is displayed on the pattern display device 231. appears stopped. In other words, when a combination of even-numbered symbols is statically displayed on the symbol display device 231, the type of the jackpot result cannot be specified from the combination of symbols statically displayed on the symbol display device 231.

In the normal jackpot results A and B, after the round number regulation mode ends, the mode shifts to a high frequency support mode with an upper limit of 100 times. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times, which is the end reference number of times, and when the 100 game times are completed, the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Also, the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode.

In the probability variable jackpot results A and B, after the round number regulation mode ends, the success/failure lottery mode is a high probability mode and shifts to a high frequency support mode with no limit. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the game result of the game cycle becomes the normal jackpot results A and B.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 264a at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 223 or the lower operation opening 224. - 特許庁

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state where the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. , the combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G to perform a ready-to-win effect.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the result of the deviation, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 263 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. is executed if

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 262 determines the variation display time on the main display section 233 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 231 . The variation type counter CS is updated in each timer interrupt process to be described later, and the value of the variation type counter CS is changed when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 233 and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 231. is obtained.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 260>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed by the MPU 262 in the main controller 260 to advance the game will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 262 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 262 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S3001, reading processing of various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a and 224c is executed. Specifically, when a winning to the upper working port 223 or the lower working port 224 has occurred, 1 is added to the counter for three prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 . The 3 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 3 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 3 game balls should be output. It should be noted that, within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing, winning to the upper working port 223 and winning to the lower working port 224 can occur at the same time. It can be done twice.

In addition, when the winning to the general winning hole 221 has occurred, 1 is added to the counter for 10 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 . The 10 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 10 game balls should be output.

Also, when a prize has been won in the big winning hole 222a, the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is incremented by one. The 15 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 15 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 15 game balls should be output.

After executing the process of step S3001, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S3002.

In the subsequent step S3003, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

In the following step S3004, a winning process for through accompanying winning to the through gate 225 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 225, the number of stored role-things stored in the power reserve area 264c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S3003 is stored in the electric role holding area 264c. In addition, the display control of the second reservation lamp unit 236 is performed in order to light the second reservation lamp unit 236 corresponding to the number of role item reservation storage.

After that, in steps S3005 to S3008, a winning process for the operation opening is executed. In the winning process for the working opening, first, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not winning to the upper working opening 223 or the lower working opening 224 has occurred. If no prize has been won, the timer interrupt processing is terminated as it is.

If a prize has been won, in step S3006, whether the number NA of starting pending storage stored in the pending number storage area NA of the pending ball storage area 264a is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4") determine whether or not If the start pending memory number NA is equal to the upper limit value, the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and if the start pending memory number NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, 1 is added to the number NA of start pending storage. In the subsequent step S3008, each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S3003 is stored as reserved information in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 264a. In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current starting reservation storage number NA. In addition, display control of the first suspension lamp section 235 is performed in order to light the first suspension lamp section 235 corresponding to the start suspension storage number NA. After executing the process of step S3008, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S3101 to S3107 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S3109 and S3110 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, in step S3101, output data such as a command set in timer interrupt processing or previous normal processing is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 270 . Also, if commands for effects such as commands corresponding to effects for game rounds and commands corresponding to effects for open/close execution mode are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 .

In the subsequent step S3102, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In the subsequent step S3103, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In the game round control process, winning/failure determination and distribution determination are performed, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 231, display control of the main display section 233, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S3104, game state transition processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this game state transition processing.

In the following step S3105, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 224a provided in the lower working port 224 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 264c of the RAM 264 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 224a. A lottery is carried out, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 224a is executed. Further, display control of the accessory display unit 234 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

Here, as already described, as a mode of support by the electric accessory 224a, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the game state transition process. will be In this case, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264, the high frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 224a is in the open state is set larger than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times that the electric accessory 224a is in the open state is set more when the electric role open state is won. Set a longer open time. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 224a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. Set so that the closing time up to is shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S3106, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 sec. ), the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 281 is energized once. Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

In subsequent step S3107, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when power failure occurrence is confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 265 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 265 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 262, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, in step S3109, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S3110, the variation type counter CS is updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the power failure processing from step S3111 onwards is executed. That is, in step S3111, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S3112 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S3113 access to the RAM 264 is prohibited, and then the power supply is completely cut off. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control process executed in step S3103 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the game round control process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is in the opening and closing execution mode, the process after step S3202, that is, without executing any of the game round start processing of steps S3203 to S3205 and the game round progress processing of steps S3206 to S3209, this game Terminate the turn control process. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the winning to the operation ports 223 and 224 has occurred.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the main display section 233 is performing variable display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. If the main display unit 233 is not displaying a variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S3203 to S3205. In the game turn start processing, first, in step S3203, the number of pending storage areas NA of the holding ball storage area 264a is referred to, and whether or not the start pending storage number NA, which is the number of pending information stored, is "0". determine whether When the number NA of start pending storage is "0", it means that the pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 264a. Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending memory number NA is not "0", data setting processing is executed in step S3204.

In the data setting process, first, 1 is subtracted from the start pending storage number NA. Also, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE in the reservation ball storage area 264a is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed.

This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved area RE2→first reserved area RE1, third reserved area RE3→second reserved area RE2, fourth reserved area RE4→third reserved area RE3.

Also, in the data setting process, a process for changing the display on the first reservation lamp unit 235 in correspondence with the decrease in the number of reservations is executed.

After executing the data setting process, after executing the fluctuation start process in step S3205, the game round control process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3301, a success/failure determination process is executed. In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high-probability mode, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode among the tables stored in the success/failure table storage area is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for success/failure determination, that is, the jackpot. It is determined whether or not the numerical information relating to the random number counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, by referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode among the tables stored in the success/failure table storage area, numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is displayed. matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S3301 is the jackpot winning result. In the case of a jackpot winning result, type determination processing is executed in step S3303.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, referring to the allocation table of the ROM 263, it specifies which jackpot result the numerical information related to the grasped jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which one of the normal jackpot result A, the normal jackpot result B, the probability variable jackpot result A, and the probability variable jackpot result B corresponds to.

In the subsequent step S3304, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 in the game cycle related to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 263, The specified information is stored in RAM 264 . In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the types of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 are set differently for each type of jackpot result, and are specified in step S3303 in step S3304. The RAM 264 stores information on the form of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result.

In the subsequent step S3305, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S3303 to the RAM 264 is executed. Specifically, when the normal jackpot result A is specified, the first normal jackpot flag is set, and when the normal jackpot result B is specified, the second normal jackpot flag is set, and the probability is variable. When the jackpot result A is specified, a first probability variable jackpot flag is set, and when the probability variable jackpot result B is specified, the second probability variable jackpot flag is set. It should be noted that in the following description, determination as to whether or not various jackpot results are achieved is performed by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 264 is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, a stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed in step S3306. Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the ROM 263, The specified information is stored in RAM 264 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

When the process of step S3305 is performed, or when the process of step S3306 is performed, the variable display time (variable display period) setting process is performed in step S3307.

In such processing, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 231 in the current game cycle. Specifically, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs when the game round related to the start of this variation is a big hit result. Also, even if the result is not a big win, it is determined that a ready-to-win display occurs when the numerical information related to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time table for reach generation stored in the ROM 263 is referred to, and the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation The display time information is set in display duration counters provided in various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the fluctuation display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 263 is referred to, and the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the variable display time information is set in the display continuation period counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the non-reach variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reachable variable display time table.

It should be noted that the variable display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of start pending storage numbers NA increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. A variable display time table for occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the variable display time does not change according to the number NA of start pending storage and the support mode may be employed, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the loss reach, and the case of the loss result of no reach. In this case, the variable display time is apportioned according to each game result.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S3307, the command for variation and the type command are set in step S3308. The variable command includes information on the variable display time. Here, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence as described above is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach generation. Even if the command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, it is possible for the voice emission control device 290, which is a sub-side control device, to specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, normal jackpot result A information, normal jackpot result B information, probability variable jackpot result A information, probability variable jackpot result B information, and loss result information.

The variation command and type command set in step S3308 are sent to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 of the normal processing (FIG. 57).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 receives the variation command and the type command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3401: YES), based on the content of the type command in step S3402, It is determined which of the probability variable big winning result A, the probability variable big winning result B, the normal big winning result A, and the normal big winning result B is the game result of the game cycle started this time.

In the case of any one of probability variable jackpot result A, probability variable jackpot result B, normal jackpot result A, and normal jackpot result B, in step S3403, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game round to be started this time is the probability variable jackpot result A, B, and if the game result of the game round to be started this time is the probability variable jackpot result A, B. 2, it is determined by lottery which of the combination of odd-numbered symbols and the combination of even-numbered symbols should be stopped.

When the game result of the game cycle to be started this time is the probability variable jackpot results A and B and the stop result is an odd number pattern, information corresponding to the stop result that the same odd number pattern combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of odd-numbered symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the game results of the game round to be started this time are the normal jackpot results A and B, or if the game results of the game round to be started this time are the probability variable jackpot results A and B and the stop result is an even number symbol, Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of the same even-numbered symbols is established on the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the types of even-numbered symbols and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

If a negative determination is made in step S3402, then in step S3404, a symbol determination process for out is executed. In the symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to the occurrence of the loss ready-to-win display based on the contents of the variation command. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, the stop result is determined such that the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5.

In addition, when the game cycle does not involve the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is also stopped. The information corresponding to the stop result that is not displayed is determined as the current stop result information.

After executing either step S3403 or step S3404, the process advances to step S3405. In step S3405, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game round is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 263, the effect duration time (effect duration) corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is selected, and the effect content is selected. to select. The MPU 262 executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and output control of the speaker unit 74 in the current game round according to the effect pattern determined in step S3405.

In subsequent step S3406, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S3403 or step S3404 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S3405 are transmitted to the display control device 300. FIG. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 302 of the display control device 300 reads out from the program ROM 303 the data table for performing the effect for the current game cycle on the symbol display device 231, and executes the data table according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 305 each time a predetermined image update timing comes (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the pattern display device 231, the effect for the game cycle is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 292 of the sound emission control device 290, and the stop result determined by the MPU 292 is finally stopped and displayed. be.

Returning to the description of the variation start processing (FIG. 59), after executing the processing of step S3308, the main display unit 233 starts the variation display of the pattern in step S3309. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 58), when the main display unit 233 is in the process of variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S3206 to S3209 is executed.

In the game round progress processing, first, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the display duration counter of the RAM 264 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S3307), as described above. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 56) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S3207. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display section 233 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S3208. In the fluctuation end process, the information stored in the RAM 264 in either step S3304 or step S3306 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59) executed when starting the currently executed game cycle is specified, and the information The main display section 233 is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the is displayed on the main display section 233 .

Here, the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the main display portion 233 differs for each game result. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually confirm the game result of the game round by looking at the main display unit 233 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that is intended to be performed by a third party is being performed. On the other hand, the display range of the main display portion 233 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 231, and furthermore, the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the main display portion 233 is difficult for the player to recognize. there is Therefore, it is expected that the player will check the game result of the game cycle not from the main display section 233 but from the display screen G of the pattern display device 231, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

After that, after setting the fluctuation end command in step S3209, this game round control processing is ended. The fluctuation end command set at step S3209 is sent to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). The sound emission control device 290 executes processing for ending the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variation end command. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the sound emission control device 290 or the display control device 300 independently ends the effect for the game round without transmitting the fluctuation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing executed at step S3104 in the normal processing (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S3502 to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the variable display of the pattern on the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of the jackpot results. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A in step S3504. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variable probability jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . The first variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result is variable probability jackpot result A in the MPU 262 . As described above, the first variable probability jackpot flag is set when the type of the current jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result A in the type determination process.

If the determination in step S3504 is affirmative, the count distribution table A corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3505. The count distribution table A will be described later.

In the next step S3506, "10" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is set by referring to the count distribution table A. The winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Specifically, "5" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 262 to specify the number of round games executed within the range of one open/close execution mode. Also, the winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for the MPU 262 to specify the upper limit of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a, which is one end condition of the round game.

When the negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether or not the big hit result of this time is the probability variable big hit result B in step S3507. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . The second probability variable jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B in the MPU 262 . The second probability variable jackpot flag is set when the type of the current jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B in the type determination process, as described above.

If the determination in step S3507 is affirmative, the count distribution table B corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3508. The count distribution table B will be described later.

In the next step S3509, "5" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is set by referring to the count distribution table B. The winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Specifically, "5" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

If a negative determination is made in step S3507, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A in step S3510. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . The first normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of the jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A in the MPU 262 . The first normal jackpot flag is set when the type of the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A in the type determination process, as described above.

If the determination in step S3510 is affirmative, the count distribution table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3511. The count distribution table C will be described later.

In the following step S3512, "10" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is set by referring to the count distribution table C. The winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Specifically, "5" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

When a negative determination is made in step S3510, the count distribution table D corresponding to the normal jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3513. The count distribution table D will be described later.

In the next step S3514, "5" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is set by referring to the count distribution table D. The winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Specifically, "5" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

Here, the various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D will be described with reference to FIG. Various count number apportioning tables A, B, C, and D are provided so that the number of rounds of the round game and the number of counts correspond one-to-one. The counted number is the upper limit of the number of winnings to the big winnings opening 222a. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 62, the distribution of the count numbers differs depending on the various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D. FIG. Specifically, in the case of the count distribution table A, "5" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 1R, 2R and 9R, "10" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 3R to 8R, and "10" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 10R. "25" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC.

In the case of the count distribution table B, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "5" in the 1R to 2R, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "15" in the 3R and 5R, and the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "10" in the 4R. ” is set.

In the case of the count distribution table C, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "5" in 1R to 2R, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "10" in 3R to 9R, and the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "20" in 10R. ” is set. In addition, the total number of counts of each round game is the same as that of the count number apportionment table A described above.

In the case of the count distribution table D, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "5" in the 1R to 2R, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "15" in the 3R to 4R, and the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "10" in the 5R. ” is set. In addition, the total number of counts of each round game is the same as that of the count number distribution table B described above.

Comparing the various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that even-numbered symbols may be stopped as the final stop symbols even if the probability variable jackpot results A and B are obtained. Although it is possible to identify the type of the jackpot result from the pattern displayed on the main display portion 233, it is difficult to understand the pattern displayed on the main display portion 233. It is difficult to identify the type of jackpot result from the pattern that appears. Here, assuming that the values of the 1R winning upper limit counter PC in the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D are different, the types of jackpot results can be determined by grasping the 1R count number. can be identified. In this case, when the even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game cannot be played while expecting the probability variable jackpot results A and B.例文帳に追加In this respect, according to this configuration, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same in the various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D. As a result, even when the even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game can be played while expecting the probability variable big winning results A and B.例文帳に追加

Also, when comparing the count number distribution table A corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result A and the count number distribution table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 8R is are identical. Therefore, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, it is not possible to specify whether the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A or the normal jackpot result A until the 9th R is finished. As a result, when the even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game can be played while expecting the probability variable jackpot result A for a long period of time.

Further, the count number of the ninth R is set to be larger in the count number apportionment table C than in the count number apportionment table A. Here, when the count number of the ninth R is set to be larger in the count number distribution table A than in the count number distribution table C, the result of the big win this time is the normal big win result A. This gives the player a feeling of disappointment that the number of rounds has been decided and a feeling of disappointment that the count number of the round game is small. In this case, the frustration of the player may accumulate. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the count number of the ninth round is set larger in the count number distribution table C than in the count number distribution table A. As a result, even if the player is notified that the current big win result is the normal big win result A, the player's frustration can be suppressed because the number of round games counted increases.

In addition, the player expects that the type of jackpot result will be the probability variable jackpot result A rather than the normal jackpot result A, so that the count number of the 9th round will be "5" instead of "10". do. With this configuration, it is possible to expect not only that the count number of round games will increase, but also that the count number of round games will decrease.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the type of the jackpot result by specifying the count number of the round game, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the count number of the round game.

Also, when the round games having the same upper limit number of times are compared, the total count of each round game is the same. Specifically, the total count number of each round game is the same in the probability variable jackpot result A and the normal jackpot result A, and the count number of each round game in the probability variable jackpot result B and the normal jackpot result B are the same. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the jackpot result without changing the profit given to the player.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 61), when the process of step S3506 is executed, when the process of step S3509 is executed, when the process of step S3512 is executed, or when the process of step S3514 is executed, At step S3515, "1000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 as the waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. However, the standby time is arbitrary.

Further, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, a waiting time for opening is set in step S3515 regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the mode. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of game result that has triggered the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, it may be configured so that the player recognizes it as being the same.

After executing the process of step S3515, after setting an opening command in step S3516, this game state transition process is complete|finished. The opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time. Also, the opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received an opening command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3407: YES), in step S3408, the effect setting processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. do.

In the process of setting the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, first, based on the information included in the opening command, the type of the game result and the type of final stop symbol that triggered the transmission of the command are specified, and the jackpot result is determined. and the type of the final stop symbol to determine the content of the effect in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, when the normal jackpot results are A and B, or when the probability variable jackpot results are A and B and the final stop pattern is an even number pattern, the effect A is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the probability variable jackpot results A and B and the final stop symbol are odd symbols, the effect B is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. The effects for the opening/closing execution mode are different between the effects A and the effects B.

As described above, when the normal jackpot results are A and B, and when the probability variable jackpot results are A and B and the final stop pattern is an even-numbered pattern, the effects in the opening/closing execution mode are common. That is, it is not possible to specify from the effect A which of the probability variable jackpot results A and B and the normal jackpot results A and B is the type of jackpot result. Therefore, when the effect A is performed, the player can play the game expecting that the types of the jackpot results are the probability variable jackpot results A and B.

The MPU 292 of the audio light emission control device 290 executes light emission control of the display light emission section 73 and output control of the speaker section 74 in the current opening/closing execution mode according to the effect pattern determined in step S3408.

In the following step S3409, the open/close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of step S3408 is transmitted to the display control device 300. FIG. The MPU 302 of the display control device 300 reads out from the program ROM 303 the data table for performing the present opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 231 based on the received opening/closing execution mode command, and follows the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 305 each time a predetermined image update timing comes (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 292 of the sound emission control device 290 .

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 61), if it is determined in step S3501 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3517. In step S3517, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 222a is open. If the big winning opening 222a is not open, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the later-described processing of opening the large winning opening 222a in a situation where there is no opportunity to open the large winning opening 222a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, it is determined in step S3603 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the process of opening the big winning opening 222a, which will be described later, from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the round counter RC is not "0" and the timer counter T is "0", then in step S3604, a large winning opening opening process is executed. In the big winning opening opening process, the timer counter T is set to "15000", and the variable winning driving section 222c is driven and controlled so that the big winning opening 222a is open. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the timer counter T is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 30 sec after "15000" is set in the timer counter T.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 shoots one game ball toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the ratio of the game balls rolling around the big winning hole 222a to win the big winning hole 222a. is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 25 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 30 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. As described above, the largest number of counts in this embodiment is "25". Therefore, by setting 30 sec as the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a, it is possible to reach the upper limit of the count set for each round game.

Here, in the case where the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a is different according to the count number, there is a possibility that the type of the big winning result will be specified by grasping the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. There is In this regard, according to the present configuration, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to be the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of the big winning result from being specified by the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

In subsequent step S3605, an open command is set. The open command set here is sent to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received an opening command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3410: YES), in step S3411 display emission corresponding to the opening of the big winning opening 222a Light emission control of the unit 73 is executed, and output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed.

In subsequent step S3412, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 300 in order to make the display control device 300 recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 222a has started. The MPU 302 of the display control device 300 switches the range of pointer information to be referenced in the data table based on the received release command. As a result, an effect corresponding to the opening of the big winning opening 222a is displayed on the display screen G.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 63), when it is determined in step S3601 that the big winning opening 222a is open, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, by determining whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0", the opening duration time (approximately 30 seconds) has elapsed for the opening of the current big winning opening 222a. determine whether or not If the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3607.

In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 222a. If no game ball has entered the big winning hole 222a, the big winning hole opening/closing process is terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3607, 1 is subtracted from the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3608. In the subsequent step S3609, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is "0".

If the determination in step S3606 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S3609 is affirmative, a closing execution process is executed in step S3610. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning driving section 222c is terminated so that the big winning opening 222a is closed. In the subsequent step S3611, a close command is set. The closing command set here is sent to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received a closing command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3413: YES), in step S3414, the display emission corresponding to the closing of the big winning opening 222a is performed. Light emission control of the unit 73 is executed, and output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed.

In the subsequent step S3415, a closing command is transmitted to the display control device 300 to make the display control device 300 recognize that the closing of the big winning opening 222a has started. The MPU 302 of the display control device 300 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received closing command. As a result, an effect corresponding to the closure of the big winning opening 222a is displayed on the display screen G.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 63), after executing the process of step S3611, 1 is subtracted from the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3612. In the following step S3613, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0".

If the determination in step S3613 is negative, the count distribution tables A, B, C, and D read out to the RAM 264 in step S3614 are referred to, and the count corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is calculated in step S3615. The number is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG.

In the following step S3616, "500" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for the opening standby time until the variable prize winning device 222 changes from the open state to the closed state and then returns to the open state. is set. However, the standby time is arbitrary.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3613, "2000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3617 as the waiting time (waiting period) for ending. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. However, the standby time is arbitrary.

An ending command is set in subsequent step S3618. The ending command set in this process is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received the ending command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3416: YES), the ending handling process is executed in step S3417. In the ending handling process, first, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed.

Next, the content of the lottery result included in the ending command received this time is specified, and processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the lottery result is executed. Specifically, when the current game result is the normal jackpot result A or B, the current ending effect includes a content for making the player aware that the opening/closing execution mode is followed by the low-probability mode. Determined as In addition, when the current game result is the probability variable jackpot result A or B, the performance including the content for making the player recognize that the high probability mode will be entered after the open/close execution mode is determined as the current ending performance. .

After executing the ending handling process, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of the ending handling process is transmitted to the display control device 300 in step S3418. When the display control device 300 receives the ending command, it specifies the contents of the lottery result included in the ending command, and displays the ending performance corresponding to the contents of the lottery result on the display screen G.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 61), after executing the process of step S3517, it is checked in step S3518 whether the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". judge. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC is "0", it is determined in step S3519 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

When the timer counter T is "0", a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S3520. In the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the RAM 264 stores the first variable probability big win flag or the second variable probability big win flag, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is supported at a high frequency. mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. When the RAM 264 stores the first normal jackpot flag or the second normal jackpot flag, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game rounds continues 100 times, and then the game shifts to the normal game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S3521, after the end processing of the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state transition processing is ended. In the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode, the stored flags among the first normal jackpot flag, the second normal jackpot flag, the first probability variable jackpot flag, and the second probability variable jackpot flag are erased.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, the allocation of the count number of each round game is different according to the type of the jackpot result. Therefore, by specifying the count number of round games, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the count number of each round game.

Further, when comparing various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that even-numbered symbols will stop as the final stop symbols even if the probability variable jackpot results A and B are obtained. Although it is possible to identify the type of the jackpot result from the pattern displayed on the main display portion 233, the pattern displayed on the main display portion 233 is difficult to understand. It is difficult to identify the type of jackpot result from the pattern that appears. Here, assuming that the values of the 1R winning upper limit counter PC in the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D are different, the types of jackpot results can be determined by grasping the 1R count number. can be identified. In this case, when the even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game cannot be played while expecting the probability variable jackpot results A and B.例文帳に追加In this respect, according to this configuration, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same in the various count distribution tables A, B, C, and D. As a result, even when even-numbered symbols are stopped as the final stop symbols, the round game can be played while expecting the probability variable jackpot results A and B.例文帳に追加

Also, when comparing the count number distribution table A corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result A and the count number distribution table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 8R is are identical. Therefore, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, it is not possible to specify whether the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A or the normal jackpot result A until the 9th R is finished. As a result, when the even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game can be played while expecting the probability variable jackpot result A for a long period of time.

Further, the count number of the ninth R is set to be larger in the count number apportionment table C than in the count number apportionment table A. Here, when the count number of the ninth R is set to be larger in the count number distribution table A than in the count number distribution table C, the result of the big win this time is the normal big win result A. This gives the player a feeling of disappointment that the number of rounds has been decided and a feeling of disappointment that the count number of the round game is small. In this case, the frustration of the player may accumulate. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the count number of the ninth round is set larger in the count number distribution table C than in the count number distribution table A. As a result, even if the player is notified that the current big win result is the normal big win result A, the player's frustration can be suppressed because the number of round games counted increases.

In addition, the player expects that the type of jackpot result will be the probability variable jackpot result A rather than the normal jackpot result A, so that the count number of the 9th round will be "5" instead of "10". do. With this configuration, it is possible to expect not only that the count number of round games will increase, but also that the count number of round games will decrease.

Also, when the round games having the same upper limit number of times are compared, the total count of each round game is the same. Specifically, the total count number of each round game is the same in the probability variable jackpot result A and the normal jackpot result A, and the count number of each round game in the probability variable jackpot result B and the normal jackpot result B are the same. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the jackpot result without changing the profit given to the player.

Further, 30 sec is set as the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 shoots one game ball toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the ratio of the game balls rolling around the big winning hole 222a to win the big winning hole 222a. is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 25 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 30 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. As described above, the largest number of counts in this embodiment is "25". Therefore, by setting 30 sec as the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a, it is possible to reach the upper limit of the count set for each round game.

Also, regardless of the type of the jackpot result, the open duration time of the big prize opening 222a is set to be the same. Here, in the case where the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a is different according to the count number, there is a possibility that the type of the big winning result will be specified by grasping the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. There is In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is set to be the same, it is possible to prevent the type of the big winning result from being specified by the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a. becomes possible.

<Another example of the ninth embodiment>
(1) The configuration may be such that the count distribution table is changed in the middle of the round game. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a round number extension lottery process for determining whether or not to extend the number of rounds during the round game is performed. In the event that an extension is won in the round number extension lottery process, the count distribution table is changed. Specifically, in the case of the probability variable jackpot result B, when the extension is won in the round number extension lottery process, the count distribution table B is changed to the count distribution table A. Further, in the case of the normal jackpot result B, when the extension is won in the count number extension lottery process, the count number distribution table D is changed to the count number distribution table C. - 特許庁According to this configuration, even if the number of rounds is extended, it is possible to set the count number corresponding to the extension using the preset count number allocation table.

(2) Either 5R or 10R may be selected as the number of rounds in any jackpot result. In this case, each jackpot result may have a count distribution table corresponding to 5R and a count distribution table corresponding to 10R. Further, the distribution of the count numbers in the count distribution table corresponding to 5R may be the same as the distribution of the count numbers of 1R to 5R in the count distribution table corresponding to 10R. According to this configuration, since the count numbers of 1R to 5R are the same between 5R and 10R, the upper limit of the number of rounds cannot be specified until the 5th round is completed. As a result, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that the number of rounds will increase.

(3) The value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is not limited to the same configuration in each of the count distribution tables A, B, C, and D. For example, each count distribution table A, B, C, and D may have different values of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R. According to this configuration, it is possible to meet the needs of players who want to immediately grasp the types of jackpot results.

(4) A configuration may be adopted in which the count number of each round game is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, a display area for displaying the count number of each round game is provided in the lower center of the display screen G, and the count number of the round game is displayed at the start of each round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the count number of each round game by visually recognizing the display area, so there is no need to store the count number of each round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player.

(5) It is not limited to a configuration in which the open duration of the big winning opening 222a does not differ according to the count number, and for example, a configuration in which the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a differs according to the count number. may be In this case, by continuing to operate the shooting handle 28 over the opening duration time of the large winning opening 222a, the number of winning game balls to the large winning opening 222a reaches each count number. A configuration in which an open duration is set may also be used. Specifically, when the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "5", 6 sec is set as the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a, and the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "10". In this case, 12 sec is set as the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a, and the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "15", the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 18 sec, and the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "20". , 24 sec is set as the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a, and 30 sec is set as the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a when the winning upper limit counter PC is "25". According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to win the game ball into the big winning opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a elapses.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The configuration for determining the count number of each round game is different from the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Configuration for determining the number of counts>
In this embodiment, the count number of each round game is determined using the clone 350 . The clone 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 210 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 65(a) is an explanatory view for explaining the holes 351, 352, 353 on the croon 350, and FIG. b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the croon 350 cut longitudinally so that three holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the croon 350 are cross sections.

As shown in FIG. 64, the lower frame of the center frame 232 is provided with a croon area 340 that protrudes from the display screen G toward the player. The cloon area 340 is provided with a cloon 350 for determining the count number of each round game. The croon 350 has a thick disc shape. The crank 350 is fixed to the output shaft of a rotary motor (not shown), and rotates about its axis at a constant speed in a fixed direction while the rotary motor is in a driving state. For example, it rotates clockwise for 10 sec. Note that the rotary motor is in a driving state while operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 . The reason for rotating the croon 350 will be described later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the cloon 350 has a first hole 351, a second hole 352 and a third hole 353. As shown in FIG. Each hole 351 , 352 , 353 extends longitudinally through the croon 350 . In this embodiment, when the game ball 160 falls into one of the holes 351, 352, 353, the counter area 264b of the RAM 264 is provided with a count number corresponding to the hole 351, 352, 353 where the game ball 160 falls. It is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC. The first hole 351 corresponds to the count number "5", the second hole 352 corresponds to the count number "10", and the third hole 353 corresponds to the count number "20". is doing. That is, when the game ball 160 falls into the first hole 351, the count number becomes "5", and when the game ball 160 falls into the second hole 352, the count number becomes "10", and the game ball 160 When it falls into the third hole 353, the count number becomes "20". The count number represents the number of game balls 160 that can win in the big winning hole 222a.

Adjacent to each of the holes 351, 352, 353 are marked numbers for the player to easily understand the count. Specifically, "5" is marked adjacent to the first hole 351, "10" is marked adjacent to the second hole 352, and "20" is marked adjacent to the third hole 353. marked. The holes 351, 352, 353 have the same shape, the same size, and the holes 351, 352, 353 are equally spaced. However, the number of each hole 351, 352, 353 is arbitrary. For example, the total number of each hole 351, 352, 353 may be four or more, A configuration in which there are more than three holes 353 is also possible.

The location where each hole 351 , 352 , 353 is provided is the lowest level on the top surface of the croon 350 . In addition, the upper surface of the croon 350 is inclined downward at the same angle toward each of the holes 351 , 352 , 353 . Therefore, the game ball 160 released to the clone 350 surely falls into one of the holes 351 , 352 , 353 . Further, as described above, the holes 351, 352, 353 have the same shape, and the sizes of the holes 351, 352, 353 are uniform. Since the angle of downward inclination is the same, the probability of falling into any of the holes 351, 352, and 353 is equal. Therefore, the probability of falling into the first hole 351, the probability of falling into the second hole 352, and the probability of falling into the third hole 353 are all about 33%. Also, even if the game ball 160 enters each of the holes 351, 352, 353, the game ball 160 is not paid out.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), sensors 351a, 352a and 353a each having a substantially flat plate shape are provided in the middle of each of the holes 351, 352 and 353, respectively. Specifically, a first hole corresponding sensor 351a is provided in the middle of the first hole 351, a second hole corresponding sensor 352a is provided in the middle of the second hole 352, and a third hole 353 is provided. A third hole corresponding sensor 353a is provided in the middle.

Each of the sensors 351a, 352a, 353a is composed of a well-known magnetic detection type proximity sensor. It converts the change in to an electrical signal and outputs it. The sensors 351a, 352a, and 353a are not limited to magnetic detection type proximity sensors, and may be arbitrary as long as they can detect the game ball 160. For example, photosensors, limit sensors, etc. may be used. good too. Sensors 351 a , 352 a , 353 a output electrical signals to main controller 260 . Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the game ball 160 is not detected, and a HI level signal is output when the game ball 160 is detected. Note that the relationship between the output levels may be reversed. The MPU 262 of the main controller 260 can specify the holes 351, 352, 353 into which the game balls 160 have fallen by specifying the sensors 351a, 352a, 353a outputting the HI level signals.

Next, the configuration for releasing the game ball 160 onto the croon 350 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 64, a crew prize winning device 360 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 232 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 231 . The crew winning device 360 includes a crew winning opening 360a leading to a transportation passage 370, which will be described later, and a crew winning opening opening/closing door 360b for opening and closing the crew winning opening 360a. The crew winning opening opening/closing door 360b is connected to the crew winning opening drive unit 360c mounted on the back side of the game board 210, and is driven by the crew winning opening driving unit 360c to be in either a closed state or an open state. placed in The game ball 160 cannot enter the crew winning opening/closing door 360a in the closed state of the crew winning opening opening/closing door 360b, and the game ball 160 can enter the crew winning opening/closing door 360a in the open state of the crew winning opening opening/closing door 360b. Become. Also, even if the game ball 160 enters the crew winning opening 360a, the game ball 160 is not paid out.

The game ball 160 entering the crew winning opening 360 a reaches a transportation passage 370 for releasing the game ball 160 to the crew 350 . The transportation passage 370 is provided from the crew winning opening 360 a toward the upper surface of the crew 350 , and the width of the transportation passage 370 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 160 . As shown in FIG. 65(a), guide rails 371 are provided on the left and right sides of the transportation passage 370 to prevent the game balls 160 from falling. The height of the guide rail 371 is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball 160 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball 160 from dropping from the transportation passage 370 when passing through the transportation passage 370 . A discharge port 372 for discharging the game ball 160 onto the croon 350 is formed at the most downstream part of the transport passage 370 . The discharge port 372 is provided at a position higher than the upper surface of the croon 350 and at a position where the game ball 160 falls on the outer peripheral side of the croon 350 . Therefore, the game ball 160 released onto the cloon 350 does not fall directly into each of the holes 351 , 352 , 353 provided on the cloon 350 .

Here, the reason for rotating the croon 350 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, by dropping the game ball 160 into one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the clone 350, the count number corresponding to the dropped hole 351, 352, 353 is set. In this case, if the cloon 350 is not rotated, the position of the game ball 160 released onto the cloon 350 will be the same every time, so the game ball 160 will fall into the same holes 351, 352, and 353 every time. . In that respect, according to this configuration, since the cloon 350 is rotating, the possibility that the position of the game ball 160 released to the cloon 350 will be the same each time is low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls 160 released onto the croon 350 from falling into the same holes 351, 352, 353 each time.

The game balls 160 that have fallen into the respective holes 351, 352, 353 gather below the game board 210 via the recovery passage 229a shown in FIG. As described above, there is a discharge passage below the game board 210, and the game balls 160 gathered under the game board 210 are discharged into the discharge passage through the collection passage 229a.

Next, the configuration around the croon 350 will be described.

First, the cloon area 340 is provided with the cloon 350 and a discharge port 372 provided at the most downstream portion of the transport passage 370 . The clean area 340 is sealed from above the clean area 350 and the outlet 372 provided in the clean area 340 by a clean area cover (not shown). The crew area cover is box-shaped with an open bottom and large enough to enclose the crew area 340 . According to this configuration, since the cloon area 340 is sealed by the cloon area cover (not shown), the game balls 160 flowing down the game area PA are not released to the cloon area 340 . Although the above-mentioned clone area 340 is configured to be sealed by a not-illustrated clone area cover, it is not limited to this, and for example, a gap to the extent that the game ball 160 does not enter the above-mentioned clone area 340 is provided in the above-mentioned clone area cover. An open configuration is also possible.

The crew area cover is screwed to the crew area 340 from above the pachinko machine 10 . Such screwing is performed so as to be detachable using a fixture. FIG. 64 shows the condition with the clown area cover removed.

Further, the center frame 232 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 231 is not provided with an entrance for causing the crewn 350 to release the game balls 160 other than the crew winning prize opening 360a. Therefore, the game balls 160 flowing down the game area PA are not released onto the crew 350 from other than the crew winning opening 360a.

In addition, a cloon 350 is provided in the center of the cloon area 340 , and an outlet 372 of a transport passage 370 is provided on the right side of the center of the cloon area 340 . Here, the clean area cover is made of a transparent or translucent material. Therefore, it is possible to see how the game ball 160 is discharged from the discharge port 372 onto the cloon 350 through the clown area cover and how the game ball 160 falls into the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the cloon 350. becomes possible.

According to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a crew 350, and by using the crew 350 to draw a lottery for the count of each round game, the lottery for the count of each round game is physically performed. making it possible. In addition, since the player can directly look at the cloon 350, it is possible for the player to understand that the lottery is being carried out fairly and not intentionally.

In addition, since the count number of the round game is determined by a physical lottery, when the largest count number is selected, the satisfaction of having grabbed the largest count number by one's own ability. It is possible to give it to the player. In addition, even if the smallest count number is selected, the player can be made to believe that the reason for the selection of the smallest count number is the player himself/herself. becomes possible.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed in step S3104 of the normal processing (FIG. 57) in the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the run opening closing flag is set in the RAM264. Although the details will be described later, the cloon winning opening closed flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the cloon winning opening 360a is in a closed state during the execution period of the process for determining the count number of the round game. is a flag.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the crew winning opening opening flag is set in the RAM 264. The crew's winning opening open flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the crew's winning opening 360a is in an open state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined in step S3703 whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S3704 to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S3705 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The game results set in this embodiment are the normal jackpot result and the probability variable jackpot result. Various jackpot results are the game results selected when winning in the winning lottery.

In the normal jackpot result and probability variable jackpot result, the game shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 10 times as the upper limit number of times, and the big winning opening 222a is opened and closed once in each round game. Further, in game rounds resulting in normal jackpot results, even-numbered symbol combinations are stop-displayed on the symbol display device 231, and in game rounds resulting in probability variable jackpots, odd-numbered symbol combinations are stop-displayed on the symbol display device 231. - 特許庁

A normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 when the type of the jackpot result is the normal jackpot result in the type determination processing of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 59). The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result.

In the type determination processing of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 59), a probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 when the type of the jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result. The variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 that the current jackpot result is a variable probability jackpot result.

In step S3705, it is determined whether or not one of the normal jackpot flag and probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . When the negative determination is made in step S3705, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S3705 is affirmative, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "1000" in step S3706, and the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to " 10" is set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the timer counter T is decremented by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 2 sec after "1000" is set in the timer counter T.

In the following step S3707, a crew winning opening opening process is executed. In the crew winning opening opening process, the driving control of the crew winning opening drive section 360c is performed so that the crew winning opening 360a is in an open state. As a result, the crew winning opening 360a shifts from the closed state to the open state. In step S3708, the run opening opening flag is set in RAM264. The crewon winning opening open flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the crewon winning opening 360a is in an open state, as described above.

In step S3709, a command for opening the winning opening of the crew is set. The command to open the crew winning opening set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57). When the voice light emission control device 290 receives the command to open the crew prize winning opening, it executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the opening of the crew prize winning opening 360a, and executes the output control of the speaker unit 74. In addition, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the above-mentioned crew prize winning opening open command to the display control device 300 as it is. When the display control device 300 receives the command to open the crew prize winning opening, the display control device 300 displays an effect (for example, "Aim for the crew winning prize opening 360a!" display.

If the determination in step S3702 is affirmative, or if the processing in step S3709 is executed, it is determined in step S3710 whether or not the timer counter T is "0".

If the determination in step S3710 is affirmative, the timer counter T is set to "3000" in step S3711. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, it is decremented by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 6 sec after "3000" is set in the timer counter T. The value of the timer counter T is set by assuming the longest time from when the game ball 160 enters the crew winning opening 360a until it falls into one of the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the crew 350. It is. Therefore, the game ball 160 entering the crew winning opening 360a falls into one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the crew 350 within 6 seconds.

In the following step S3712, a crew winning opening closing process is executed. In the crew winning opening closing process, drive control of the crew winning opening driving section 360c is terminated so that the crew winning opening 360a is closed. According to this configuration, when the value of the timer counter T set in the process of step S3706 becomes "0", the crew's winning opening 360a changes from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the open duration time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to 2 seconds.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 shoots one game ball 160 toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the crew prize opening 360a and the nail 228 planted around the crew prize winning opening 360a, the rate at which the game ball 160 rolling around the crew winning prize opening 360a enters the crew prize winning opening 360a. is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about one game ball 160 will enter the Clune winning opening 360a during the 2 seconds in which the Krun winning opening 360a is opened. Here, if the open continuation time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to be shorter than 2 sec, the probability that no game ball 160 enters the crew winning opening 360a becomes high. In this case, frustration is accumulated for the gaming ball 160 not entering the cloon winning opening 360a. In addition, if the opening duration time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to be longer than 2 sec, there is a possibility that the number of game balls 160 entering the crew winning opening 360a becomes too large. Since this embodiment is configured to set the count numbers corresponding to the holes 351, 352, and 353 that fall first, it is meaningless even if a plurality of game balls 160 enter the crew winning opening 360a. In a situation where a plurality of game balls 160 enter the crew winning opening 360a, after the game ball 160 falls into the first hole 351 corresponding to the count number "5", other game balls 160 have the count number "20". Even if it falls into the third hole 353 corresponding to . In this case, the player feels frustrated. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the opening duration time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to 2 sec, it is possible to prevent the game balls 160 from entering the crew winning opening 360 a too much or not entering. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the player's frustration from accumulating.

When the process of step S3712 is executed, the rune winning opening open flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in step S3713. In the following step S3714, a crew winning opening closing flag is set in the RAM 264. As described above, the crew's winning opening closed flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the crew's winning opening 360a is in a closed state during the execution period of the process for determining the count number of the round game. be.

In step S3715, a crew winning opening closing command is set. The crew winning opening closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57). When the voice light emission control device 290 receives the command to close the crew prize winning opening, it executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the closing of the crew prize winning opening 360a, and executes the output control of the speaker unit 74. In addition, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the above-mentioned crew prize winning opening closing command to the display control device 300 as it is. When the display control device 300 receives the command for closing the winning opening of the crew, it displays an effect (for example, "Pay attention to the crew 350!") on the display screen G to make the player stare at the crew.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3715 has been executed, a count specifying process is executed in step S3716. The count specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The count number specifying process is a process performed to specify the count number of each round game using the clone 350 . FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a count specifying process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the first hole corresponding sensor 351a corresponding to "5" for the value of the winning upper limit counter PC. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, "5" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3803. As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "5".

If a negative determination is made in step S3802, it is determined in step S3804 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the second hole corresponding sensor 352a corresponding to "10" for the value of the winning upper limit counter PC. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3804, "10" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3805. As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "10".

If a negative determination is made in step S3804, it is determined in step S3806 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the third hole corresponding sensor 353a corresponding to "20" for the value of the winning upper limit counter PC. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, "20" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3807. As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "20".

On the other hand, if the timer counter T is "0" (step S3801: YES), "2" is set to the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3808. As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "2". The situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step 3801 is a situation in which about 6 seconds have passed since the crew winning opening 360a was closed. As described above, the game ball 160 entering the croon winning opening 360a is configured to drop into any one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350 reliably within 6 seconds. That is, when the game ball 160 does not enter the crew winning opening 360a, "2" is set to the winning upper limit counter PC. The count number set in step S3808 is smaller than the count number set when the game ball 160 falls into any one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350. FIG. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to drop the game ball 160 into one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350 at any cost. This makes it possible to attract players to a lottery to determine the number of counts using the cloon 350 .

When the process of step S3803 is performed, when the process of step S3805 is performed, when the process of step S3807 is performed, or when the process of step S3808 is performed, a count number specifying command is set in step S3809. The count number specifying command set here is sent to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57). When receiving the count number specifying command, the audio light emission control device 290 executes light emission control of the display light emitting section 73 corresponding to the case where the count number is determined, and executes output control of the speaker section 74 . Further, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the count number specifying command to the display control device 300 as it is. The display control device 300 displays the determined count number on the display screen G when the count number specifying command is received.

In the following step S3810, the crew winning opening closing flag provided in the RAM 264 is erased, and this count number specifying process is terminated. By executing this process, a negative determination is made in step S3701 of the game state transition process (FIG. 66). This makes it possible to prevent the count number specifying process from being performed again when the count number corresponding to the winning upper limit counter PC is set.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 66), if the determination in step S3703 is affirmative, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S3717. The big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, the processing of steps S3901 to S3911 is the same as the processing of steps S3601 to S3611.

After executing the process of step S3911, 1 is subtracted from the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3912. In the following step S3913, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S3913, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3914. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the timer counter T is decremented by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 2 sec after "1000" is set in the timer counter T.

In the following step S3915, a crew winning opening opening process is executed. In the crew winning opening opening process, the driving control of the crew winning opening drive section 360c is performed so that the crew winning opening 360a is in an open state.

In step S3916, the CPU 264 sets the run opening opening flag to the RAM 264. FIG. The crewon winning opening open flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the crewon winning opening 360a is in an open state, as described above. By executing this process, the affirmative determination is made in step S3702 of the game state transition process (FIG. 66), so it is possible to execute the count number specifying process again. According to this embodiment, count number specifying processing for specifying the count number of the next round game is performed each time each round game ends. The count number set in the count number specifying process is the number of game balls 160 that can win in the big winning opening 222a. Here, for example, in the count number specifying process before the start of 1R, if all the count numbers of each round game are determined, the period for making the player's awareness toward the count number specifying process is shortened. . Furthermore, if a small count number is selected in the count number identification process before the 1R starts, the player's motivation may decrease. In this regard, according to this configuration, the count number specifying process is performed each time the round game ends, so it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's attention is focused on the count number specifying process. Become. Furthermore, even if a small count number is selected in one count number identification process, it is possible to expect that a large count number will be selected in the next count number identification process.

After executing the process of step S3916, a crewon winning opening command is set in step S3917. The command to open the crew winning opening set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57). When the voice light emission control device 290 receives the command to open the crew prize winning opening, it executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the opening of the crew prize winning opening 360a, and executes the output control of the speaker unit 74. In addition, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the above-mentioned crew prize winning opening open command to the display control device 300 as it is. When the display control device 300 receives the command to open the crew prize winning opening, the display control device 300 displays an effect (for example, "Aim for the crew winning prize opening 360a!" display.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3913, the processing of steps S3918 and S3919 is executed. The processing of steps S3918 and S3919 is the same as the processing of steps S3617 and S3618.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 66), after executing the process of step S3717, the process of steps S3718 to S3721 is executed. The processing of steps S3718 to S3721 is the same as the processing of steps S3518 to S3521. In addition, in this embodiment, there are only two types of jackpot results: the normal jackpot result and the probability variable jackpot result. The stored flag of the jackpot flag or the variable probability jackpot flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result. The variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot result.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a crew 350, and by using the crew 350 to draw a lottery for the count of each round game, the lottery for the count of each round game is physically performed. making it possible. In addition, since the player can directly look at the cloon 350, it is possible for the player to understand that the lottery is being carried out fairly and not intentionally.

In addition, since the count number of the round game is determined by a physical lottery, when the largest count number is selected, the satisfaction of having grabbed the largest count number by one's own ability. It is possible to give it to the player. In addition, even if the smallest count number is selected, the player can be made to believe that the reason for the selection of the smallest count number is the player himself/herself. becomes possible.

In addition, the open continuation time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to 2 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 is driven and controlled so that one game ball 160 is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. In addition, in the positional relationship between the crew prize opening 360a and the nail 228 planted around the crew prize winning opening 360a, the rate at which the game ball 160 rolling around the crew winning prize opening 360a enters the crew prize winning opening 360a. is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about one game ball 160 will enter the Clune winning opening 360a during the 2 seconds in which the Krun winning opening 360a is opened. Here, if the open continuation time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to be shorter than 2 sec, the probability that no game ball 160 enters the crew winning opening 360a becomes high. In this case, frustration is accumulated for the gaming ball 160 not entering the cloon winning opening 360a. In addition, if the opening duration time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to be longer than 2 sec, there is a possibility that the number of game balls 160 entering the crew winning opening 360a becomes too large. Since this embodiment is configured to set the count numbers corresponding to the holes 351, 352, and 353 that fall first, it is meaningless even if a plurality of game balls 160 enter the crew winning opening 360a. In a situation where a plurality of game balls 160 enter the crew winning opening 360a, after the game ball 160 falls into the first hole 351 corresponding to the count number "5", other game balls 160 have the count number "20". Even if it falls into the third hole 353 corresponding to . In this case, the player feels frustrated. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the opening duration time of the crew winning opening 360a is set to 2 sec, it is possible to prevent the game balls 160 from entering the crew winning opening 360 a too much or not entering. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the player's frustration from accumulating.

Further, when the open duration time of the crew winning opening 360a has elapsed, "3000" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM264. The value of the timer counter T is set by assuming the longest time from when the game ball 160 enters the crew winning opening 360a until it falls into the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the crew 350. . Therefore, it is possible to reliably drop the game ball 160 into the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the crewon 350 within 6 seconds after entering the crewon winning opening 360a.

In addition, count number specifying processing for specifying the count number of the next round game is performed every time each round game ends. The count number set in the count number specifying process is the number of game balls 160 that can win in the big winning opening 222a. Here, for example, in the count number specifying process before the start of 1R, if all the count numbers of each round game are determined, the period for making the player's awareness toward the count number specifying process is shortened. . Furthermore, if a small count number is selected in the count number identification process before the 1R starts, the player's motivation may decrease. In this regard, according to this configuration, the count number specifying process is performed each time the round game ends, so it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's attention is focused on the count number specifying process. Become. Furthermore, even if a small count number is selected in one count number identification process, it is possible to expect that a large count number will be selected in the next count number identification process.

Also, when the game ball 160 does not enter the crew winning opening 360a, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the RAM 264 is set to "2". The count number is smaller than the count number set when the game ball 160 falls into one of the holes 351 , 352 , 353 provided on the croon 350 . By adopting this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to drop the game ball 160 into one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350 at any cost. This makes it possible to attract players to a lottery to determine the number of counts using the cloon 350 .

<Another Example of the Tenth Embodiment>
(1) When a plurality of game balls 160 are released on the rune 350 in a situation where the big winning hole 222a is closed, and the plurality of game balls 160 fall into different holes 351, 352, 353 respectively, the dropped A configuration in which the largest number of counts among the holes 351, 352, and 353 is set may be adopted. Specifically, when HI level signals are received from a plurality of sensors in a situation where the big winning opening 222a is closed, information on the count number corresponding to the sensors is stored in the register of the MPU 262 . Then, when the state in which the big winning opening 222a is closed ends, the highest count number stored in the register is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. If the register does not store the count number information, the smallest count number is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC. At the timing when the count number is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC, the post-Clune closure flag set in the RAM 264 is erased. With this configuration, it becomes meaningless that the game ball 160 falls into the hole 353 corresponding to the largest number of counts among the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350. It is possible to prevent this.

(2) The configuration for determining the count number of the round game is not limited to the rune 350. For example, the count number of the round game is determined by passing through the through gate 225 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 226. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process for winning is performed. Further, in this configuration, the ROM 263 may be provided with a count number table in which the total number of game balls 160 that have passed through the through gate 225 and the count number of the round game correspond one-to-one. Specifically, the total number of game balls 160 that have passed through the through gate 225 is grasped under the condition that the big winning hole 222a is closed. The count number of the round game corresponding to the total number of game balls 160 is specified by referring to the count number table. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the game ball 160 to pass through the through gate 225 in a situation where the big winning hole 222a is closed. Further, in this configuration, the greater the number of game balls 160 that have passed through the through gate 225, the greater the number of round games counted.

Further, during one standby period, a lottery process for determining the count number of the round game may be performed each time the through gate 225 is passed. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that a player with a large count number of round games will be selected in the lottery process each time the through gate 225 is passed. Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure by which the largest count number is selected among the count numbers acquired in the lottery process performed multiple times.

Also, the timing for making the player aim at the through gate 225 is not limited to the closed state of the big prize winning opening 222a, and may be, for example, during a round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect not only that the game ball 160 wins the big prize opening 222a but also that the game ball 160 passes through the through gate 225 during the round game.

(3) It is not limited to the configuration in which the crew's winning opening 360a is provided, for example, the crew's winning opening 360a is not provided, and the gaming ball 160 is released on the crew's 350 to release the game ball 160 A device for recovering and releasing the game ball 160 onto the clone 350 again may be provided in the clone area 340 . According to this configuration, since the game ball 160 is surely released onto the croon 350, it is possible to reduce the number of times a small count number is selected as the count number of the round game. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is a lottery ball different from the game ball 160 which flows down the game area|region PA to be discharged|emitted on the crew 350. FIG.

(4) Although a single-stage croon 350 is used, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of croons may be combined, or a plurality of croons may each have a different number of holes. Specifically, the game ball 160 released from the release port 372 provided at the most downstream part of the transport passage 370 is released to the outer peripheral side of the third stage cloon. The third-stage kuroun has five holes, and by dropping into one of the holes, the count number corresponding to the dropped hole is selected. A game ball 160 that has fallen into one of the holes provided in the third stage cloon is released onto the second stage cloon. The second-stage kuroun has four holes, and by dropping into one of the holes, the count number corresponding to the dropped hole is selected. A game ball 160 that has fallen into one of the holes provided in the second stage cloon is released onto the first stage cloon. The first stage krun has three holes, and by dropping into one of the holes, the count number corresponding to the dropped hole is selected. Then, the total of the three selected count numbers may be set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel more exhilarated than in the case of the first-stage croon 350 .

(5) The configuration may be such that the player himself/herself sets the count numbers corresponding to the holes 351 , 352 , and 353 provided on the croon 350 . Specifically, a selection button is provided on the upper swelling portion 75, and the holes 351, 352, 353 corresponding to the count numbers of "5", "10", and "20" are determined using the selection button. Also, a configuration in which a touch panel is provided instead of the selection button may be employed. The player may directly select one of the holes 351, 352, 353 displayed on the touch panel. According to this configuration, since the player himself/herself can set the count numbers corresponding to the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the croon 350, attention should be paid to the process of specifying the count number of each round game. becomes possible.

(6) The configuration may be such that the player can select whether to determine the count number of each round game in the lottery process or to determine the count number of each round game using the crun 350 . Specifically, a selection button for selecting whether to determine the count number of each round game in the lottery process or to determine the count number of each round game using the rune 350 is provided in the upper swelling portion 75. ing. Before the first round game is started, a screen for selecting whether to determine the count number of each round game in the lottery process or to determine the count number of each round game using the rune 350 is displayed. displayed on G. The player uses the selection buttons to select a method for determining the number of counts for each round of play. Here, in the case of the method of determining the count number of each round game by dropping into the holes 351, 352, 353 on the croon 350, after the player performs the shooting operation, the holes 351, 352, 352, 352, 352, 352 It takes time to drop to 353. In this case, there is a possibility that the player who wants to complete the round game quickly will be irritated. In this respect, according to the configuration, it is also possible to determine the count number of each round game in the lottery process, thereby preventing the accumulation of frustration of the player who wants to complete the round game quickly. becomes possible.

(7) If the hole 351 with the smallest count number among the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the croon 350 falls, in the next round game the hole with the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 351 may be closed. Here, when the game ball 160 continuously enters the hole 351 with the smallest count number, there is a high possibility that the player's frustration will be accumulated. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the game ball 160 does not continuously enter the hole 351 with the smallest count number, it is possible to suppress the player's frustration from accumulating. Moreover, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the total number of payouts during a round game decreases.

(8) In one lottery process using the crew 350, it is good also as a structure by which the count number of all the round games is determined. According to this configuration, since the count number of all round games is determined in one lottery process using the crew 350, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery process using the crew 350.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which determines a count number using the rune 350 at the rate of 1 time for a specific round game. Specifically, every time the round game is digested three times, the count number of the next three round games may be determined by one lottery process using the rune 350 . According to the configuration, compared to the configuration of determining the count number of each round game each time before each round game is started using the rune 350, it is possible to reduce the number of times the lottery process using the rune 350 is performed. It becomes possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to shorten the time of the lottery process using the crew 350 .

(9) Depending on the game state and the type of the jackpot result when the jackpot result is obtained, the execution mode of the lottery process performed to determine the count number of each round game may be different. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in a situation where the success/failure lottery mode is a low probability mode, the hole 351 with the smallest count number provided on the crew 350 is not closed, whereas the success/failure lottery mode is high. If a jackpot is won in the probability mode, the hole 351 with the smallest count provided on the croon 350 may be closed. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit for winning a jackpot in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In addition, in the configuration in which the normal jackpot result and the probability variable jackpot result are set, when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the hole 351 with the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 is not closed, whereas the probability variable jackpot result In this case, the hole 351 with the smallest count number provided on the cloon 350 may be closed. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit for the result of the probability variable jackpot.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
The configuration for determining the count number of each round game is different from the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed at step S3104 in the normal processing (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the eleventh embodiment.

First, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of the jackpot results. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4003, total payout lottery table identification processing is executed in step S4004. The total payout lottery table identifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The total payout lottery table specifying process is a process for reading out from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 the total payout lottery tables A, B, C, and D, which will be described later, according to the type of jackpot results. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing processing for specifying the total payout lottery table in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variable probability jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, "10" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4102. At subsequent step S4103, the payout total lottery table A corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The payout total lottery table A will be described later.

When the negative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the big hit result of this time is the probability variable big hit result B in step S4104. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, "5" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4105. In subsequent step S4106, the payout total lottery table B corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The payout total lottery table B will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S4104, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A in step S4107. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, "10" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4108. In subsequent step S4109, the payout total lottery table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The payout total lottery table C will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S4107, "5" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4110. In subsequent step S4111, the payout total lottery table D corresponding to the normal jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264.

Here, the various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D will be described with reference to FIG. Various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D are provided in such a way that the payout total number and the numerical range of the lottery counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 correspond one-to-one. The total number of payouts refers to the total number of game balls paid out as a result of winning into the big winning opening 222a. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the case of the payout total lottery table A, the probability that the total payout is 1200 is 5%, the probability that the total payout is 1500 is 10%, and the total payout is 1800. The probability is 15%, the probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 30%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 40%. The payout total lottery table A is set so that the probability that the number of payouts is 2400 is the highest, and the probability that the number of payouts is 1200 is the lowest.

In the case of the total payout lottery table B, the probability that the total number of payouts is 1200 is 30%, the probability that the total number of payouts is 1500 is 65%, the probability that the total number of payouts is 1800 is 2%, The probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 2%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 1%. The payout total lottery table B is set so that the probability that the number of payouts is 1500 is the highest, and the probability that the number of payouts is 2400 is the lowest.

In the case of the total payout lottery table C, the probability that the total number of payouts is 1200 is 10%, the probability that the total number of payouts is 1500 is 20%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 1800 is 30%. The probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 20%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 20%. The payout total lottery table C is set so that the probability that the number of payouts is 1800 is the highest, and the probability that the number of payouts is 1200 is the lowest.

In the case of the payout total lottery table D, the probability that the total payout is 1200 is 50%, the probability that the total payout is 1500 is 45%, the probability that the total payout is 1800 is 2%, The probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 2%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 1%. The payout total lottery table D is set so that the probability that the number of payouts is 1200 is the highest, and the probability that the number of payouts is 2400 is the lowest.

When various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D are compared, the total payout lottery table A has the largest allocation of 2400 total payouts. The payout total lottery table A is referred to only when the first probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . By adopting this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the game result of this time is the probability variable jackpot result A.

Comparing the total payout lottery table B and the total payout lottery table D, the total payout lottery table B has the same allocation for the total payout number of 1800 or more, but the total payout lottery table B is higher than the total payout lottery table D. Also, the distribution of the total number of payouts of 1500 is large. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the probability variable jackpot result A over the normal jackpot result B.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 69), when the process of step S4004 is executed, the lottery process is executed in step S4005. Specifically, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) is read from the RAM 264, and the value of the lottery counter is read into the RAM 264. match against

At step S4006, information on the total number of payouts selected at step S4005 is stored in the register of the MPU 262. FIG. In the subsequent step S4007, the total number of payouts specified in the above step S4006, the number of rounds corresponding to the result of the big win this time, and the number of payouts (15) of the game balls paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a are displayed. Specify the number of counts in the round game.

In step S4007, the total number of payouts specifically specified in step S4006 is calculated as the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the number of game balls to be paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a. (15 pieces) to specify the number of counts for each round game.

At step S4008, the count number specified at step S4007 is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. In the next step S4009, the numerical value information of the winning upper limit counter PC set in step S4008 is stored in the count number storage area provided in the RAM 264. FIG. The count number storage area is provided for the MPU 262 to grasp the count number specified in step S4007. Thereby, it is possible to set the count number specified in step S4007 to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 each time the next round game is started.

When the process of step S4009 is executed, the process of steps S4010 to S4011 is executed. The processing of steps S4010 to S4011 is the same as the processing of steps S3515 to S3516.

On the other hand, if it is in the open execution mode (step S4001: YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S4012. In the big winning hole opening/closing process, when the big winning hole 222a is closed, it is determined that the round counter RC is "1" or more and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". As a condition, the variable winning device 222 is driven to open the big winning opening 222a. The timer counter T contains numerical information for the opening time of the big winning opening 222a, numerical information for the opening standby time until the variable winning device 222 changes from the open state to the closed state, and then becomes the open state again. set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 40 seconds. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 shoots one game ball toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the ratio of the game balls rolling around the big winning hole 222a to win the big winning hole 222a. is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 33 game balls enter the big winning hole 222a during 40 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning hole 222a. In this embodiment, the situation in which the number of counts is the largest is the situation in which the number of rounds of the round game is 5R and the total number of payouts is 2,400. In this case, the count number of each round game is "32". Therefore, by setting 40 sec as the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a, it is possible to reach the count number set for each round game.

Further, when the big winning opening 222a is open, a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 222a (the timer counter T is "0") or a predetermined number of game balls have won. (the winning upper limit counter PC is "0"), the driving state of the variable winning device 222 is stopped, and the big winning opening 222a is closed. After executing the process of closing the big winning opening 222a, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is subtracted by 1. When the round counter RC decremented by 1 is larger than "0", the numerical information stored in the count number storage area of the RAM 264 is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The prize winning upper limit counter PC is decremented by 1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the big prize winning opening 222a.

When the process of step S4012 has been executed, the processes of steps S4013 to S4016 are executed. The processing of steps S4013 to S4016 is the same as the processing of steps S3518 to S3521. In the present embodiment, the count number storage area provided in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0" in the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode executed in step S4016.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, the total number of payouts in the round game is determined by lottery, and the count number of each round game is determined by performing a predetermined arithmetic process on the total number of payouts. Here, when the count number of each round game corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of rounds is set in advance, all the count numbers of each round game corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of rounds must be stored in the ROM 263. . In this case, the capacity of the ROM 263 becomes large. On the other hand, according to this configuration, by executing the predetermined arithmetic processing, the count number of each round game corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of rounds can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the capacity of the ROM 263. do not have. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Further, the total number of payouts in the round game is not set in advance, but the total number of payouts in the round game is determined by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the total number of payouts even with a predetermined jackpot result. Furthermore, according to this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game expecting that the total number of payouts will increase.

Further, since the total number of payouts in the round game is determined by lottery, there is a possibility that the total number of payouts for the normal jackpot results A and B will be larger than the probability variable jackpot results A and B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from declining when the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained.

Also, there is a possibility that the total number of payouts will be larger when the number of rounds is smaller than when the number of rounds is large. As a result, even when the number of rounds is small, it is possible for the player to play while expecting the total number of payouts to increase.

Further, since the count number of each round game is specified from the total number of payouts, it is possible to diversify the count number of each round game even if the jackpot result is the same number of rounds.

Also, the total number of payouts is not proportional to the count number of each round game. Here, if the total number of payouts increases in proportion to the count number of each round game, the total number of payouts cannot be expected to increase when the count number of each round game is small. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the total number of payouts is not proportional to the count number of each round game, it is possible to expect that the total number of payouts will increase when the count number of each round game is small. .

Further, when various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D are compared, the total payout lottery table A has the largest allocation of 2400 total payouts. The payout total lottery table A is referred to only when the first probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . By adopting this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the game result of this time is the probability variable jackpot result A.

Further, when the total payout lottery table B and the total payout lottery table D are compared, the total payout lottery table B is the same as the total payout lottery table when the total payout number is 1800 or more. The distribution of 1500 total payouts is larger than D. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the probability variable jackpot result A over the normal jackpot result B.

<Another Example of the Eleventh Embodiment>
(1) The number of counts for each round game is not limited to the same, and for example, the number of counts for each round game may be different. Specifically, the total number of payouts, the number of payouts (15 pieces) of game balls paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a, and the ratio of the count number set for each round game are used. Identify the number of counts. The count number of each round game is specified by dividing the total number of payouts by the number of payouts of game balls to be paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a and multiplying by the ratio of the count number set for each round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the count number of each round game different by performing the above arithmetic processing.

(2) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the count number of each round game is determined by arithmetic processing, and the configuration may be such that the number of rounds is determined by arithmetic processing. The number of rounds is specified by dividing the total number of payouts specified in the lottery process by the count number of each round game and the number of payouts (15) of game balls to be paid out when winning in the big winning opening 222a. If the number of rounds corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of counts is set in advance, the ROM 263 must store all the number of rounds corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of counts. In this case, the capacity of the ROM 263 becomes large. In this respect, according to this configuration, the number of rounds corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of counts can be set by executing the above-described predetermined arithmetic processing, so there is no need to increase the capacity of the ROM 263 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

(3) The total number of payouts may be 2400 only when the count number of each round game is "32". As described above, the case where the count number of each round game is "32" is the situation where the count number is the largest. According to this configuration, when the count number of each round game becomes "32", the player is simultaneously given the joy of having the largest count number of the round game and the joy of having the largest total number of payouts. It becomes possible to This makes it possible to enhance the excitement of the player.

(4) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of rounds differs according to the type of the jackpot results. According to this configuration, it is possible to reliably specify the total number of payouts by grasping the count number of each round game.

(5) The open duration time of the big winning opening 222a may vary according to the determined count number. In this case, the larger the count number, the longer the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a. Further, by continuing to operate the firing handle 28 over the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a, the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set so as to reach the determined count number. good too. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to win the game ball into the big winning opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a elapses.

(6) When the total number of payouts is determined by lottery, both the number of rounds and the number of counts may be determined from the total number of payouts. In this case, a plurality of combinations of the number of rounds and the number of counts corresponding to the total number of counts may be set in advance. Specifically, the total number of counts is specified by dividing the total number of payouts specified in the lottery by the number of payouts (15) of game balls to be paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a. Then, a combination of the number of rounds and the number of counts corresponding to the total number of counts is specified by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of the number of rounds and the number of counts corresponding to the total number of payouts.

(7) Instead of the total number of payouts being determined by lottery, the total number of counts may be determined by lottery. Specifically, when the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs, a lottery is held to determine the total number of counts, and by dividing the total number of counts selected in the lottery by the number of rounds, each round A game count number is specified. According to this configuration, it is possible to set the count number of each round game without specifying the total number of payouts.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
The conditions for continuing the round game are different from those of the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed at step S3104 in the normal processing (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twelfth embodiment.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4202, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of the jackpot results. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the processing of steps S4204 and S4205 is executed. The processing of steps S4204 and S4205 is the same as the processing of steps S3515 and S3516.

In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the round number of round games and the upper limit of the count number of round games are not provided, the round counter RC and the winning upper limit counter PC are not provided in the various counter area 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. Therefore, no values are set in the round counter RC and the prize winning upper limit counter PC at the start of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4201: YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S4206. The big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 222a is open. When the big winning opening 222a is not open, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in step S4302. By providing this process, it is possible to prevent the big winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4302, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the determination in step S4302 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4303 whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264 . The ending flag is a flag for identifying that the MPU 262 has transmitted an ending command. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the large winning opening opening processing from being performed in a situation where the effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 231. .

If a negative determination is made in step S4303, a large winning opening opening process is executed in step S4304. Specifically, the variable winning driving section 222c is driven and controlled so that the big winning opening 222a is in an open state. In the present embodiment, the process of closing the big winning opening 222a is performed only in the situation where the open continuous winning is not won in the lottery process described later. In other words, it is not necessary to set the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a. Therefore, the opening duration of the big winning hole 222a is not set in the big winning hole opening process.

After executing the process of step S4304, the process of step S4305 is executed. The processing of step S4305 is the same as the processing of step S3605.

On the other hand, if the big winning opening 222a is open (step S4301: YES), it is determined whether or not a closing flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4306. Here, before describing the closing flag, the read processing executed in step S3001 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 56) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the read processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to any of the operation ports 223, 224. If a prize has been won in any of the operation ports 223 and 224, the counter for three prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is incremented by one in step S4402. The 3 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 3 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 3 game balls should be output. Note that winning to the upper working port 223 and winning to the lower working port 224 can occur at the same time within the range of one processing time of the normal processing. It is possible that the process of adding 1 to the counter is performed twice.

If a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the process of step S4402 is executed, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not a prize has been awarded to the general winning opening 221. When the winning to the general winning opening 221 has occurred, 1 is added to the counter for 10 winning balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4404. The 10 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 10 game balls should be output.

If a negative determination is made in step S4403, or after the processing of step S4404 is executed, it is determined in step S4405 whether or not the variable winning device 222 has won a prize. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, this reading process is terminated. Therefore, when no winning to the variable winning device 222 has occurred, the processes of steps S4406 to S4412, which will be described later, are not executed.

When the winning to the variable winning device 222 has occurred, 1 is added to the counter for 15 winning balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4406. The 15 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 15 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 15 game balls should be output.

When the process of step S4406 is executed, it is determined whether or not the continuous open lottery flag is set in the RAM 264 in the subsequent step S4407. The open continuation lottery flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 is in a state of performing processing for specifying whether or not to close the big winning opening 222a, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S4407, 1 is added to the lottery trigger counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4408. The lottery trigger counter is a count for specifying the timing at which the MPU 262 sets the open continuation lottery flag in the RAM 264 .

In step S4409, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger counter is a predetermined value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger counter is "20". Since the lottery trigger counter is incremented by 1 each time a prize is won in the big prize opening 222a, the lottery trigger counter becomes "20" when the number of prizes in the big prize opening 222a reaches 20.

If a negative determination is made in step S4409, this read processing ends. Therefore, until the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value, the later-described process of specifying whether or not to close the big winning opening 222a is not executed. Here, if the process of specifying whether or not to close the large winning opening 222a, which will be described later, is executed before the value of the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value, in a situation where there are few winnings to the large winning opening 222a. There is a possibility that the big winning opening 222a will be closed. If the big winning opening 222a is closed in a situation where the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is small, the player's frustration accumulates because the total number of payouts decreases. In this respect, according to the present configuration, until the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value, the later-described process of specifying whether or not to close the big winning opening 222a is not executed. Therefore, the actual total number of payouts does not fall below the preset total number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration due to the small total number of payouts. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4409, an opening continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4410.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4407, or if the process of step S4410 is executed, "600" is set in a predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4411. The predetermined time elapsing counter is defined as the elapse of a predetermined time from the current winning to the big winning opening 222a to the next winning to the big winning opening 222a under the condition that the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264. This counter is used by the MPU 262 to specify whether or not the operation has been completed. Numerical information set in the predetermined time elapsed counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, it is subtracted by 1 every 2 msec, and becomes "0" about 1.2 sec after "600" is set in the predetermined time elapsed counter.

Here, the reason why the predetermined time is set will be explained. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the time from the current winning to the big winning opening 222a until the next winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs is less than or equal to the predetermined time, or longer than the predetermined time. The probability of open continuous winning in the process of specifying whether or not to close the big winning opening 222a, which will be described later, is different between the two cases. Also, the former is set to have a higher probability of being open and continuously winning than the latter. Here, if the predetermined time is not provided, there is a possibility that the period in which the big winning opening 222a is open may occur for a long period of time. In this case, the round game may be unnecessarily long. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the person whose time from winning to the next big winning opening 222a to occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a is less than or equal to the predetermined time is selected to enter the current big winning opening 222a. The probability of winning continuously open in the process of specifying whether to close the big winning opening 222a, which will be described later, is higher than when the time from the winning to the occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a is longer than a predetermined time. is set to be higher. Therefore, the player performs the shooting operation so that the next winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs before the predetermined time elapses. As a result, it is possible to prevent the round game from being unnecessarily long by preventing the occurrence of a long period of time in which the big winning hole 222a is open.

Next, the reason why the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec in this embodiment will be described. As described above, in a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. . In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the game ball rolling around the big winning hole 222a wins the big winning hole 222a. The percentage is approximately 50%. In other words, when the shooting operation is continued, the winning to the next big winning opening 222a occurs approximately 1.2 sec after the occurrence of the winning to the big winning opening 222a. Therefore, if the shooting operation is not continued, the possibility of winning the next big winning hole 222a within the predetermined time after winning the current big winning hole 222a becomes low. If there is no winning in the next big winning opening 222a within the above-mentioned predetermined time from the winning in the big winning opening 222a this time, it is determined whether or not to close the big winning opening 222a, which will be described later. becomes more likely. According to this configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, it is possible for the player to continue the shooting operation.

Further, if the predetermined time is longer than 1.2 sec, even if the shooting operation is temporarily interrupted, there is a high possibility that the next winning opening 222a will be won within the predetermined time. In this case, the player cannot concentrate on the shooting operation. In this respect, according to this configuration, the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, so the possibility of temporarily interrupting the firing operation is low. This allows the player to concentrate on the shooting operation.

Further, if the predetermined time is shorter than 1.2 sec, the possibility of winning the next big winning hole 222a within a predetermined time after winning the current big winning hole 222a becomes low. In this case, in the process of determining whether or not to close the big winning hole 222a, which will be described later, the situation in which the game continues to be open and non-winning occurs more frequently. I can't do it anymore. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, there is a possibility that the next prize winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs within a predetermined time after the winning to the big winning opening 222a this time. is high. As a result, in the process of specifying whether or not to close the big winning opening 222a, which will be described later, the frequency of occurrence of a state of non-winning continuously open increases, so that the player can expect to continue the round game. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

When the process of step S4411 is executed, the large winning opening open continuation lottery process is executed in step S4412. The lottery process for continuing to open the big winning opening will be described with reference to FIG. The large winning opening continuous lottery process is performed to specify whether or not to close the large winning opening 222a. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the large winning opening open continuation lottery process in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot results are set, namely, a normal jackpot result and a probability variable jackpot result. As a specific process of step S4501, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM264. The probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 when a probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the type determination process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". As described above, the predetermined time elapsing counter is the time from the current winning to the big winning opening 222a to the next winning to the big winning opening 222a under the condition that the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264. This counter is used by the MPU 262 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4502, the open continuation lottery table corresponding to the situation where the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not "0" in step S4503. A is read from ROM 263 to RAM 264 . The open continuation lottery table A will be described later.

If the determination in step S4502 is affirmative, in step S4504 the open continuation lottery table corresponding to the situation where the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is "0" B is read from ROM 263 to RAM 264 . The open continuation lottery table B will be described later.

On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result (step S4501: NO), the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4505 is set to "0". ” is determined.

If a negative determination is made in step S4505, an open continuation lottery table corresponding to a situation in which the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not "0" in step S4506. C is read from ROM 263 to RAM 264 . The open continuation lottery table C will be described later.

If the determination in step S4505 is affirmative, the opening continuation lottery table corresponding to the situation in which the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is "0" in step S4507. D is read from ROM 263 to RAM 264 .

Here, various open continuation lottery tables A, B, C, and D will be described with reference to FIG. In the various continuous open lottery tables A, B, C, and D, the result of open continuous winning or open continuous non-winning corresponds one-to-one with the numerical range of the lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Let it be. The lottery counter is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The lottery counter is used to specify the lottery result. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various open continuation lottery tables.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the continuous open lottery table A, the probability of winning the continuous open lottery is 99%, and in the continuous open lottery table B, the probability of winning the continuous open lottery is 10%. In the case of the table C, the probability of winning continuously open is 95%, and in the case of the continuous open lottery table D, the probability of winning continuously open is 5%.

When the continuous open lottery tables A, B, C, and D are compared, the continuous open lottery table A has the highest probability of winning the continuous open lottery. Here, the opening continuation lottery table A is selected when the big win result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability big win result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not "0". As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not "0".

Further, the continuous open lottery table A and the continuous open lottery table C are selected when the continuous open lottery flag is set in the RAM 264 and when the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". It is a situation that is not. On the other hand, the continuous open lottery table B and the continuous open lottery table D are selected when the continuous open lottery flag is set in the RAM 264 and when the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". This is the situation. When the continuous open lottery table A and the continuous open lottery table C are compared with the continuous open lottery table B and the continuous open lottery table D, the former has a higher probability of winning the continuous open lottery than the latter. Therefore, the player feels that he wants the game ball to enter the big winning opening 222a before the predetermined time elapsed counter becomes "0". As a result, it is possible to continue the shooting operation during the round game.

Further, when comparing the continuous open lottery table A and the continuous open lottery table C, the continuous open lottery table A is set to have a higher probability of winning the continuous open lottery than the continuous open lottery table C. - 特許庁Further, when the continuous open lottery table B and the continuous open lottery table D are compared, the continuous open lottery table B is set to have a higher probability of winning the continuous open lottery than the continuous open lottery table D. - 特許庁Here, the jackpot results for which the open continuation lottery tables A and B are selected are probability variable jackpot results. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result.

In addition, every time a game ball wins in the big winning hole 222a, the big winning hole open continuation lottery process is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the round game will continue each time a game ball wins in the big winning hole 222a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening continuous lottery process (FIG. 75), when the process of step S4503 is performed, when the process of step S4504 is performed, when the process of step S4506 is performed, or when the process of step S4507 is performed If so, lottery processing is executed in step S4508. Specifically, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) is read out from the RAM 264, and the value of the lottery counter is read out to the RAM 264, and various continuous open lottery tables A, B, C, and D are read out. match against

When it becomes open continuation winning (step S4509: YES), this large winning a prize opening continuation lottery processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the open continuation win has not been made (step S4509: NO), a closing flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4510. The closing flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 has not been elected to continue open. By providing the closing flag, it becomes possible for the MPU 262 to specify the timing for switching the large winning opening 222a from the open state to the closed state.

In this embodiment, the number of rounds is set to 1R. In this case, it is not determined by a lottery whether or not to open the big winning port 222a again after the big winning port 222a is once closed, but whether to continue the open state is determined by a lottery. In the case of determination and continuous winning, the open state is continued as it is. As a result, there is no waiting time until the open state is resumed in a configuration in which a lottery is performed to determine whether to continue the open state.

In the following step S4511, the continuous open lottery flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0", and the main winning opening continuous lottery process is terminated. In this process, the open continuation lottery flag is cleared to "0", so that a negative determination is made in step S4407 of the reading process (FIG. 74). As a result, in the next opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to perform the large winning opening continuous lottery process after the lottery trigger counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 reaches a predetermined value.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 73), if the closing flag is not set in the RAM 264 (step S4306: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. If the closing flag is set in the RAM 264 (step S4306: YES), a closing execution process is executed in step S4307. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning driving section 222c is terminated so that the big winning opening 222a is closed. In subsequent step S4308, a close command is set. The closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal processing (FIG. 57).

After executing the processing of step S4308, the processing of steps S4309 to S4310 is executed. The processing of steps S4309 to S4310 is the same as the processing of steps S3617 to S3618.

An ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in subsequent step S4311. The ending flag is a flag for identifying that the MPU 262 has transmitted an ending command, as described above.

In step S4312, the closing flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0", and the lottery trigger counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to "0", and the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. . By clearing the lottery trigger counter to "0" in this process, it is possible to prevent the affirmative determination from being made in step S4409 in the next opening/closing execution mode.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 72), after executing the process of step S4206, it is checked in step S4207 whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". judge. When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. By providing this processing, it becomes possible to prevent the processing of steps S4209 to S4210 from being executed in a situation where the big winning opening 222a is in an open state.

In the subsequent step S4208, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264. When the negative determination is made in step S4208, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing of steps S4209 to S4210 from being executed even though the opening/closing execution mode is not notified on the display screen G. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4208, the processing of steps S4209 to S4210 is executed. The processing of steps S4209 to S4210 is the same as the processing of steps S3520 to S3521. In this embodiment, only two types of jackpot results are provided: the normal jackpot result and the variable probability jackpot result. The stored flag of the jackpot flag or the variable probability jackpot flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result. The variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot result. Also, the ending flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode executed in step S4210.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, every time a game ball wins in the big winning hole 222a, the big winning hole opening continuation lottery process is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the round game will continue each time a game ball wins in the big winning hole 222a.

In addition, when the time from the winning to the big winning opening 222a this time to the occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a is less than or equal to the predetermined time or longer than the predetermined time, the opening of the big winning opening is continued. In the lottery process, the probability of being open and continuously winning is different. Also, the former is set to have a higher probability of being open and continuously winning than the latter. Here, if the predetermined time is not provided, there is a possibility that the period in which the big winning opening 222a is open may occur for a long period of time. In this case, the round game may be unnecessarily long. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the person whose time from winning to the next big winning opening 222a to occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a is less than or equal to the predetermined time is selected to enter the current big winning opening 222a. It is set so that the probability of being open and continuously winning in the above-mentioned large winning hole open continuous lottery process is higher than when the time from the winning to the occurrence of winning to the next big winning hole 222a is longer than a predetermined time. . Therefore, the player performs the shooting operation so that the next winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs before the predetermined time elapses. As a result, it is possible to prevent the round game from being unnecessarily long by preventing the occurrence of a long period of time in which the big winning hole 222a is open.

Also, the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec. As described above, in a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. . In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the game ball rolling around the big winning hole 222a wins the big winning hole 222a. The percentage is approximately 50%. In other words, when the shooting operation is continued, the winning to the next big winning opening 222a occurs approximately 1.2 sec after the occurrence of the winning to the big winning opening 222a. Therefore, if the shooting operation is not continued, the possibility of winning the next big winning hole 222a within the predetermined time after winning the current big winning hole 222a becomes low. If no winning to the next big winning hole 222a occurs within the above-mentioned predetermined time after winning to the big winning hole 222a this time, the probability of non-opening and non-winning in the continuous opening lottery process for the big winning hole increases. According to this configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, it is possible for the player to continue the shooting operation.

Further, until the lottery trigger counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 reaches a predetermined value, the large winning opening continuous lottery process is not executed. Here, if the large winning opening open continuation lottery process is executed before the value of the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value, the large winning opening 222a is closed in a situation where the number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a is small. It may get lost. If the big winning opening 222a is closed in a situation where the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is small, the player's frustration accumulates because the total number of payouts decreases. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the large winning opening open continuation lottery process is not executed until the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, the actual total number of payouts does not fall below the preset total number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration due to the small total number of payouts.

Also, the number of rounds of the round game is set to 1R. In this case, it is not determined by a lottery whether or not to open the big winning port 222a again after the big winning port 222a is once closed, but whether to continue the open state is determined by a lottery. In the case of determination and continuous winning, the open state is continued as it is. As a result, there is no waiting time until the open state is resumed in a configuration in which a lottery is performed to determine whether to continue the open state.

Further, when the open continuous lottery table A and the open continuous lottery table C are compared, the open continuous lottery table A is set to have a higher open continuous winning probability than the open continuous lottery table C.例文帳に追加Further, when comparing the continuous open lottery table B and the continuous open lottery table D, the continuous open lottery table B is set to have a higher probability of winning the continuous open lottery than the continuous open lottery table D. - 特許庁Here, the jackpot results for which the open continuation lottery tables A and B are selected are probability variable jackpot results. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation in which the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result.

<Another Example of the Twelfth Embodiment>
(1) The open continuous winning probability is not limited to a constant configuration. For example, the open continuous winning probability may be different according to the total number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 222a. Specifically, an opening continuation lottery table corresponding to the winning total number of game balls into the big winning opening 222a is set. In the large winning hole open continuous lottery process, the lottery process is performed with reference to the open continuous lottery table corresponding to the winning total number of game balls into the big winning hole 222a. In this case, the greater the total number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 222a, the higher the open continuous winning probability. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 222a is large.

(2) If the time from the current winning to the big winning opening 222a to the occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a becomes longer than a predetermined time, it will be considered as an open and continuous winning in the big winning opening continuous lottery process. A configuration may be adopted in which a screen notifying that the probability of winning is lowered is displayed on the display screen G immediately before the round game is started. According to this configuration, when the time from the current winning to the big winning opening 222a to the occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a becomes longer than the predetermined time, in the continuous lottery process for opening the big winning opening, It is possible to inform a player who has not grasped that the probability of winning continuous open winning will decrease in an easy-to-understand manner. As a result, when the time from the winning to the main winning opening 222a this time to the occurrence of winning to the next big winning opening 222a becomes longer than the predetermined time, the open continuous winning in the large winning opening continuous lottery process. It is possible to prevent the player who did not know that the probability of becoming .

(3) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery trigger counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 reaches a predetermined value and then the large winning opening opening continuation lottery process is performed. It may be configured such that the large winning opening open continuation lottery process is performed even in a situation where the number has not reached. In this configuration, in the case where the open continuation lottery process is performed before the lottery opportunity counter reaches a predetermined value, the large winning opening is opened when the lottery opportunity counter reaches the predetermined value. 222a may be closed. According to this configuration, the game balls for the minimum guarantee set in advance for the player are paid out, and the opening is continued in the large winning opening continuous opening lottery process until the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value. It is possible to make the applicant expect to be elected.

(4) The predetermined time is not limited to 1.2 sec, and the predetermined time may be longer than 1.2 sec. Here, when the configuration in which the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec and the configuration in which the predetermined time is longer than 1.2 sec are compared in a situation where the firing operation is continuously performed, the latter is better. There is a high possibility that the frequency of winning in the big winning opening 222a within a predetermined period of time will increase. In a situation where the shooting operation is continuously performed, if the frequency of non-winning in the continuous opening lottery process of the large winning opening continuous opening lottery process increases, the frustration of the player accumulates. In this regard, according to the present configuration, by setting the predetermined time longer than 1.2 sec, winning to the large winning opening 222a occurs within the predetermined time compared to the configuration in which the predetermined time is 1.2 sec. likely to be more frequent. As a result, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration due to non-winning in the continuous open lottery process in spite of the fact that the shooting operation has been continued.

(5) If a predetermined time elapses in a situation in which no prize is awarded to the next big winning opening 222a, the large winning opening opening continuation lottery process is not performed, and the big winning opening 222a is removed from the open state at the timing when the predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to be in a closed state. According to this configuration, the player performs the shooting operation so that the winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs within the predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the game.

(6) A configuration in which the probability of winning continuously open in the large winning opening continuous lottery process is different depending on the time from the winning of the big winning opening 222a to the next winning of the big winning opening 222a. may be Specifically, for example, if the time from winning the current big prize opening 222a to the occurrence of the next prize winning to the next big prize opening 222a is 0 sec to less than 2 sec, the probability of open continuous winning is 99%. If it is 2 sec to less than 4 sec, the probability of winning continuously is 95%. A configuration in which the probability of open continuous winning is 80%, the probability of open continuous winning is 50% when the time is less than 8 sec to 10 sec, and the probability of open continuous winning is 10% when the time is 10 sec or more. may be According to this configuration, it is possible to continue the shooting operation and to increase the attention to the time from the current prize winning to the big prize winning port 222a to the occurrence of the next prize winning to the big prize winning port 222a. Become.

(7) In the case that the open continuous lottery process does not result in winning, the open return lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the large winning opening 222a is to be opened from the closed state, and the open return lottery process is performed. If the lottery process results in a return winning, the large winning opening 222a may be changed from the closed state to the open state. Concretely, when it becomes open continuation non-winning in large winning a prize mouth open continuation lottery processing, open return lottery processing is done. A return flag is set in the RAM 264 when the return is won in the open return lottery process. Further, even when the return lottery process returns, the closing execution process may be performed. When the return flag is set in the RAM 264, the large winning opening opening process is performed, and the large winning opening 222a changes from the closed state to the open state. According to this configuration, even if the large prize winning port 222a changes from the open state to the closed state, it is possible to expect the large prize winning port 222a to change from the closed state to the open state again.

(8) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of numbers of rounds are set and the large winning opening open continuation lottery process is executed in some of the numbers of rounds. According to this configuration, in the round game in which the large winning hole open continuous lottery process is not executed, it is possible to give a sense of security that the round game will surely continue, and the round in which the big winning hole open continuous lottery process is executed. In the game, it is possible to give a thrilling feeling as to whether or not the round game will continue.

Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of round numbers are set and the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed in a part of the number of rounds, the number of rounds in which the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed and the corresponding large winning opening A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times the open continuation lottery process is executed is set in advance. According to this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play the round game while grasping the number of rounds in which the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed and the number of times the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed. becomes. Therefore, even if the big winning hole 222a is suddenly closed in the middle of the round game, it is not due to the failure of the pachinko machine 10, but because the big winning hole 222a is not won in the above-mentioned large winning hole open continuous lottery process. is closed.

Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of round numbers are set and the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed in a part of the number of rounds, the number of rounds in which the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed and the corresponding large winning opening The number of times the open continuation lottery process is executed may be determined by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of rounds in which the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed and the number of times the large winning opening continuous lottery process is executed.

(9) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the large winning opening opening continuation lottery process is performed each time a winning to the large winning opening 222a occurs. It is good also as a structure by which a large winning a prize mouth open continuation lottery process is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to raise interest in the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a. Further, in this configuration, the greater the number of times a plurality of winnings have occurred in the large winning opening 222a, the higher the probability of winning the open continuous winning in the continuous opening lottery process for the large winning opening. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which a plurality of prizes are won in the big prize opening.

(10) When the shooting operation is not performed for a certain period of time, the big winning opening 222a is temporarily closed, and when the shooting operation is performed again, the big winning opening 222a is opened to restart the round game. good too. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the big winning opening 222a is open for a long period of time when no round game is being played.

(11) Every time a prize is won in the big winning opening 222a, a trigger lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to perform an upper limit lottery for determining the upper limit of the number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening 222a. , the above-mentioned upper limit lottery may be performed. In this case, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222 reaches the upper limit determined in the upper limit lottery, the big winning opening 222a is closed. Specifically, the upper limit determined in the upper limit lottery is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264 b of the RAM 264 . Each time a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 222a, the prize upper limit counter PC is decremented by "1". When the winning upper limit counter PC becomes "0", the big winning opening 222a is closed. Every time a prize is won in the big winning opening 222a, the above-mentioned opportunity lottery is performed, and if winning is won in the above-mentioned opportunity lottery, according to the configuration in which the above-mentioned upper limit lottery is performed, only whether or not the round game continues In addition, it is possible to increase the attention to the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a. In addition, since the upper limit of the number of prizes to be awarded to the big prize opening 222 is determined, it is possible to prevent the number of prizes to be awarded to the big prize prize opening 222a from exceeding the previously assumed number of prizes. .

In addition, every time a prize is won in the big winning opening 222a, the opportunity lottery is performed, and if a winner is won in the trigger lottery, the upper limit lottery is performed. A plurality of upper limit values are set, and even if the upper limit of the number of prizes to be won in the large prize winning port 222a is determined in the upper limit value lottery, the trigger lottery is performed each time a prize is won in the large prize winning port 222a. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the upper limit value lottery is performed when the player wins the opportunity lottery. In this case, the upper limit of the number of winning prizes to the current big winning opening 222a is changed to the upper limit value determined in the upper limit lottery performed again. Specifically, the upper limit value determined in the upper limit lottery is set in the current entry prize upper limit counter PC. In addition, in the configuration in which the current upper limit of the number of prizes to be won to the big prize hole 222a is changed to the upper limit value determined in the upper limit lottery that is performed again, the number of prizes to be won to the big prize hole 222a is displayed on the display screen G. A configuration in which the upper limit value is displayed may be employed. According to this configuration, the player is made to think that he or she does not want to win the opportunity lottery until the player wins the opportunity lottery, and the upper limit of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is displayed on the display screen G. When the upper limit lottery determines the upper limit of the number of prizes to be won in the big winning opening 222a, it is possible to make the player think that he or she wants to win the opportunity lottery. Therefore, it is possible to change the player's emotion according to the situation.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
The configuration for determining the count number of round games is different from that of the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed at step S3104 in the normal processing (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the thirteenth embodiment.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S4602 to determine whether or not it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S4603 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of the jackpot results. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not the big winning result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the variable probability big winning result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variable probability jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . The first variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that causes the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot result A.

If the determination in step S4604 is affirmative, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "1" in step S4605, and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to Set "160". As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "160".

If a negative determination is made in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the big winning result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable big winning result B in step S4606. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second probability variable jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . The second probability variable jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result B.

If the determination in step S4606 is affirmative, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "1" in step S4607, and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to Set "50". As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "50".

When a negative determination is made in step S4606, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggers the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result A in step S4608. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 . The first normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that causes the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result A.

If the determination in step S4608 is affirmative, in step S4609 the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "1", and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "1". Set "120". As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "120".

If a negative determination is made in step S4608, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "1" in step S4610, and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Set "80". As a result, the count number of the round game becomes "80". The count numbers set in steps S4605, S4607, S4609, and S4610 represent the number of game balls that can win in the big winning hole 222a.

When the count numbers corresponding to the types of jackpot results are compared, the largest count number is set when the type of jackpot result is probability variable jackpot result A. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation in which the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result A.

Further, when the count numbers corresponding to the types of the jackpot result are compared, the smallest count number is set when the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B. Here, when the type of the jackpot result is the normal jackpot result B, if the configuration is such that the smallest count number is set, there is a sense of disappointment at the decision that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result. In addition, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed with the fact that the number of rounds in the round game is the smallest. In this respect, according to this configuration, when the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result B, the smallest count number is set. Therefore, even if the count number is the smallest, the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B, so it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the count number being the smallest.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds of the round game is set to 1R regardless of the type of jackpot result. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a waiting period until the large winning opening 222a is opened from the closed state. This allows the player to smoothly play the round game. Also, the type of jackpot result cannot be specified by the upper limit of the number of rounds of the round game. As described above, since the count number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot result, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result from the count number of round games. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player to the count number of the round game.

When the process of step S4605 is performed, when the process of step S4607 is performed, when the process of step S4609 is performed, or when the process of step S4610 is performed, the process of steps S4611 and S4612 is performed. The processing of steps S4611 and S4612 is the same as the processing of steps S3515 and S3516.

On the other hand, if it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4601: YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S4613. In the big winning hole opening/closing process, when the big winning hole 222a is closed, it is determined that the round counter RC is "1" or more and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". As a condition, the variable winning device 222 is driven to open the big winning opening 222a. The timer counter T is set with numerical value information for the waiting period for opening and numerical value information for the opening time of the big winning opening 222a. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started.

Further, "96000" is set in the timer counter T as numerical information for the opening time of the big winning opening 222a. As described above, the numerical value information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started, so the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is 192 seconds. It has become.

Here, the largest count number set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is "160". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 281 shoots one game ball toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the ratio of the game balls rolling around the big winning hole 222a to win the big winning hole 222a. is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 160 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 192 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. In this embodiment, when the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result A, "160" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. As described above, when the type of the probability variable jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A, the largest count number is set. Therefore, by setting 192 sec as the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a, it is possible to reach the upper limit of the count set for each round game.

Further, when the big winning opening 222a is open, a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 222a (the timer counter T is "0") or a predetermined number of game balls have won. (the winning upper limit counter PC is "0"), the driving state of the variable winning device 222 is stopped, and the big winning opening 222a is closed. After executing the process of closing the big winning opening 222a, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is subtracted by 1. Also, the winning upper limit counter PC is decremented by 1 every time a game ball wins the big winning hole 222a. In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of rounds in the round game is 1R, when the round counter RC is decremented by 1, the round counter RC becomes "0". Therefore, in this embodiment, the process of subtracting 1 from the round counter RC is performed only once.

If the processing of step S4613 has been executed, the processing of steps S4614 to S4617 is executed. The processing of steps S4614 to S4617 is the same as the processing of steps S3518 to S3521.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, the values set in the winning upper limit counters PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are different depending on the types of jackpot results. Therefore, by grasping the number of round games counted, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the count number of the round game.

Further, when the count numbers corresponding to the types of the jackpot result are compared, the largest count number is set when the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation in which the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result A.

Further, when the count numbers corresponding to the types of the jackpot result are compared, the smallest count number is set when the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B. Here, when the type of the jackpot result is the normal jackpot result B, if the configuration is such that the smallest count number is set, there is a sense of disappointment at the decision that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result. In addition, there is a risk that the player will be disappointed with the fact that the number of rounds in the round game is the smallest. In this respect, according to this configuration, when the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result B, the smallest count number is set. Therefore, even if the count number is the smallest, the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B, so it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the count number being the smallest.

Also, the upper limit of the number of rounds of the round game is set to 1R regardless of the type of jackpot result. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a waiting period until the large winning opening 222a is opened from the closed state. This allows the player to smoothly play the round game. Also, the type of jackpot result cannot be specified by the upper limit of the number of rounds of the round game. As described above, since the count number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot result, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result from the count number of round games. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player to the count number of the round game.

<Another example of the thirteenth embodiment>
(1) The value set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 may differ depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is won. In this case, in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, if the probability variable jackpot results A and B are obtained, in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the above prize is higher than the case where the probability variable jackpot results A and B are obtained. A configuration in which the value set in the upper limit counter PC is increased may be employed. Specifically, in a situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the probability variable jackpot result A is obtained, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "200", and the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264. In a situation where the winning prize upper limit counter PC is set to "160" when the variable probability jackpot result A is obtained. In addition, in a situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the probability variable jackpot result is B, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "80" and the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 264. 3, if the variable probability jackpot result is B, "50" is set to the prize winning upper limit counter PC. According to this configuration, in a situation where the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situations where the probability variable jackpot results A and B are achieved.

In addition, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, when the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained, when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning prize is higher than when the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained. A configuration in which the value set in the upper limit counter PC is increased may be employed. Specifically, in a situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the normal jackpot result is A, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "150" and the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264. If the normal jackpot result A is obtained in a situation where the game has not been completed, "120" is set to the prize winning upper limit counter PC. In addition, in a situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the normal jackpot result is B, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to "100" and the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 264. 3, when the normal jackpot result B is obtained, "80" is set to the prize winning upper limit counter PC. Here, in a situation where the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, if the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In this case, the player's motivation may decrease. In that respect, according to this configuration, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, if the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained, when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the normal jackpot results A and B are obtained. Also, the value set in the winning upper limit counter PC increases. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stress caused by changing the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

(2) The value to be set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is not determined according to the type of the jackpot result, but rather, the RAM 264 is determined according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won, for example. A different value may be set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b. Specifically, when a big win is won in a situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, "160" is set to the winning upper limit counter PC, and a big win is won in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this case, the winning upper limit counter PC may be set to "120". According to this configuration, since the types of count numbers are reduced, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the count number of the current round game. In this configuration, it is assumed that the count number of round games is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result. Also, the value set in the winning upper limit counter PC may be larger when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode than when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. good. As a result, it is possible to secure the advantage of winning a jackpot in a situation where the lottery mode is the high-probability mode.

In addition, regardless of the type of the lottery mode, when the jackpot is won in the high-frequency support mode, "160" is set to the winning upper limit counter PC, and the jackpot is won in the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the winning upper limit counter PC may be set to "120". In this configuration, it is assumed that the count number of round games is the same regardless of the type of jackpot results.

(3) Regardless of the type of jackpot result, the opening duration of the jackpot 222a is not limited to the same configuration. For example, the opening duration of the jackpot 222a differs for each jackpot result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which In this case, by continuing to operate the shooting handle 28 over the opening duration time of the large winning opening 222a, the number of winning game balls to the large winning opening 222a reaches each count number. A configuration in which an open duration is set may also be used. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to win the game ball into the big winning opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a elapses.

(4) A configuration may be adopted in which the count number is changed during the round game. In this case, a count number increase lottery process for determining whether or not to increase the count number during the round game may be performed. If an increase win is made in the count number increase lottery process, the count number is changed. According to this configuration, since there is a possibility that the count number will increase during the round game, it is possible for the player to play the game while expecting the count number to increase during the round game.

(5) A configuration may be adopted in which the count number of round games is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, a display area for displaying the count number is provided in the upper center of the display screen G, and the count number of the round game is displayed in the display area at the start of the round game. Also, every time a prize is won in the big prize opening 222a, the remaining count number is displayed in the display area. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the remaining count number by visually recognizing the display area. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining count number in a situation where the count number of loud games is large.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
The configuration of whether to continue the round game is different from that of the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Configuration of Variable Winning Device 222>
First, the configuration of the variable winning device 222 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device 222 cut vertically so that the count hole 222l and the count passage portion 400 in the fourteenth embodiment are cross sections, and FIG. 78(b) is continued. It is a longitudinal sectional view of the variable winning device 222 cut in the vertical direction so that the hole 222m and the continuation passage portion 401 are in the cross section, and FIG. FIG. 78(d) is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining a state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the hole 222m side, and FIG. 78(d) shows the movable member 392 toward the count hole 222l side with the opening/closing door 222b and the front wall portion 222h removed. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for explaining the tilted state.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b), the variable winning device 222 is formed in a box shape, and includes a bottom plate portion 222e, a rear wall portion 222f, a ceiling plate portion 222g, a front wall portion 222h, and a partition plate. A portion 222i, a left side wall portion 222j, and a right side wall portion 222k are integrally formed.

The variable winning device 222 includes the bottom plate portion 222e, the rear wall portion 222f, the ceiling plate portion 222g, the front wall portion 222h, the partition plate portion 222i, the left wall portion 222j, and the right wall portion. 222k and has a predetermined internal space surrounded by 222k, and the internal space is divided into front and rear halves by the partition plate portion 222i.

The partition plate portion 222i is provided with two holes 222l and 222m passing through the partition plate portion 222i in the front-rear direction. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 78(c) and (d), a count hole 222l is provided on the left side of the partition plate portion 222i when viewed from the front, and a continuous hole 222m is provided on the right side of the partition plate portion 222i. is provided. The count hole 222l and the continuous hole 222m have the same shape and size. Since the width and height of the count hole 222l and the continuous hole 222m are larger than the diameter of the game ball 160, the game ball 160 can enter the count hole 222l and the continuous hole 222m.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b), in the internal space provided in front of the partition plate portion 222i, the game ball 160 that has won the big prize opening 222a is placed in the count hole 222l and the continuation hole 222m. A seesaw 390 is provided for sorting to and from.

As shown in FIGS. 78(c) and 78(d), the seesaw 390 includes a support 391 and a movable member 392. As shown in FIGS. The post 391 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is provided on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 222e.

A movable member 392 is provided at the central upper portion of the support column 391 . The movable member 392 is formed of a member elongated in the width direction of the big prize winning opening 222a. In addition, the upper surface of the movable member 392 is inclined downward toward the count hole 2221l and the continuous hole 222m with respect to the depth direction of the big prize winning opening 222a.

The horizontal width of the movable member 392 is shorter than the horizontal width of the big winning opening 222a. Also, the width of the gap between the longitudinal ends of the movable member 392 and the left side wall portion 222j and the right side wall portion 222k is shorter than the radius of the game ball 160. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball 160 does not drop from the gap between the longitudinal ends of the movable member 392 and the left side wall portion 222j and the right side wall portion 222k.

Further, the depth of the movable member 392 is shorter than the length from the front wall portion 222h to the partition plate portion 222i. In addition, the width of the gap between both ends of the movable member 392 in the width direction and the front wall portion 222 h and the partition plate portion 222 i is shorter than the radius of the game ball 160 . Therefore, the game ball 160 does not drop from the gap formed between both ends of the movable member 392 in the width direction and the front wall portion 222h and the partition plate portion 222i.

As described above, the upper surface of the movable member 392 slopes downward toward the count hole 222l and the continuous hole 222m. In addition, as described above, the game ball 160 falls from the gap between both ends of the movable member 392 in the longitudinal direction and the left side wall portion 222j and the right side wall portion 222k. The game ball 160 does not drop from the gap between both ends and the front wall portion 222h and the partition plate portion 222i. As a result, the game ball 160 released onto the movable member 392 can win either the count hole 222l or the continuous hole 222m.

A rotating shaft 393 for rotating the movable member 392 is provided near the center of the vertical width of the movable member 392 . The rotating shaft 393 is provided along the depth direction of the big winning opening 222a. The rotating shaft 393 is rotatably supported by a bearing 394 provided at the upper central portion of the support 391 .

A rotary motor 395 as a drive source for rotating the rotary shaft 393 is provided at a position adjacent to the rotary shaft 393 . A driving signal is transmitted from the main controller 260 to the rotary motor 395 , so that the rotational force of the rotary motor 395 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 393 .

The movable member 392 is driven by a rotary motor 395 coupled to the rotary shaft 393, and after tilting to the right as shown in FIG. 78(c), is controlled to tilt to the left as shown in FIG. 78(d). After that, it operates so as to tilt alternately as shown in FIG. 78(c)→FIG. 78(d)→FIG. 78(c)→FIG. 78(d). Further, the inclination angle of the movable member 392 is approximately 5 degrees from the horizontal state.

Here, the height from the left end of the movable member 392 to the bottom plate portion 222e when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right is lower than the height of the front wall portion 222h. Further, the height from the right end of the movable member 392 to the bottom plate portion 222e in the situation where the movable member 392 is tilted to the left is lower than the height of the front wall portion 222h. A large winning opening 222a is provided above the front wall portion 222h. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball 160 released onto the movable member 392 from rolling forward beyond the big winning opening 222a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78(c), when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, the configuration is such that the game ball 160 is likely to enter the continuation hole 222m. Further, even when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, the count hole 222l is not completely blocked by the movable member 392. There is a possibility that the game ball 160 wins. Specifically, when the game ball 160 that has won the big prize opening 222a rolls toward the count hole 222l at a speed that is not affected by the right tilt, even in the situation where the movable member 392 tilts to the right, There is a possibility that the game ball 160 will enter the count hole 222l.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78(d), when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the configuration is such that the game ball 160 is likely to enter the count hole 222l. Further, even when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the continuous hole 222m is not completely blocked by the movable member 392. Therefore, even when the movable member 392 is tilted leftward, the continuous hole 222m is There is a possibility that the game ball 160 wins. Specifically, when the game ball 160 that has won the big prize opening 222a rolls toward the continuation hole 222m at a speed that is not affected by the left tilt, even in the situation where the movable member 392 tilts left, There is a possibility that the game ball 160 will enter the continuous hole 222m.

A game ball 160 that has won one of the holes 222l and 222m provided in the partition plate portion 222i is discharged into the internal space provided behind the partition plate portion 222i. The game ball 160 released into the internal space falls into the counting passage portion 400 or the continuation passage portion 401 that vertically penetrates the bottom plate portion 222e. Specifically, the game ball 160 that has won the count hole 222l falls to the passage portion 400 for counting, and the game ball 160 that has won the continuation hole 222m falls to the passage portion 401 for continuation.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b), a sensor 400a having a substantially flat plate shape for detecting that the game ball 160 has passed in the middle of the passage portion 400 for counting and the passage portion 401 for continuation is provided. , 401a are provided. Specifically, a counting sensor 400 a is provided in the middle of the counting passage portion 400 , and a continuation sensor 401 a is provided in the middle of the continuation passage portion 401 .

Each of the sensors 400a and 401a is composed of a well-known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and converts changes in the magnetic field caused by the passage of the game ball 160 through the through holes 400c and 401c of the detection portions 400b and 401b into electrical signals. Convert and output. The sensors 400a and 401a are not limited to magnetic detection type proximity sensors, and may be arbitrary as long as they can detect the game ball 160. For example, photosensors and limit sensors may be used. . Sensors 400 a and 401 a output electrical signals to main controller 260 . Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the game ball 160 is not detected, and a HI level signal is output when the game ball 160 is detected. Note that the relationship between the output levels may be reversed. The MPU 262 of the main controller 260 can specify the holes 222l and 222m in which the game ball 160 has won by specifying the sensors 400a and 401a outputting the HI level signal.

The game balls 160 that have fallen into one of the passages 400 and 401 gather below the game board 210 via the collection passage 229a shown in FIG. As described above, there is a discharge passage below the game board 210, and the game balls 160 gathered under the game board 210 are discharged into the discharge passage through the collection passage 229a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game, and the winning number of the game balls 160 winning the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 is large. The more the player is selected, the higher the probability that the winning will be continued in the lottery process. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the joy that the game ball 160 has won in the big winning hole 222a and the anticipation that the game ball 160 will win in the continuation passage portion 401. Become.

Also, the more the game ball 160 shot by the player himself/herself wins the continuation passage part 401 provided in the variable prize winning device 222, the higher the probability of winning the continuation winning in the lottery process for whether or not to continue the round game. . According to this configuration, when the round game is continued, it is possible to provide the player with the joy of being continuously won by his ability.

Further, the game ball 160 falls into the continuation passage portion 401 by entering the continuation hole 222m provided in the partition plate portion 222i. Here, the continuous hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222 is visible to the player. In other words, the player can grasp the probability of continuous winning by grasping the number of game balls 160 winning the continuation hole 222m. Since it is possible to grasp the probability of continuous winning, it is possible to make the player happy and sad about the probability of continuous winning. Specifically, if the probability of continuous winning is high, the player is given a sense of security that the probability of continuous winning is high. It is possible to provide the player with such excitement.

Also, as described above, there is a possibility that the game ball 160 will enter either of the holes 222l and 222m regardless of the tilt direction of the movable member 392. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left (when the movable member 392 is tilted toward the count hole 222l), the game ball 160 enters only the count hole 222l. is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 cannot be expected to enter the continuation hole 222m. In that respect, according to this configuration, even if the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 may enter the continuous hole 222m, so the game ball 160 can enter the continuous hole 222m in any situation. It is possible to expect that.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition process executed at step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S4702 to determine whether or not it is the timing at which the variable display of the pattern in the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S4703 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of the jackpot results. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "10" in step S4704. In the subsequent step S4705, seesaw driving start processing is executed. Specifically, it starts outputting a drive signal to the rotary motor 395 so that the movable member 392 operates. As a result, the rotary shaft 393 rotates, and the movable member 392 moves left and right as shown in FIGS. 78(c) and (d).

After executing the processing of step S4705, the processing of steps S4706 and S4707 is executed. The processing of steps S4706 and S4707 is the same as the processing of steps S3515 and S3516.

On the other hand, if it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4701: YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S4608. The big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 222a is open. If the big winning opening 222a is not open, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in step S4802. By providing this process, it is possible to prevent the big winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the round discontinuation flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. The round discontinuation flag is a flag for specifying that continuation non-winning has been made in the lottery process of whether or not to continue the round game, which will be described later, in the MPU 262 . By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the large winning opening opening processing from being performed in a situation where the effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 231.例文帳に追加If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S4803, a large winning opening opening process is executed in step S4804. In the big winning opening opening process, the timer counter T is set to "6000", and the variable winning driving section 222c is driven and controlled so that the big winning opening 222a is in the open state. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the timer counter T is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 12 sec after "6000" is set in the timer counter T.

After executing the process of step S4804, the process of step S4805 is executed. The processing of step S4805 is the same as the processing of step S3605.

On the other hand, if the big winning opening 222a is open (step S4801: YES), it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in step S4806.

When negative determination is made in step S4806, it is determined whether or not the game ball 160 has won in the big winning opening 222a in step S4807. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a HI level signal is received from the count sensor 400a or the continuation sensor 401a. When the game ball 160 has not won the big winning hole 222a, the main winning hole opening/closing process is terminated.

Here, the read processing executed in step S3001 of the timer interrupt processing of MPU 262 (FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the read processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, the processing of steps S4901 to S4904 is the same as the processing of steps S4401 to S4404.

If a negative determination is made in step S4903, or if the process of step S4904 is executed, it is determined in step S4905 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the counting sensor 400a. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4905, 1 is added to the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4906.

If a negative determination is made in step S4905, or if the process of step S4906 is executed, it is determined in step S4907 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the continuation sensor 401a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, 1 is added to the 15 ball counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4908, and the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is increased. Add 1. The continuation lottery counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls 160 that have won the continuation hole 222m by the MPU 262 .

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 80), if the determination in step S4807 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4808. In the following step S4809, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is "0".

If the determination in step S4806 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S4809 is affirmative, the processing of steps S4810 to S4811 is executed. The processing of steps S4810 to S4811 is the same as the processing of steps S3610 to S3611.

After executing the process of step S4811, the values of the continuous lottery counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are grasped in step S4812. In subsequent step S4813, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuous lottery counter is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. FIG. The continuation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery table, the result of continuous winning or non-winning is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the numerical range of the lottery counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. The lottery counter is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The lottery counter is used to specify the lottery result. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various continuation lottery tables.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the continuation lottery counter is "0", the probability of continuation winning is 1%, and when the continuation lottery counter is "1", the probability of continuation winning is 10%. When the continuation lottery counter is "2", the probability of continuation winning is 20%, and when the continuation lottery counter is "3", the probability of continuation winning is 30%. If the continuation lottery counter is "4", the probability of winning the continuation lottery is 40%. is "6", the probability of being continuously selected is 60%, and when the continuous lottery counter is "7", the probability of being continuously selected is 70%, and the continuous lottery counter is "8". In the case of , the probability of continuous winning is 80%, and if the continuous lottery counter is "9", the probability of continuous winning is 90%. There is a 99% chance that you will continue to be elected.

It is set such that the larger the value of the counter for continuous lottery, the higher the probability of winning the continuous lottery. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the number of winning game balls 160 in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 is large.

Further, when the counter for continuous lottery is "0", the probability of continuous winning is set to 1%. Here, in the case where the probability of winning the continuous winning is set to 0% when the counter for continuous lottery is "0", not even one game ball 160 wins the continuous hole 222m. is specified by the player, the player will know that the round game will not continue. In this case, the player cannot be attracted to whether or not the round game will continue. In this respect, according to the present configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous lottery will be won even when the continuous lottery counter is "0". With this configuration, even in a situation where the continuation lottery counter is "0", it is possible to attract the player whether or not the round game should be continued.

Further, when the continuous lottery counter is "10" or more, the probability of continuous winning is set to 99%. Here, in the case where the probability of winning the continuation lottery is set to 100% when the continuation lottery counter is "10" or more, it is determined that 10 game balls 160 have won the continuation hole 222m. At the stage specified by the player, the player understands that the round game will continue. In this case, the player cannot be attracted to whether or not the round game will continue. In this respect, according to the present configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous lottery will not be won even when the continuous lottery counter is "10" or more. With this configuration, even in a situation where the continuation lottery counter is "10" or more, it is possible to attract the player whether the round game is to be continued or not.

Further, as described above, according to the present embodiment, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds. As described above, in a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball 160 is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, the game ball 160 rolling around the big winning opening 222a wins the big winning opening 222a in the positional relationship between the big winning opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning opening 222a. The percentage is approximately 50%. In other words, unless the shooting handle 28 is operated continuously for 12 seconds, which is the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a, the possibility that the continuous lottery counter becomes "10" or more is low. Since the player wants to refer to the lottery table with the highest probability of winning continuously, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to operate the shooting handle 28 until the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a elapses. According to this configuration, the opening duration time of the big winning hole 222a is set to 12 sec, so that the player is allowed to enter the game ball 160 into the big winning hole 222a until the opening duration time of the big winning hole 222a elapses. It is possible to make you feel like you want to.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 80), after executing the process of step S4813, the lottery process is executed in step S4814. Specifically, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec) is read from the RAM 264 , and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the continuous lottery table read into the RAM 264 .

If the round continues to be won (step S4815: YES), in step S4816, "10" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, The timer counter T is set to "500", and the continuous lottery counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are cleared to "0".

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4815, a round discontinuation flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4817. The round discontinuation flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the round has been discontinued in the lottery process executed in step S4814.

After executing the processing of step S4817, the processing of steps S4818 and S4819 is executed. The processing of steps S4818 and S4819 is the same as the processing of steps S3617 and S3618.

After executing the process of step S4819, the continuous lottery counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are cleared to "0" in step S4820. After that, in step S4821, seesaw driving end processing is executed. Specifically, in order to stop the operation of the movable member 392, the output of the drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is stopped.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S4708, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not the timer counter T is "0". When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. By providing this processing, it is possible to prevent the processing from step S4711 to step S4712 from being executed in a situation where the big winning opening 222a is in an open state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4710 whether or not the round discontinuation flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. By providing this processing, it is possible to prevent the processing from step S4711 to step S4712 from being performed in a situation where the round discontinuation flag is not set in the RAM 264. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4710, the processing of steps S4711 and S4712 is executed. The processing of steps S4711 and S4712 is the same as the processing of steps S3520 and S3521. In addition, in this embodiment, there are only two types of jackpot results, the normal jackpot result and the probability variable jackpot result. The stored flag of the jackpot flag or the variable probability jackpot flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that causes the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result. The variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot result. In addition, the round discontinuation flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode executed in step S4712.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed, and the winning number of the game balls 160 winning the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 is large. The more the player is selected, the higher the probability that the winning will be continued in the lottery process. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the joy that the game ball 160 has won in the big winning hole 222a and the anticipation that the game ball 160 will win in the continuation passage portion 401. Become.

Also, the more the game ball 160 shot by the player himself/herself wins the continuation passage part 401 provided in the variable prize winning device 222, the higher the probability of winning the continuation winning in the lottery process for whether or not to continue the round game. . According to this configuration, when the round game is continued, it is possible to provide the player with the joy of being continuously won by his ability.

Further, the game ball 160 falls into the continuation passage portion 401 by entering the continuation hole 222m provided in the partition plate portion 222i. Here, the continuous hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222 is visible to the player. In other words, the player can grasp the probability of continuous winning by grasping the number of game balls 160 winning the continuation hole 222m. Since it is possible to grasp the probability of continuous winning, it is possible to make the player happy and sad about the probability of continuous winning. Specifically, if the probability of continuous winning is high, the player is given a sense of security that the probability of continuous winning is high. It is possible to provide the player with such excitement.

In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball 160 will win in either of the holes 222l and 222m regardless of the tilt direction of the movable member 392. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left (when the movable member 392 is tilted toward the count hole 222l), the game ball 160 enters only the count hole 222l. is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 cannot be expected to enter the continuation hole 222m. In that respect, according to this configuration, even if the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 may enter the continuous hole 222m, so the game ball 160 can enter the continuous hole 222m in any situation. It is possible to expect that.

Also, even when there is no winning number to the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 (when the continuation lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0"), the round game A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue. Here, in the case where the probability of winning the continuous winning is set to 0% when the counter for continuous lottery is "0", not even one game ball 160 wins the continuous hole 222m. is specified by the player, the player will know that the round game will not continue. In this case, the player cannot be attracted to whether or not the round game will continue. In this respect, according to this configuration, even when the continuation lottery counter is "0", there is a possibility that the round game will continue. As a result, even in a situation where the continuation lottery counter is "0", it is possible to attract the player whether or not the round game should be continued.

Further, when the continuous lottery counter is "10" or more, the probability of continuous winning is set to 99%. Here, in the case where the probability of winning the continuation lottery is set to 100% when the continuation lottery counter is "10" or more, it is determined that 10 game balls 160 have won the continuation hole 222m. At the stage specified by the player, the player understands that the round game will continue. In this case, the player cannot be attracted to whether or not the round game will continue. In this respect, according to the present configuration, there is a possibility that the continuous lottery will not be won even when the continuous lottery counter is "10" or more. With this configuration, even in a situation where the continuation lottery counter is "10" or more, it is possible to attract the player whether the round game is to be continued or not.

<Another example of the fourteenth embodiment>
(1) The movable member 392 is not limited to a constant motion, and may be configured to move irregularly, for example. This makes it possible to draw more attention to the movable member 392 than when the movable member 392 makes a constant motion.

(2) The continuous winning probability is not limited to the configuration in which the value of the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 changes. continuation according to the ratio of the number of game balls 160 winning the continuation passage 401 to the total number of game balls 160 winning the passage 400 and the number of game balls 160 winning the continuation passage 401) A configuration in which the winning probability changes is also possible. In this case, the larger the ratio, the higher the probability of continuous winning. Here, even if the shooting handle 28 is continuously operated, the positional relationship between the large winning opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the large winning opening 222a may cause the winning to the large winning opening 222a. There is a possibility that the number will decrease. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the probability of continuous winning changes depending on the ratio of the total number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a and the number of winnings to the continuation path portion 401, winning to the large winning opening 222a is achieved. Even when the total number is small, it is possible to make the players expect to be continuously elected.

(3) When the number of wins to the continuation passage portion 401 exceeds 10, the round game may always be continued. By setting the number of winning prizes that confirms the continuation of the round game, the player can specify that the round game will be continued when the number of winning prizes in the continuation passage portion 401 exceeds 10. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the continuation of the round game.

(4) Even when the number of wins to the continuation passage 401 exceeds 10, the higher the number of wins to the continuation passage 401, the higher the continuation winning probability. In this case, lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game in a situation where the big winning opening 222a is in a closed state. According to this configuration, the higher the number of prizes won to the continuation passage 401, the higher the probability of continuation winning. becomes.

(5) Even if the game ball 160 does not win the continuation passage portion 401, it is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery processing is performed as to whether or not the round game is to be continued. If 160 is not won, the lottery process for determining whether to continue the round game may not be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling when the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401 .

(6) Even if the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 may not be subtracted. Further, in this configuration, when the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401, the game ball 160 may be paid out. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the advantage of the situation in which the game ball 160 has won the continuation passage portion 401 .

(7) A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed each time a prize is won in the continuation passage portion 401 . If the lottery process does not continue winning, the round game ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the round game is to be continued each time a prize is won in the continuation passage portion 401 . Further, in this configuration, the more consecutive winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 occur, the higher the probability of winning continuation in the lottery process for determining whether to continue the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 occur consecutively.

In addition, in the configuration in which a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game each time a winning to the continuation passage portion 401 occurs, the greater the total number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401, the more the lottery processing A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of being continuously elected increases. Specifically, when the total number of winning prizes to the continuation passage portion 401 is 1, the probability of winning continuation in the lottery process is 10%, and the total number of winning prizes to the continuation passage portion 401 is 2. In this case, the probability of being continuously won in the lottery process is 20%, and if the total number of winnings in the continuation path portion 401 is 3 or more, the probability of being continuously won in the lottery process is 30%. good too. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the total number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 is large.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed each time a plurality of prizes are won in the continuation passage portion 401 . According to this configuration, it is possible to raise interest in the number of prizes awarded to the continuation passage portion 401 . Further, in this configuration, the higher the number of times a plurality of prizes are won in the continuation passage portion 401, the higher the probability of winning a continuation win in the lottery process for whether or not to continue the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which a plurality of winnings occur in the continuation passage portion 401 frequently.

(8) Before the start of the round game, whether to perform lottery processing for determining whether or not to continue the round game based on the number of winning prizes in the continuation passage portion 401, or the above lottery processing based on the number of winning prizes in the counting passage portion 400 It may be configured such that the player selects whether to perform. Specifically, before the start of the round game, a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed based on the number of winning prizes to the continuation passage portion 401, or the number of winning prizes to the counting passage portion 400 is used for the round. A screen is displayed on the display screen G for selecting whether to carry out a lottery process to determine whether to continue the game. The player uses the selection button provided on the upper swelling portion 75 to select the target of the lottery process. According to this configuration, since the player himself/herself can select the object of the lottery process as to whether or not to continue the round game, when the round game continues, the round game continues by the player's own power. It is possible to give pleasure for what you have done. Further, when the round game is not continued, it is possible to convince the player that the round game is not continued.

(9) The structure for distributing the game balls that have won the big prize opening 222a to either the count hole 222l or the continuation hole 222m is not limited to the seesaw 390. Any configuration may be employed as long as it can be distributed to either the 222l or the continuous hole 222m. Specifically, for example, the variable winning device 222 may be provided with a cloon. The crun includes a continuation hole and a count hole, and may be configured such that a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game by winning a prize in the continuation hole. Further, in this case, the higher the number of winnings in the continuation hole, the higher the probability of continuation winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the number of winning prizes in the continuous holes is large.

(10) Variable winning device 222 is not provided with continuation hole 222m and continuation passage portion 401, lottery processing of whether or not to continue the round game according to the number of game balls 160 that have won the big winning opening 222a It is good also as a structure with which the probability of becoming a continuous winning differs in. Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the probability of winning continuation is differentiated in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401, the place where the continuation hole 222m is provided can be accurately determined. Otherwise, it is not possible to accurately grasp the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process. In this respect, according to the present configuration, it is possible to specify the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process for determining whether to continue the round game, simply by specifying the number of winnings to the big winning hole 222a. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process.

In addition, the variable winning device 222 is not provided with the continuation hole 222m and the continuation passage portion 401, and in the lottery process of whether or not to continue the round game according to the number of the game balls 160 that have won the big winning opening 222a In the configuration in which the probability of winning continuously is different, the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process may be increased as the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is large.

(11) A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of continuation winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is different according to the total number of prizes won in the continuation passage portion 401 in a plurality of round games. In this case, unless the total number of winning prizes to the continuation path portion 401 is constantly grasped, the probability of continuation winning cannot be specified in the lottery process. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the total number of winning prizes to the continuation passage portion 401 . In addition, in a configuration in which the probability of winning continuation is different in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the total number of winning prizes of the continuation passage portion 401 in a plurality of round games, the continuation passage portion 401 wins a prize. A configuration may be adopted in which the greater the total number of items, the higher the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the total number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 is large.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
The configuration of whether or not to continue the round game is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed at step S3104 in the normal processing (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the fifteenth embodiment.

First, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S5002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display section 233 of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S5003 whether or not the game result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of the jackpot results. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in step S5004 the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "10" and "10" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC.

If the count hole control flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5005, the count hole control flag is cleared to "0". The count hole control flag is a flag for specifying in MPU 262 that movable member 392 is tilted to the left.

In the subsequent step S5006, the seesaw 390 is driven and controlled so as to facilitate winning of the continuous hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222. Specifically, the output of the first drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 tilts to the right. In this embodiment, the time required for the movable member 392 to tilt from right to left and the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from left to right are set to approximately 0.5 sec. Also, in a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. That is, there is a possibility that the next big winning opening 222a will be won 0.6 seconds after the current winning to the big winning opening 222a. Here, if the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from the right to the left and the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from the left to the right are set longer than 0.5 sec, In a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, there is a possibility that the winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs while the movable member 392 is tilting in the tilting direction corresponding to the number of winning winning to the big winning opening 222a. have a nature. In this respect, according to this configuration, the time required for the movable member 392 to tilt from the right to the left and the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from the left to the right are set to 0.5 sec. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a prize in the large winning opening 222a while the movable member 392 is tilted in the tilt direction corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the large winning opening 222a. Also, even if the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the count hole 222l.

In step S5007, a continuation hole control flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. The continuation hole control flag is a flag for specifying in MPU 262 that movable member 392 is tilted to the right.

The processing of subsequent steps S5008 and S5009 is the same as the processing of steps S4706 and S4707.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (step S5001: YES), the process proceeds to step S5010. In step S5010, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, the processing of steps S5101 and S5102 is the same as the processing of steps S4801 and S4802.

If the determination in step S5102 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264 . The ending flag is a flag for identifying that the MPU 262 has transmitted an ending command. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the large winning opening opening processing from being performed in a situation where the effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 231. .

After executing the processing of step S5103, the processing of steps S5104 and S5105 is executed. The processing of steps S5104 and S5105 is the same as the processing of steps S4804 and S4805.

If it is determined that the big winning opening 222a is open (step S5101: YES), it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in step S5106.

If a negative determination is made in step S5106, it is determined in step S5107 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 222a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a HI level signal is received from the count sensor 400a or the continuation sensor 401a. If no game ball has entered the big winning hole 222a, the big winning hole opening/closing process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, 1 is subtracted from the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5108. In the following step S5109, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S5109, a large winning opening control process is executed in step S5110. The big winning opening control process will be described with reference to FIG. The big winning opening control process is a process for controlling the seesaw 390 provided in the variable winning device 222 . FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening control process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S5201, when the round counter RC is "10" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "9" or less, the round counter RC is "9" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "8" or less, the round counter RC is "8" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "7" or less, the round counter RC is "7" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "6" or less, the round counter RC is "6" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "5" or less, the round counter RC is "5" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "4" or less, the round counter RC is "4" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "3" or less, the round counter RC is "3" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "2" or less, the round counter RC is "2" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "1", or the round counter RC is "1". judge.

In this embodiment, the inclination direction of the movable member 392 is different according to the number of rounds and the number of counts. The tilting direction of the movable member 392 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the tilting direction of the movable member 392 according to the number of rounds and the number of counts.

First, when the number of rounds is 1R (the round counter RC is "10"), and the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a is 0 (the winning upper limit counter PC is "10"), the movable member 392 tilts to the right (movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 1 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is "9" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left (movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 1R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is one.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 2R (the round counter RC is "9"), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 1 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "9" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 2 or more (the maximum prize counter PC is "8" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 2R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is two times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 3R (the round counter RC is "8"), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 2 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "8" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes to be won in the big prize opening 222a is 3 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is "7" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 3R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is three times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 4R (the round counter RC is "7"), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 3 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "7" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes to be won in the big prize opening 222a is 4 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is "6" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 4R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is four times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 5R (the round counter RC is "6"), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 4 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "6" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes to be won in the big prize opening 222a is 5 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is "5" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). If the number of rounds is 5R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is five times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 6R (the round counter RC is "5") and the number of prizes to be won in the big prize opening 222a is 5 or less (the prize upper limit counter PC is "5" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes to be won in the big prize opening 222a is 6 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is "4" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 6R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is six times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 7R (the round counter RC is "4"), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 6 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "4" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes to be won in the big prize opening 222a is 7 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is "3" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 7R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is seven times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 8R (the round counter RC is "3"), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 7 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "3" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of winning prizes in the large winning prize opening 222a is 8 or more (the maximum winning counter PC is "2" or less), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 8R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is eight times.

In addition, when the number of rounds is 9R (the round counter RC is "2") and the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 8 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is "2" or more), the movable member 392 tilts to the right. (the state in which the movable member 392 is tilted toward the continuous hole 222m), and when the number of prizes to be won in the big prize-winning port 222a is nine (the prize-winning upper limit counter PC is "1"), the movable member 392 is tilted to the left (the movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l). When the number of rounds is 9R, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right is nine times. Further, when the number of rounds is 10R (the round counter RC is "1"), the round game does not continue to the next round game, so the movable member 392 always tilts to the left.

According to this configuration, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right increases as the number of rounds progresses. Therefore, as the round game progresses, the possibility of the game ball winning the continuation hole 222m increases. Therefore, as the round game progresses, it becomes easier to continue the round game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage in a situation where the number of times the round game continues is large.

In addition, instead of generating a plurality of periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right across periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the left, periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right are collectively generated. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, the game ball can be expected to enter the continuous hole 222m more than when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left. A player feels frustrated when a slope occurs. In this configuration, since the number of times the movable member 392 tilts from right to left tilts once, a period in which the movable member 392 tilts rightward is generated multiple times with a period in which the movable member 392 tilts leftward. Compared to the configuration, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts from the right tilt to the left tilt is small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's frustration from increasing.

In addition, instead of generating a plurality of periods during which the movable member 392 tilts to the right across periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the left, periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right are collectively generated. Therefore, a state in which the game ball is likely to win the continuation hole 222m is continuously generated. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, it cannot be expected that the game ball wins the continuation hole 222m. Therefore, every time the movable member 392 shifts from the right tilt to the left tilt, the feeling of expecting the game ball to enter the continuation hole 222m weakens. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right are concentrated, so it is possible to maintain a state of heightened expectation for the winning of the continuation hole 222m for a long period of time. This makes it possible to enhance the excitement of the player.

Further, the state in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right continuously occurs from the state in which the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 0. Here, the player decides to continue the round game at an early stage, and hopes to play the rest of the round game with peace of mind. According to this configuration, the state in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right continuously occurs from the state in which the number of prizes to the big prize winning opening 222a is zero. Therefore, in a situation where the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is small, there is a high possibility that a winning to the continuous hole 222m will occur. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the players.

Moreover, when the number of rounds is 10R, the directions of all the movable members 392 are set to tilt leftward. Since the upper limit of the number of rounds is set to 10R in this embodiment, the round game will not continue when the number of rounds is 10R. The movable member 392 is set to tilt to the right at least once in the round numbers 1R to 9R, and when the round numbers are 1R to 9R, there is a possibility that the round game will continue. Here, when the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of rounds is 10R, the player may misunderstand that the round game may still continue. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the number of rounds is 10R, all the movable members 392 are set to tilt to the left, so they do not tilt to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the round game will not continue in the situation where the number of rounds is 10R.

If the determination in step S5201 is negative, it is determined in step S5202 whether or not the continuation hole control flag is set in the RAM 264 . The continuation hole control flag is a flag for specifying that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right in the MPU 262, as described above. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the main winning opening control process is terminated.

If the determination in step S5202 is negative, the count hole control flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0" in step S5203. In the following step S5204, the seesaw 390 is driven and controlled so that the game ball can easily enter the continuation hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222. Specifically, as described above, the output of the first drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 tilts to the right. In the subsequent step S5205, a continuation hole control flag is set in the RAM 264, and the main winning opening control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5201 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5206 whether or not the count hole control flag is set in the RAM 264 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the main winning opening control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5206, the continuation hole control flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0" in step S5207, and the game ball enters the count hole 222l provided in the variable winning device 222 in step S5208. The seesaw 390 is driven and controlled so as to be easy. Specifically, the output of the second drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 tilts to the left. Also, even if the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the continuation hole 222m. At the subsequent step S5209, the count hole control flag is set in the RAM 264, and the main winning hole control process is terminated.

Here, the read processing executed in step S3001 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 56) of MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the read processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, the processing of steps S5301 to S5304 is the same as the processing of steps S4401 to S4404.

If a negative determination is made in step S5303, or if the process of step S5304 is executed, it is determined in step S5305 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the count sensor 400a. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, 1 is added to the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5306.

If a negative determination is made in step S5305, or if the process of step S5306 is executed, it is determined in step S5307 whether or not a HI level signal has been received from the continuation sensor 401a. If a negative determination is made in step S5307, this read processing ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5307, it is determined in step S5308 whether or not the continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264. The continuation winning flag is a flag for specifying that the game ball has entered the continuation hole 222m in the current round game in the MPU 262 . If a negative determination is made in step S5308, a continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5309, and a counter for 15 prize balls provided in various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is incremented by one. In the present embodiment, when a prize is awarded to the continuation hole 222m, a prize is awarded to the continuation passage portion 401, and the continuation of the round game is determined. The continuation hole 222m is visible to the player. According to this configuration, by making the player visually recognize the moment when the round game is confirmed to continue, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of exhilaration.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5308, 1 is added to the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5310. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5308, the continued winning flag is not set in the RAM 264 in step S5310. Therefore, by providing step S5308, it is possible to prevent the continuous winning flag from being set again in the situation where the continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 84), if the process of step S5110 is executed, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the determination in step S5106 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S5109 is affirmative, the processing of steps S5111 and S5112 is executed. The processing of steps S5111 and S5112 is the same as the processing of steps S4810 and S4811.

After executing the processing of step S5112, 1 is subtracted from the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5113. In step S5114, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5114, it is determined in step S5115 whether or not continuous winning has been achieved in the current round game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264 .

If the determination in step S5115 is affirmative, in step S5116 the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "500", and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "10" is set, and the continuous winning flag set in the RAM 264 is erased.

If the determination in step S5114 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S5115 is negative, the processing of steps S5117 and S5118 is executed. The processing of steps S5117 and S5118 is the same as the processing of steps S4818 and S4819.

When the process of step S5118 is executed, an ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5119, and the main winning opening opening/closing process ends. The ending flag is a flag for identifying that the MPU 262 has transmitted an ending command, as described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 83), when the process of step S5010 is executed, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in step S5011. do. When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. By providing the processing, it becomes possible to prevent the processing of steps S5013 and S5014 from being executed in a situation where the big winning opening 222a is in an open state.

If the determination in step S5011 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5012 whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264 . If the ending flag is not set in the RAM 264, the game state transition processing is terminated. By providing this processing, it is possible to prevent the processing of steps S5013 and S5014 from being executed even though the opening/closing execution mode has not been notified on the display screen G. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5012, the processing of steps S5013 and S5014 is executed. The processing of steps S5013 and S5014 is the same as the processing of steps S4711 and S4712. Note that in the present embodiment, the ending flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode executed in step S5014.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts to the right increases as the number of rounds progresses. Therefore, as the round game progresses, the possibility of the game ball winning the continuation hole 222m increases. Therefore, as the round game progresses, it becomes easier to continue the round game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage in a situation where the number of times the round game continues is large.

In addition, instead of generating a plurality of periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right across periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the left, periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right are collectively generated. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, the game ball can be expected to enter the continuous hole 222m more than when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left. A player feels frustrated when a slope occurs. In this configuration, since the number of times the movable member 392 tilts from right to left tilts once, a period in which the movable member 392 tilts rightward is generated multiple times with a period in which the movable member 392 tilts leftward. Compared to the configuration, the number of times the movable member 392 tilts from the right tilt to the left tilt is small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's frustration from increasing.

In addition, instead of generating a plurality of periods during which the movable member 392 tilts to the right across periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the left, periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right are collectively generated. Therefore, a state in which the game ball is likely to win the continuation hole 222m is continuously generated. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, it cannot be expected that the game ball wins the continuation hole 222m. Therefore, every time the movable member 392 shifts from the right tilt to the left tilt, the feeling of expecting the game ball to enter the continuation hole 222m weakens. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the periods in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right are concentrated, so it is possible to maintain a state of heightened expectation for the winning of the continuation hole 222m for a long period of time. This makes it possible to enhance the excitement of the player.

Further, the state in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right continuously occurs from the state in which the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 0. Here, the player decides to continue the round game at an early stage, and hopes to play the rest of the round game with peace of mind. According to this configuration, the state in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right continuously occurs from the state in which the number of prizes to the big prize winning opening 222a is zero. Therefore, in a situation where the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is small, there is a high possibility that a winning to the continuous hole 222m will occur. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the players.

Moreover, when the number of rounds is 10R, the directions of all the movable members 392 are set to tilt leftward. Since the upper limit of the number of rounds is set to 10R in this embodiment, the round game will not continue when the number of rounds is 10R. The movable member 392 is set to tilt to the right at least once in the round numbers 1R to 9R, and when the round numbers are 1R to 9R, there is a possibility that the round game will continue. Here, when the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of rounds is 10R, the player may misunderstand that the round game may still continue. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the number of rounds is 10R, all the movable members 392 are set to tilt to the left, so they do not tilt to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the round game will not continue in the situation where the number of rounds is 10R.

Further, the time required for the movable member 392 to tilt from the right to the left and the time for the movable member 392 to tilt to the right from the left are set to approximately 0.5 sec. Also, in a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. That is, there is a possibility that the next big winning opening 222a will be won 0.6 seconds after the current winning to the big winning opening 222a. Here, if the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from the right to the left and the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from the left to the right are set longer than 0.5 sec, In a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, there is a possibility that the winning to the big winning opening 222a occurs while the movable member 392 is tilting in the tilting direction corresponding to the number of winning winning to the big winning opening 222a. have a nature. In this respect, according to this configuration, the time required for the movable member 392 to tilt from the right to the left and the time for the movable member 392 to tilt from the left to the right are set to 0.5 sec. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a prize in the large winning opening 222a while the movable member 392 is tilted in the tilt direction corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the large winning opening 222a.

In addition, the variable winning device 222 is provided with a counting hole 222l and a continuous hole 222m, and when a winning in the continuous hole 222m occurs, a winning in the continuation passage portion 401 occurs, and the round game is started. Confirm to continue. The continuation hole 222m is visible to the player. According to this configuration, by making the player visually recognize the moment when the round game is confirmed to continue, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of exhilaration.

<Another example of the fifteenth embodiment>
(1) The tilt angle of the movable member 392 may not be constant. Specifically, as the round game progresses, the inclination angle of the movable member 392 may be steeper with respect to the continuous hole 222m. With this configuration, the probability that the game ball wins the continuation hole 222m increases as the round game progresses. Therefore, every time the round game continues, it is possible to expect that the round game will continue.

(2) Depending on the type of the jackpot result, the number of prizes to be won to the big prize opening 222a that triggers the change of the movable member 392 from the right tilt to the left tilt in each round game may be different. In this case, the variable probability jackpot result may have a greater number of prizes to be won into the big prize opening 222a that triggers the change of the movable member 392 from the right tilt to the left tilt than the normal jackpot result. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of being a result of the probability variable jackpot.

(3) When a plurality of game balls win in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222, not only the round game is continued but also another specification may be given. Specifically, for example, in the next round game, the movable member 392 may tilt from right to left, and the number of winning prizes may increase. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which a plurality of game balls have entered the continuation passage portion 401 .

(4) In a situation where the actual number of prizes to the big prize winning port 222a does not reach the number of prizes to the big prize winning port 222a that triggers the change of the movable member 392 from the right tilt to the left tilt, the variable prize winning device 222 When a winning to the provided continuation passage portion 401 occurs, the movable member 392 may be configured to change from the right tilt to the left tilt. According to this configuration, in a situation where the actual number of winning prizes to the large winning prize opening 222a does not reach the number of winning prizes to the large winning prize opening 222a that triggers the change of the movable member 392 from the right tilt to the left tilt, the movable member If 392 is tilted left, the round will continue. As a result, it is possible to specify whether or not the round game is to be continued not only by the fact that the winning to the continuation hole 222m occurs, but also by specifying the inclination direction of the movable member 392 .

(5) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the round game continues by winning the game ball in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222. For example, the continuation passage provided in the variable winning device 222 Each time a game ball wins the portion 401, a lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not the next round game should be played. According to this configuration, even if a prize is won in the continuation passage portion 401, the round game does not necessarily continue. It is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not it will be. Further, in this configuration, a privilege may be awarded to the player when a prize is awarded to the continuation passage portion 401 in a situation in which the lottery process continues to win. Specifically, for example, in the next round game, the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a that triggers the change of the movable member 392 from the right tilt to the left tilt may be increased. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation in which the game ball 160 wins in the continuation passage portion 401 in the situation in which the lottery process continues to win.

In addition, in the configuration in which lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not the next round game is to be played each time a game ball wins in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable prize winning device 222, the total number of prizes won in the continuation passage portion 401 is determined. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning continuously in the above lottery processing increases as the number of winnings increases. Specifically, when the total number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 in one round game is 1, the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process is 10%, and the total number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 10%. If there are 2, the probability of being continuously won in the lottery process is 20%, and if the total number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 3 or more, the probability of being continuously won in the lottery process is 30%. A certain configuration may be used. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the total number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 is large.

(6) In a situation where the number of winnings to the big winnings opening 222a is more than 0, the movable member 392 may continuously tilt to the right. Specifically, in 1R, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 9, so that the movable member 392 tilts to the right, and in 2R, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 8 or more. The movable member 392 tilts to the right, and in 3R, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 7 or more, so the movable member 392 tilts to the right, and in 4R, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 6 or more. As a result, the movable member 392 tilts to the right, and in 5R, the number of winning prizes to the large winning prize opening 222a becomes 5 or more, so the movable member 392 tilts to the right, and in 6R, the number of winning prizes to the large winning prize opening 222a. is 4 or more, the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, and in 7R, the movable member 392 is tilted to the right when the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 3 or more, and in 8R, the movable member 392 is tilted to the right. The movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of winning prizes in 9R becomes two or more. good. According to this configuration, the winning to the continuous hole 222m is delayed compared to the configuration in which the state in which the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is 0 and the state in which the movable member 392 tilts to the right continuously occurs. Probability is high. As a result, it is possible to make the player excited for a long period of time as to whether or not the round game will continue.

(7) A lottery process may be performed to determine the direction in which the movable member 392 tilts each time a game ball wins the counting passage portion 400 and the continuation passage portion 401 . According to this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the tilting direction of the movable member 392 is determined according to the number of prizes entered into the big prize winning opening 222a, it is possible to increase the attention to the tilting direction of the movable member 392. It becomes possible. Further, in this configuration, as the round game progresses, the probability that the movable member 392 tilts to the right may increase in the lottery process for determining the direction in which the movable member 392 tilts.

(8) Even if a game ball wins in the continuation passage portion 401, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 may not be decremented. Further, in this configuration, when a game ball enters the continuation passage portion 401, the game ball may be paid out. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation in which the game ball has entered the continuation passage portion 401 .

(9) Even when the number of rounds is 10R, the movable member 392 may be configured to tilt to the right. In this configuration, a special image may be displayed on the display screen G when a winning in the continuation passage portion 401 occurs. The special image is displayed on the display screen G only when the continuation passage portion 401 is won in the situation where the number of rounds is 10R. According to this configuration, even in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R, it is possible to expect that a prize will be awarded to the continuation passage portion 401 .

(10) It is not limited to the configuration in which the period during which the movable member 392 tilts to the right is collectively generated. It is good also as a structure generated multiple times. Specifically, the configuration may be as follows. In 1R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of winnings into the big winning opening 222a is 0, and the movable member 392 tilts to the left when the number of winnings is other than that. In 2R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 or 2, and tilts to the left when the number of prizes is other than that. In 3R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 0, 2, or 4, and the movable member 392 tilts to the left when the number of prizes is other than that. . In 4R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 0, 2, 4, or 6, and when the number of prizes is other than that, the movable member 392 tilts to the left. slope. In 5R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8. 392 is left tilt. In 6R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a is 0 to 2, 4, 6, and 8. 392 is left tilt. In 7R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a is 0 to 4, 6, or 8, and when the number of winning prizes is other than that, the movable member 392 tilts to the left. slope. In 8R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of prizes entered into the big prize opening 222a is 0 to 6 or 8, and when the number of prizes is other than that, the movable member 392 tilts to the left. . In 9R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a is 0 to 7 or 9, and when the number of winning prizes is other than that, the movable member 392 tilts to the left. . According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation of the movable member 392 instead of focusing only on whether or not the round game continues.

(11) The movable member 392 may be tilted to the left at the start of each round game, and tilted to the right when the number of prizes entered into the big winning opening 222a reaches a predetermined number. According to this configuration, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a will reach a predetermined number.

(12) A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the movable member 392 tilting to the right differs for each number of rounds. Specifically, a lottery table is provided in which the probability of the movable member 392 tilting to the right differs for each number of rounds. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that specifies the direction of movement. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to play while predicting the type of the current lottery table.

(13) The structure for distributing the game balls that have entered the big winning opening 222a to either the count hole 222l or the continuous hole 222m is not limited to the seesaw 390, and the game balls that have entered the big winning opening 222a are counted through the counting holes. Any configuration may be employed as long as it can be distributed to either the 222l or the continuous hole 222m. Specifically, for example, the variable winning device 222 may be provided with a cloon. The cloon includes a continuation hole and a count hole, and may be configured to continue the round game by winning a game ball in the continuation hole. Further, in this configuration, the easiness of winning a prize through the continuous hole may differ according to the number of winning prizes into the big prize opening 222a. In this case, the Kroon is configured so as not to rotate. Specifically, in 1R, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning hole 222a is 0, the above-mentioned cloon is inclined so that the game ball can easily enter the continuous hole, and in 2R, the number of winning prizes to the big winning hole 222a is 1 or less, the croon is inclined so that the game ball can easily enter the continuation hole. In 4R, when the number of winning prizes to the large winning opening 222a is 3 or less, the above-mentioned Krun is inclined so that the game ball can easily enter the continuation hole, and in 5R, the large winning opening When the number of winning prizes to 222a is 4 or less, the croon is inclined so that the game ball can easily enter the continuation hole. In 7R, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 6 or less, the above-mentioned croon is inclined so that the game ball can easily win in the continuation hole, and 8R In 9R, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning hole 222a is 7 or less, the clown is inclined so that the game ball can easily enter the continuation hole. In some cases, the croon may be tilted so that the game ball can easily enter the continuation hole, and in 10R, the cloon can be tilted so that the game ball can easily enter the count hole.

(14) It is not limited to the configuration in which the round game is continued by winning the game ball in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222. For example, whether or not the next round game is performed in each round game Such a lottery process may be performed, and the round game may be more likely to be continued as the number of winning prizes to the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable prize winning device 222 increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that the number of prizes to be won in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable prize winning device 222 will increase. Further, even when no prize is won in the continuation passage portion 401, a lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not the next round game is to be played. Here, if a lottery process for determining whether or not the next round game is to be played is not performed when no winning to the continuation passage portion 401 occurs, even one game ball wins the continuation hole 222m. If the player specifies that the round game did not occur, the player will understand that the round game will not continue. In this case, the player cannot be attracted to whether or not the round game will continue. In this respect, according to the present configuration, even if no prize is won in the continuation passage portion 401, the lottery processing for determining whether or not to play the next round game is performed. It is possible to attract the player whether or not the round game is continued even when no winning occurs.

Further, in a configuration in which a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to play the next round game in each round game, the lottery process continues to be won in accordance with the total number of prizes won in the continuation passage portion 401 in a plurality of round games. A configuration in which the probabilities are different may be adopted. In this case, unless the total number of winning prizes to the continuation path portion 401 is constantly grasped, the probability of continuation winning cannot be specified in the lottery process. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the total number of winning prizes to the continuation passage portion 401 . In addition, in a configuration in which the probability of winning continuation is different in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the total number of winning prizes of the continuation passage portion 401 in a plurality of round games, the continuation passage portion 401 wins a prize. A configuration may be adopted in which the greater the total number of items, the higher the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the total number of winnings to the continuation passage portion 401 is large.

(15) A predetermined area is provided in the variable winning device 222, and when a game ball enters the predetermined area, neither the winning of the upper limit number set in each round game nor the elapse of the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a The current round game may be ended even in a situation where no such situation has occurred.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The configuration of whether to continue the round game is different from that of the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed at step S3104 in the normal processing (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing game state transition processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the sixteenth embodiment.

First, the processing of steps S5401 to S5403 is the same as the processing of steps S3501 to S3503.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5403, "10" is set in the prize winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5404. After executing the process of step S5404, the processes of steps S5405 and S5406 are executed. The processing of steps S5405 and S5406 is the same as the processing of steps S3515 and S3516.

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S5401: YES), the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S5407. The big winning opening opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 .

First, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 222a is open. When the big winning opening 222a is not open, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in step S5502. By providing this process, it is possible to prevent the big winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not "0". If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the determination in step S5502 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5503 whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264 . The ending flag is a flag for identifying that the MPU 262 has transmitted an ending command. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the large winning opening opening processing from being performed in a situation where the effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 231. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5503, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S5503, a large winning opening opening process is executed in step S5504. In the big winning opening opening process, "6000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the variable winning drive section 222c controls driving so that the big winning opening 222a is in an open state. be done. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the timer counter T is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 12 sec after "6000" is set in the timer counter T.

Here, in a situation where the shooting handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big winning hole 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big winning hole 222a, the game ball rolling around the big winning hole 222a wins the big winning hole 222a. The percentage is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 222a during 12 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning hole 222a. In the present embodiment, the details will be described later, but when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is greater than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, the round game continues. It has become. Also, when the number of winnings to the big winnings opening 222a reaches 10, it is determined that the round game is continued. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to continuously perform the shooting operation for 12 seconds, which is the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

Further, when the open duration time of the big winning hole 222a is set to be longer than 12 seconds, the winning number of game balls to the big winning hole 222a becomes 10 with a high probability. In this case, since the round game continues with a high probability, it becomes impossible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the round game will continue. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds, it is assumed that the shooting operation is performed for 12 seconds, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. Also, the probability that the number of prizes to be won into the big prize opening 222a is 10 is not too high. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether the round game will continue or not.

After executing the process of step S5504, the process of step S5505 is executed. The processing of step S5505 is the same as the processing of step S3605.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5501 that the big winning opening 222a is open, the process proceeds to step S5506. In step S5506, by determining whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0", the opening continuation time (approximately 12 seconds) has elapsed for the opening of the current big winning opening 222a. determine whether or not If the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S5507.

In step S5507, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 222a. If no game ball has entered the big winning hole 222a, the big winning hole opening/closing process is terminated.

Here, the read processing executed in step S3001 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 56) of MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the read processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, the processing of steps S5601 to S5604 is the same as the processing of steps S4401 to S4404.

If a negative determination is made in step S5603, or if the process of step S5604 is executed, it is determined in step S5605 whether or not the variable winning device 222 has won a prize. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5605, 1 is added to the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5606. The 15 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a 15 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 15 game balls should be output. Each time the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 270, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter.

In the following step S5607, 1 is added to the number-of-wins counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. The winning number counter is for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in each round game.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 89), if the determination in step S5507 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5508. In the subsequent step S5509, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is "0".

If the determination in step S5506 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S5509 is affirmative, the processing of steps S5510 to S5511 is executed. The processing of steps S5510 to S5511 is the same as the processing of steps S3610 to S3611.

After the processing of step S5511 is executed, it is determined whether or not the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "10" or more in step S5512.

If a negative determination is made in step S5512, it is determined in step S5513 whether or not the numerical information of the winning number counter is greater than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area of the RAM 264 or not. The numerical information stored in the winning number storage area of the RAM 264 is the numerical information of the winning number counter in the previous round game.

According to this embodiment, the round game continues when the numerical information of the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is greater than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit for the fact that the number of prizes won in the big prize mouth 222a in the current round game is greater than the number of prizes won in the big prize mouth 222a in the previous round game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5512 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5513, numerical information is stored in the winning number storage area of the RAM 264 in step S5514. Specifically, the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is less than "10" and the numerical information of the winning number counter is greater than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264. In this case, or when the winning number counter is "10" or more, the numerical information of the winning number counter provided in the various counter area 264b of the RAM 264 is stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the open/close execution mode currently being executed ends, the winning number storage area is cleared to "0". Therefore, in the case of the first round game, the round game is continued by winning one or more game balls in the big winning hole 222a. Further, by executing the process of step S5514, it is possible to make a determination based on the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 222a in the current round game.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the number of prizes won in each round game is 10 or more, it is determined that the round game is continued. Therefore, by setting the number of winnings that determines the continuation of the round game, the player can specify that the round game will continue when the number of winnings in each round game reaches 10. becomes. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the continuation of the round game.

In the following step S5515, "500" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and "10" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, Winning number counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5513, the processes of steps S5516 and S5517 are executed. The processing of steps S5516 and S5517 is the same as the processing of steps S3617 and S3618.

After executing the processing of step S5517, an ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5518. The ending flag is a flag for identifying that the MPU 262 has transmitted an ending command.

In the subsequent step S5519, the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to "0", and the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 88), after the processing of step S5407 is executed, it is checked in step S5408 whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". judge. When the timer counter T is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. By providing this processing, it becomes possible to prevent the processing of steps S5410 to S5411 from being executed in a situation where the big winning opening 222a is in an open state.

If the determination in step S5408 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5409 whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. If the ending flag is not set in the RAM 264, the game state transition processing is terminated. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing of steps S5410 to S5411 from being executed even though the opening/closing execution mode is not notified on the display screen G. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5409, the processing of steps S5410 to S5411 is executed. The processing of steps S5410 to S5411 is the same as the processing of steps S3520 to S3521. In addition, in this embodiment, there are only two types of jackpot results: the normal jackpot result and the probability variable jackpot result. The set flag of the jackpot flag or probability variable jackpot flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that causes the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result. The variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time in the MPU 262 is the variable probability jackpot result. In addition, the ending flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode executed in step S5411.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to this embodiment, the round game continues when the numerical information of the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is greater than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264. As a result, the game can be played while expecting that the number of prizes won in the big prize hole 222a in the current round game will be larger than the number of prizes won in the big prize hole 222a in the previous round game.

In addition, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds. Here, if the open duration time of the big winning hole 222a is set to be longer than 12 seconds, the winning number of game balls to the big winning hole 222a will be 10 with a high probability. In this case, since the round game continues with a high probability, it becomes impossible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the round game will continue. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds, it is assumed that the shooting operation is performed for 12 seconds, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a. Also, the probability that the number of prizes to be won into the big prize opening 222a is 10 is not too high. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether the round game will continue or not.

Further, when the number of prizes won in each round game is 10 or more, it is determined that the round game is continued. Therefore, by setting the number of winnings that determines the continuation of the round game, the player can specify that the round game will continue when the number of winnings in each round game reaches 10. becomes. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the continuation of the round game.

<Another example of the sixteenth embodiment>
(1) When the number of prizes won to the big prize mouth 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of prizes won to the big prize mouth 222a in the previous round game, or the number of prizes won to the big prize mouth 222a in the current round game is smaller than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game. In this case, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game. is smaller than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process of whether to continue the round game may be higher. According to this configuration, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize port 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize port 222a in the previous round game, or to the big winning prize port 222a in the current round game Even when the number of winning prizes is smaller than the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, it is possible to make the player's heart beat as to whether or not the round game will continue.

(2) When the upper limit of the count number of each round game is the same, the time until the upper limit of the count number of the current round game is reached is greater than the time until the upper limit of the count number of the previous round game is reached. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the round game continues when the length is shorter or the same. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention not to the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a but to the time until the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a reaches the upper limit of the count number.

(3) It is not limited to the configuration in which the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is constant. For example, the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a may be shortened as the round game continues. As the round game continues, the open continuation time of the large winning opening 222a becomes shorter, which means that there is a high possibility that the number of winnings in the large winning opening 222a decreases as the round game progresses. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the round game from continuing for a long period of time.

In addition, as the round game continues, the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a may be lengthened. Since the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a is long, there is a high possibility that the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a increases as the round game progresses. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the round game from ending immediately.

(4) Even if the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is smaller than the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, when the standard number of game balls enter the big winning opening 222a. , It is good also as a structure which a round game continues. The reference number may be determined by lottery processing. According to this configuration, when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is the reference number, the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is higher than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game. Since the round game continues even if the number is small, it is possible to increase the attention of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a.

(5) When the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 10 or more, it is not limited to the configuration in which the continuation of the round game is confirmed. However, a lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game. According to this configuration, the condition for determining that the round game will continue is not set, so it is possible to make the player's heart beat as to whether the round game will continue or not.

(6) Depending on the type of jackpot result, the conditions for continuing the round game may be different. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the round game does not continue unless the number of prizes won to the big prize hole 222a in the current round game is larger than the number of prizes won to the big prize hole 222a in the previous round game. In the case of a probability variable jackpot result, if the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is equal to or more than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, the round game is continued. good too. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of the jackpot result being the probability variable jackpot result.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
The open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is different from that of the sixteenth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Grand Prize Opening Processing>
The special winning opening opening process executed at step S5504 in the special winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 89) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the seventeenth embodiment.

First, the number of rounds is grasped in step S5701. Specifically, the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is grasped. In the subsequent step S5702, the opening duration table read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 is referenced to specify the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a corresponding to the round counter RC grasped in step S5701. The open duration table will be described with reference to FIG. In the open duration table, the number of rounds and the numerical information of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the open duration table.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the case of the first R, "3000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. As shown in FIG. As described above, the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated to be decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, it is decremented by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes "0" about 6 sec after "3000" is set in the timer counter T. In the positional relationship between the large winning opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the large winning opening 222a, the percentage of the game balls rolling around the large winning opening 222a winning the large winning opening 222a is It is approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that 5.0 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 6 seconds, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

In the case of the 2nd R, "3500" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. The timer counter T becomes "0" about seven seconds after "3500" is set. In other words, it is expected that about 5.8 game balls enter the big winning hole 222a during the 7 sec that is the opening duration time of the big winning hole 222a.

In the case of the 3rd R, "4000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. About 8 seconds after "4000" is set in the timer counter T, it becomes "0". In other words, it is expected that about 6.7 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during the 8 sec that is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

In the case of the 4th R, "4500" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. About 9 seconds after "4500" is set in the timer counter T, it becomes "0". In other words, it is expected that 7.5 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 9 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

In the case of the 5th R, "5000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. About 10 seconds after "5000" is set in the timer counter T, it becomes "0". In other words, it is expected that about 8.3 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 10 seconds, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

In the case of the 6th R, "5500" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. About 11 seconds after "5500" is set in the timer counter T, it becomes "0". That is, it is expected that about 9.2 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 11 seconds, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

After the 7th R, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to "6000". About 12 seconds after "6000" is set in the timer counter T, it becomes "0". In other words, it is expected that 10.0 game balls enter the big winning opening 222a during 12 sec, which is the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a.

Since this embodiment is based on the 16th embodiment, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 222a in the current round game is greater than the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 222a in the previous round game. If there are many, the configuration is such that the round game continues. In this configuration, in the present embodiment, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to be longer as the round game progresses.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit number of winning prizes for the 1st round game is set to 5, the upper limit number of winning prizes for the 2nd round game is set to 6, and the number of winning prizes for the 3rd round game is set to 6. The upper limit number of winning prizes is set to 7, the upper limit number of winning prizes for the 4th round game is set to 8, and the upper limit number of winning prizes for the 5th round game is set to 9. , the upper limit number of wins in the round game after the 6th round is set to 10. As described above, the expected number of prizes to be awarded to the large winning opening 222a in the 1st round is 5.0, the expected number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a in the 2nd round is approximately 5.8, and the number of large winning openings to be awarded in the 3rd round is approximately 5.8. The number of expected winnings to the winning opening 222a is about 6.7, the expected number of winnings to the big winnings opening 222a in the 4th round is 7.5, and the expected number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the 5th round is The number is about 8.3, the number of expected winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the 6th round is about 9.2, and the expected winning number to the big winning opening 222a after the 7th round is 10.0. Here, when the upper limit number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a and the expected number of winnings are compared for each number of rounds, both are set to be substantially the same.

Returning to the description of the big winning opening opening process (FIG. 91), when the process of step S5702 is executed, the timer counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is used for the opening duration identified in step S5702 in step S5703. Set to T.

In the subsequent step S5704, release execution processing is executed. Specifically, the variable winning driving section 222c is driven and controlled so that the big winning opening 222a is in an open state. After that, the main prize winning opening opening process is ended.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, as the number of rounds progresses, the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a tends to become longer. As the opening duration time of the big winning hole 222a becomes longer, there is a high possibility that the winning number of game balls to the big winning hole 222a increases. That is, as the round game progresses, the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 222a is likely to be greater than the number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 222a in the previous round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit for the number of times the round game continues.

In addition, after the 7th round, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is set to be the same. Here, if the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is increased in proportion to the number of rounds after the 7th round, there is a possibility that the round game will not end. Further, when the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is shortened in proportion to the number of rounds after the 7th round, the frequency of ending the round game after the 7th round increases. . In this regard, according to this configuration, since the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a is the same after the 7th round, the round game ends more frequently after the 7th round. It is possible to prevent the storage and the continuation of the round game.

Also, the upper limit number of prizes to be won in each round game is set substantially equal to the expected number of prizes to be won in each round game. Therefore, by continuing the shooting operation over the opening duration time of the large winning opening 222a set in each round game, the winning number of game balls to the large winning opening 222a is the upper limit number of winning in each round game is likely to reach This makes it possible for the player to want the game ball to enter the big winning hole 222a until the opening continuation time of the big winning hole 222a elapses.

<Another example of the seventeenth embodiment>
(1) In a situation where the big winning opening 222a is closed, the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a in the next round game may be determined by lottery. In this case, as the round game progresses, a configuration may be adopted in which a longer open continuation time is likely to be selected in the lottery. According to this configuration, since the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is not set in advance, the player cannot grasp the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a. In other words, the player cannot specify the timing when the big winning opening 222a changes from the open state to the closed state. This makes it possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the big winning opening 222a changes from the open state to the closed state.

(2) When the number of prizes won to the big prize mouth 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of prizes won to the big prize mouth 222a in the previous round game, or the number of prizes won to the big prize mouth 222a in the current round game is smaller than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game. In this case, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game. is less than the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process of whether to continue the round game may be higher. According to this configuration, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize port 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize port 222a in the previous round game, or to the big winning prize port 222a in the current round game Even when the number of winning prizes is smaller than the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, it is possible to make the player's heart beat as to whether or not the round game will continue.

(3) As the round game progresses, the open duration time of the large winning prize port 222a is not limited to increasing by a certain amount of time. For example, the large winning prize port 222a opens as the round game progresses A configuration may be adopted in which the rate of increase in the duration time is increased. According to this configuration, compared to the configuration in which the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a increases by a constant time, the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game is larger than the number of winnings in the current round game. It is possible to increase the number of winning prizes to the mouth 222a.

In addition, according to the type of the jackpot result, the rate at which the open continuation time of the big winning opening 222a increases as the round game progresses may be different. In this case, the probability variable jackpot result may have a higher rate of increase in the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a than the normal jackpot result. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of the jackpot result being the probability variable jackpot result.

(4) The structure is not limited to the configuration in which the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is the same after the number of rounds is 7R. may be configured such that the opening duration of is longer. According to this configuration, as the round game progresses, the possibility that the number of actual winnings to the big winning opening 222a reaches the upper limit number of winnings of the round game increases. As a result, it is possible to secure the advantage in situations where the number of times the round game continues is large.

(5) When the number of actual winnings to the big winning opening 222a is larger than the expected winning number to the big winning opening 222a in each round game, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a in the next round game is set in advance. It may be configured to be longer than the specified time. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the number of actual winnings to the big winning opening 222a is larger than the expected number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in each round game.

(6) The opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is the same until the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, and when the number of rounds exceeds the predetermined number, the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a increases. It is good also as a structure which goes on. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player to the game by making the player want to reach the predetermined number of rounds at any cost.

(7) It may be configured such that the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a in each round game is different according to the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, an opening duration table is provided for each type of jackpot result. The open continuation time table is provided so that the number of rounds and the value to be set in the timer counter T correspond one-to-one. A value corresponding to the current number of rounds is set in the timer counter T by referring to an opening duration table provided for each jackpot result. In this configuration, when compared for each same round game, the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a may be longer in the probability variable jackpot result than in the normal jackpot result. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of the jackpot result being the probability variable jackpot result.

(8) The round game may be continued when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in each round game reaches the preset upper limit number in each round game. In this configuration, the upper limit number of each round game is determined by lottery while the open duration period of the big winning hole 222a is fixed, and the open continuation period of the big winning hole 222a is included in the upper limit number determined by the lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which an upper limit number is set such that winning of the upper limit number of round games does not occur even if the shooting operation is continued over a period of time. According to this configuration, in the lottery for determining the upper limit number of each round game, even if the firing operation is continued over the opening continuation period of the big winning opening 222a, the upper limit number of the round game does not occur. It is possible to play the game while expecting that it will not be selected.

Further, in the configuration in which the round game continues when the upper limit number of the round game is reached, the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a may be determined by lottery while the upper limit number of the round game is kept constant. According to this configuration, in the lottery for determining the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a, the game is played while expecting that the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a that generates the upper limit number of winnings of the round game will be selected. It becomes possible to

Further, in the configuration in which the round game continues when the upper limit number of the round game is reached, the upper limit number of the round game and the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a may be determined by lottery. According to this configuration, when the firing operation is continued over the opening duration time of the large winning prize port 222a determined in the lottery for determining the opening duration time of the large winning prize port 222a, the lottery for determining the upper limit number of round games It is possible to play the game while expecting that the upper limit number of prizes for the round game determined in . In addition, the combination of the upper limit number of round games and the open duration time of the big winning opening 222a can be diversified by determining the upper limit number of round games and the opening duration time of the big winning opening 222a by lottery. becomes possible.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
The type of the success/failure table referred to during the success/failure determination process is different from that of the ninth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Acceptability table>
First, the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table for the low-probability mode in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 93(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode. FIG. 93(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode, and FIG. 93(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode. .

As shown in FIG. 93(a), under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to, there are two random numbers that result in a big win. Also, as shown in FIG. 93(b), under the game state in which the success/failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to, there are 60 random numbers that result in a big win. The game state in which the success/failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to means that the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, and the number of times the game has been executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. is 20 times or less. The first variable probability mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous big winning result is the variable probability big winning result A in the MPU 262 . In the opening/closing execution mode transition process, when the type of the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the variable probability jackpot result A, the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 93(c), under the gaming state in which the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode is referred to, there are 40 random numbers that result in a big win. The game state in which the success/failure table B for the high probability mode is referred to means that the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, and the number of times the game has been executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. is 10 times or less. The second variable probability mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous big winning result is the variable probability big winning result B in the MPU 262 . In the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, when the type of the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the probability variable jackpot result B, the second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264 .

Here, when the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode are compared, the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode results in a larger hit than the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. There are many random number values that are Further, the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode is longer than the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. The success/failure table A for the high-probability mode is referred to only when the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(d), under the gaming state in which the success/failure table C for the high probability mode is referred to, there are 20 random numbers that result in a big win. The game state in which the success/failure table C for the high probability mode is referred to means that the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, and the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. is 21 times or more, or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, and the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 times or more.

According to the present embodiment, a plurality of success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode with different jackpot winning probabilities are set, and are referred to in the success/failure determination process according to the types of the probability variable jackpot results A and B. The success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode are different. As a result, it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to the current jackpot winning probability when the probability variable jackpot results A and B are obtained.

Further, there is provided a success/failure table C for the high-probability mode, which has fewer values of random numbers resulting in a big win than the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. As a result, it is possible to increase concentration on the game by making the player want to win the big win no matter what until the number of times the game is executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined number of times. Become.

Further, the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode has more random numbers that result in a big win than the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Therefore, the high-probability mode is a high-probability mode in which the jackpot-winning probability is higher than that of the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, even if the jackpot-winning is not achieved before the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined number. Since the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the above, it is possible to suppress frustration caused by the fact that the jackpot has not been won before reaching the predetermined number of times.

The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode. Also, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hit/fail table C for the high-probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hit/fail tables A and B for the high-probability mode. Also, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hit/fail table B for the high-probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hit/fail table A for the high-probability mode.

If the winning probability increases in the order of success/failure table A for low-probability mode, success/failure table C for high-probability mode, success/failure table B for high-probability mode, and success/failure table A for high-probability mode, the above-mentioned jackpot The number and value of the resulting random numbers are arbitrary, and the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode corresponds to the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode. A configuration in which only a part is included may be adopted, or a configuration in which the portion is not included. In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high-probability mode success/failure table C may include only a part of the jackpot random number counters C1 in the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode. A configuration that does not include the In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode may include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode, It is good also as a structure which is not included.

Next, the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. 93(e). FIG. 93(e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 93(e), a normal jackpot result, a probability variable jackpot result A, and a probability variable jackpot result B are set as allocation destinations of jackpot results. These jackpot results are assigned jackpot type counters C2 so as not to overlap each other. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 is "0 to 9", it is a normal jackpot result, and when the jackpot type counter C2 is "10 to 11", it is a probability variable jackpot result A, and the jackpot type counter C2 is " 12 to 29”, the probability variable jackpot result B is obtained.

In the case of the normal jackpot result in the win/fail determination process, the hit/fail determination process is performed with reference to the win/fail table for the low probability mode until the next jackpot is won, and when the probability variable jackpot result A is obtained, the next jackpot is won. The success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode until it becomes, and when the probability variable jackpot result B is obtained, the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode is referred to until the next jackpot is won. Judgment processing is performed.

According to the distribution table, the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 is set smaller for the probability variable jackpot result A than for the probability variable jackpot result B. That is, probability variable big winning result A is less likely to be selected than probability variable big winning result B. Here, as described above, when the high-probability mode success/failure table A and the high-probability mode success/failure table B are compared, the high-probability mode success/failure table A is the high-probability mode success/failure table. A jackpot winning probability is set higher than B. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit for the selection of the probability variable jackpot result A, which has a low probability of being selected.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed at step S3205 in the game round control process (FIG. 58) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. FIG.

First, at step S5801, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In the following step S5802, it is determined whether or not the number of revolutions of the game times executed after the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the open/close execution mode is 20 times or less. The first variable probability mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous big winning result is the variable probability big winning result A in the MPU 262 as described above.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S5802, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is determined by referring to the success/failure table A for the high probability mode in step S5803. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S5802, whether or not the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 10 times or less in step S5804, in which the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 determine whether The second variable probability mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous big winning result is the variable probability big winning result B in the MPU 262 as described above.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S5804, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is a value corresponding to the big hit or not by referring to the success/failure table B for the high probability mode in step S5805. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S5804, it is determined whether or not the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5806.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S5806, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is determined in step S5807 by referring to the success/failure table C for the high probability mode. judge. By providing the processing of step S5806, when the number of game times executed after the first variable probability mode flag is set in RAM264 and the opening/closing execution mode is completed is 21 times or more, RAM264 Refer to the success/failure table C for the high probability mode common to the situation where the second variable probability mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 times or more. It becomes possible to perform the right/wrong determination process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5806, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is checked with reference to the success/failure table for the low probability mode in step S5808. judge.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the next big win is won. Specifically, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, "1/10" is displayed, and "1/30" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G when the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 21 or more. In addition, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, "1/15" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the end of the open/close execution mode is 10 times. , "1/30" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G when the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 or more. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the current jackpot winning probability in a situation where a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are set. However, the jackpot winning probability is not limited to being displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G, and may be displayed anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player. Further, instead of displaying the jackpot winning probability on the lower left of the display screen G, an image corresponding to the jackpot winning probability set at the present stage may be displayed on the display screen G.

Also, when the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is not displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. Here, in a situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, if the jackpot winning probability is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G, the fact that the jackpot winning probability is low will be emphasized, and the player will not be motivated to play the game. will decline. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability is not displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G. This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation from declining.

When the process of step S5803 is performed, when the process of step S5805 is performed, when the process of step S5807 is performed, or when the process of step S5808 is performed, the process of steps S5809 to S5816 is performed. The processing of steps S5809 to S5816 is the same as the processing of steps S3302 to S3309.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process in this embodiment is the same as in the ninth embodiment, but the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the ninth embodiment. In the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the present embodiment, when the first variable probability jackpot flag is set in the RAM264, the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM264. The first variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the variable probability jackpot result A is the kind of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time in the MPU 262 . The first probability variable jackpot flag specifies that the type of this jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A in the flag setting processing corresponding to the type determination processing executed in step S3305 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 59). It is set in the RAM 264 when When the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the second variable probability mode flag is cleared to "0", and when the first variable probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, that state is maintained.

In addition, when the second variable probability jackpot flag is set in the RAM264, the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM264. The second variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot result B. The second probability variable jackpot flag specifies that the type of this jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B in the flag setting process corresponding to the type determination process executed in step S3305 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59). It is set in the RAM 264 when When the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the first variable probability mode flag is cleared to "0", and when the second variable probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, that state is maintained.

In addition, when the RAM 264 has a first variable probability mode flag or a second variable probability mode flag set in the RAM 264 under the condition that the normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, the set flag is cleared to "0". The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of the jackpot result that causes the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result. The normal jackpot flag is set in the flag setting process corresponding to the type determination process executed in step S3305 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59). It is set in RAM 264 .

Also, the first variable probability big hit flag, the second variable probability big win flag, or the normal big win flag set in the RAM 264 are cleared to "0" in the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode.

<Time chart showing the period during which various pass/fail tables are referenced>
A period in which various right/wrong tables are referred to will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 95 is a time chart showing a period in which various win/fail tables are referred to. FIG. 95(a) shows the number of game rounds, and FIG. It is a period during which determination processing is performed, and FIG. 95(c) is a period during which determination processing is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high probability mode in a situation where the second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. 95(d) is a period in which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high probability mode, and FIG. , is the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode, and FIG. 95(f) is the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the first game round is started after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. From timing t1 to timing t2, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. Specifically, the success/fail determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode up to 10 times the number of times the game has been executed since the previous opening/closing execution mode ended.

When the second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264, from the timing of t3 until the next big hit is won, as shown in FIG. is done. The timing of t3 is the timing at which the number of games executed after the previous opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 times.

Also, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, as shown in FIG. processing takes place. Specifically, the success/fail determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode up to 20 times of games executed after the previous opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, from the timing of t5 until the next big hit is won, as shown in FIG. is done. The timing of t5 is the timing at which the number of games executed after the previous opening/closing execution mode ends is 21 times.

According to this configuration, the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode is longer than the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. . When comparing the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode, the former has a higher jackpot winning probability. Further, it is only when the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result A that the hit/fail determination process with reference to the hit/fail table A for the high probability mode is performed. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the variable probability jackpot result A as the type of jackpot result.

Also, if the first variable probability mode flag and the second variable probability mode flag are not set in the RAM 264, as shown in FIG. The success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, a plurality of success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode with different jackpot winning probabilities are set, and are referred to in the success/failure determination process according to the types of the probability variable jackpot results A and B. The success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode are different. As a result, it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to the current jackpot winning probability when the probability variable jackpot results A and B are obtained.

In addition, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is higher for the variable probability big winning result A than the probability variable big winning result B. Furthermore, the variable probability big winning result A has a larger number of game rounds than the variable probability big winning result B until the win/loss determination process referring to the win/fail table C for the high probability mode is started. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the variable probability jackpot result A as the type of the jackpot result.

In addition, when the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode is completed in the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 is 21 rotations or more, or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 If the situation and the number of times the game has been played after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 or more, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode. Since the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode has a lower jackpot winning probability than the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends. It is possible to make a player want to win a big win no matter what until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number. This makes it possible to increase the player's concentration on the game.

Further, the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode is set so that the odds of winning the jackpot are higher than those of the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Therefore, even if a big win is not won before the number of times of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the probability of winning a big win is higher than in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Since the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the mode, it is possible to suppress frustration caused by the fact that the jackpot has not been won before reaching the predetermined number of times.

Further, when the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the next jackpot winning. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the current jackpot winning probability in a situation where a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are set.

Also, when the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is not displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. Here, in a situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, if the jackpot winning probability is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G, the fact that the jackpot winning probability is low will be emphasized, and the player will not be motivated to play the game. will decline. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability is not displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G. This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation from declining.

<Another Example of the Eighteenth Embodiment>
(1) After the opening/closing execution mode ends, until the number of times the game is played reaches a predetermined number, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode ends. If the number of games executed from 1 exceeds a predetermined number of times, the success/failure determination process may be performed by referring to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode or the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, if the number of game rounds exceeds the predetermined number in the period from the end of the opening/closing execution mode until the number of game rounds executed reaches the predetermined number, the success/failure for the high-probability mode is determined. It is possible to play the game while expecting the success/failure determination process to be performed by referring to the table A or the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode.

(2) A configuration may be adopted in which the number of game rounds to which the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode are referred to is the same. Also, the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode may be referred to more times than the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode. Here, assuming that the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode is referred to more times than the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode and that the probability variable jackpot result A has a higher jackpot winning probability, When the type of jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B, the player cannot be very pleased. In that respect, according to this configuration, the probability variable big winning result B has more times of game rounds than the probability variable big winning result A, in which the winning or losing determination process is performed with reference to the winning or losing table B for the high probability mode. Therefore, by securing the advantage of the situation in which the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B, the player is prevented from being disappointed when the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B. becomes possible.

(3) When the opening/closing execution mode ends, the number of game rounds for which the win/fail determination process is performed may be determined by lottery with reference to the win/fail tables A and B for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the period during which the success/failure determination process referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode is performed becomes longer.

In addition, a lottery may be performed to switch from the success/failure determination processing referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode to the success/failure determination processing referring to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode every time the game cycle ends. . When switching from the success/failure determination processing referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the high probability mode to the success/failure determination processing referring to the success/failure table C for the high probability mode, the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G is also switch. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G each time a game round is started.

(4) A configuration may be adopted in which the number of stages in which the various success/failure tables are changed is three or more. In this case, a configuration may be provided in which a success/failure table D for the high-probability mode, which has a lower jackpot winning probability than the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode, is set. Specifically, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success/failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 20 times. The success/failure determination process is performed, and the success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 21 to 50 times, If the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends exceeds 51 times, the success/failure determination process may be performed by referring to the success/failure table D for the high-probability mode. In addition, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table B for the high probability mode until the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 10 times. After the opening/closing execution mode is completed, the success/fail determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode until the number of game rounds executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 to 40 times, and the opening/closing execution mode is performed. If the number of times the game has been played exceeds 41 times after the end of the game, the success/failure determination process may be performed with reference to the success/failure table D for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to create more situations with different jackpot winning probabilities than when the number of stages in which various tables are changed is two.

(5) Depending on the type of the jackpot result, the number of stages in which the jackpot winning probability is changed may be different. Specifically, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success/failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 20 times. The success/failure determination process is performed, and the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 21 to 40 times, If the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 41 or more, the success/failure determination process may be performed by referring to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode. In addition, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success/failure table B for the high probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 10 times. Judgment processing is performed, and if the number of times the game has been executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 11 times or more, the success/failure determination processing may be performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode. good. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the benefit of the probability variable jackpot result A being the jackpot result.

(6) When the jackpot winning probabilities are displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, a configuration may be adopted in which not only one jackpot winning probability is displayed but a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are displayed. Specifically, for example, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, "1/10 or 1/30" may be displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. Further, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, it may be configured such that "1/15 or 1/30" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting the set jackpot winning probability.

(7) Even in a situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, the configuration may be such that the jackpot winning probability is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G. According to this configuration, by looking at the lower left corner of the display screen G, it is possible to grasp the current jackpot winning probability without fail.

(8) If the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends is 20 times or less, or if the second probability variable mode flag is set If the number of game times executed after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is 10 times or less, the high frequency support mode is set, and the situation where the first probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the opening and closing execution mode is When the number of game rounds executed after the end is more than 20 times, or when the second variable probability mode flag is set and the number of game rounds executed after the open/close execution mode is ended is 10 times. When there are more, it is good also as a structure which becomes low frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is not whether the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, but when the high-frequency support mode ends, the success/failure determination process referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the ultra-high probability mode is performed. It is possible to grasp that the period in which the process is performed has ended.

In addition, when the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode is completed is 20 times or less in the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, or the second variable probability mode flag is set When the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is 10 times or less, the high-frequency support mode is surely set, and the situation where the first probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the opening/closing execution mode If the number of game rounds executed after the end of is more than 20 times, or the situation where the second variable probability mode flag is set and the number of game rounds executed after the open/close execution mode ends is 10 If it is more than the number of times, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode is set by lottery. According to this configuration, when the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends is greater than 20 times, or when the second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264 In a set situation and when the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is more than 10, the player is made to expect that the mode will be a high-frequency support mode instead of a low-frequency support mode. A game can be played.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
The conditions for referring to the success/failure tables A, B, and C for each high-probability mode in the success/failure determination process are different from those of the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the eighteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed at step S3205 in the game round control process (FIG. 58) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the nineteenth embodiment.

First, at step S5901, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. It is determined whether or not the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in subsequent step S5902. As described above, the first variable probability mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result A in the MPU 262, and the second variable probability mode flag is a flag in the MPU 262. It is a flag for specifying that the last big win result is the probability variable big win result B.

If a negative determination is made in step S5902, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 is checked by referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode in step S5903. judge.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S5902, the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5904 and the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is more than 20 times, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is more than 30 times.

If a negative determination is made in step S5904, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 is determined by referring to the success/failure table C for the high probability mode in step S5905. judge. Since this embodiment is premised on the eighteenth embodiment, a high-probability mode success/failure table A, a high-probability mode success/failure table B, and a high-probability mode success/failure table C are provided. As described above, under the game state in which the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode is referred to, there are 60 random numbers that result in a big win, and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode is referred to. In the game state in which the number of random numbers resulting in a big win is 40, and in the game state in which the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode is referred to, the number of random numbers resulting in a big win is 40. There are 20 values. That is, the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode has the lowest jackpot winning probability among the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode is completed is 20 times or less, or the second variable probability mode is stored in the RAM 264 In a situation where the flag is set and the number of game times executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 30 times or less, the winning of the jackpot is the largest among the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode. The success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode with a low probability.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S5904, the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5906 and the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is more than 40 times, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is more than 60 times.

If a negative determination is made in step S5906, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 is determined by referring to the success/failure table B for the high probability mode in step S5907. judge. The success/failure table B for the high-probability mode has the second highest jackpot winning probability among the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, the situation in which the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends is 21 to 40 times, or the second in the RAM 264 In the situation where the variable probability mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is 31 to 60 times, Then, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode having the second highest probability of winning the jackpot.

If the determination in step S5906 is affirmative, it is determined in step S5908 whether or not the number of times the game has been played since the opening/closing execution mode ended is more than 100 times. If a negative determination is made in step S5908, the success/failure table A for high probability mode is referred to in step S5909 to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. judge. The success/failure table A for the high-probability mode has the highest jackpot winning probability among the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, the situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends is 41 times to 100 times, or the second In the situation where the variable probability mode flag is set and the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is 61 to 100 times, The success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode with the highest jackpot winning probability.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5908, the process of step S5910 is executed. The processing of step S5910 is the same as the processing of step S5903. In the present embodiment, when the types of the jackpot result are the probability variable jackpot result A and the probability variable jackpot result B, the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is more than 100 times, and the jackpot result is the highest jackpot. The success/failure table A for the high-probability mode with the highest winning probability is switched to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode with the lowest jackpot winning probability. However, the end reference number of times is not limited to 100 times. For example, the end reference number of times may be less than 100 times or more than 100 times.

Also, when the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. Specifically, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, "1/30" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G up to 20 times after the open/close execution mode is completed. is displayed, and when the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 21 to 40 times, "1/15" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends "1/10" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G when the number of times the game has been played is 41 to 100 times. In addition, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, "1/30" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the end of the open/close execution mode is 30 times. , "1/15" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G when the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 31 to 60 times, and the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. "1/10" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G when the number of games played is 61 to 100. However, the jackpot winning probability is not limited to being displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G, and may be displayed anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player. Also, instead of displaying the jackpot winning probability on the lower left of the display screen G, an image corresponding to the jackpot winning probability set at the present stage may be displayed on the display screen G. Also, in a situation where the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the number of times the game is executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, the display screen G The current jackpot winning probability displayed at the bottom left will not be displayed.

When the process of step S5903 is executed, when the process of step S5905 is executed, when the process of step S5907 is executed, when the process of step S5909 or step S5910 is executed, the process of steps S5911 to S5918 is executed. . The processing of steps S5911 to S5918 is the same as the processing of steps S5809 to S5816.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process and the closing process of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment are the same as those in the eighteenth embodiment, but the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the eighteenth embodiment. there is In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment, when the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, the high frequency support flag set in the RAM 264 is set to "0". "100" is set to the number-of-games counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 so that the counters are cleared. When the number-of-games counter becomes "0", the high frequency support flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0".

Also in this embodiment, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the first variable probability big hit flag is set in the RAM 264, the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264. The first variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the variable probability jackpot result A is the kind of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time in the MPU 262 . When the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the second variable probability mode flag is cleared to "0", and when the first variable probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, that state is maintained.

In addition, when the second variable probability jackpot flag is set in the RAM264, the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM264. The second variable probability jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the variable probability jackpot result B. When the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the first variable probability mode flag is cleared to "0", and when the second variable probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, that state is maintained.

In addition, when the RAM 264 has a first variable probability mode flag or a second variable probability mode flag set in the RAM 264 under the condition that the normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, the set flag is cleared to "0". The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of the jackpot result that causes the MPU 262 to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the normal jackpot result.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times of game rounds in which the win/loss determination process is performed with reference to the win/win tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode is set, and the closer to the upper limit number of times of the game rounds, the larger the jackpot. Winning/denying determination processing is performed with reference to winning/rejecting tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode with a high winning probability. In this case, there is a high possibility that the number of times the game is played to win the jackpot will be close to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not the success/failure determination process referring to the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode will end.

In addition, the probability variable jackpot result A is more than the probability variable jackpot result B, the number of times of game changes from the hit/fail table C for the high probability mode to the hit/fail table B for the high probability mode, and the hit/fail table B for the high probability mode. The number of times the game is changed from the high probability mode to the success/failure table A is small. Here, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of success/failure table C for high-probability mode, success/failure table B for high-probability mode, and success/failure table A for high-probability mode. Therefore, the variable probability big win result A has a higher possibility of winning a big win than the probability variable big win result B in a situation where the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is small. As a result, it is possible to secure the advantage that the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result A.

Also, in a situation where the first variable probability mode flag or the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the number of times the game is executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, the display screen G The current jackpot winning probability displayed at the bottom left will not be displayed. Thus, switching from the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode can be specified without grasping the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. becomes possible.

<Another Example of the Nineteenth Embodiment>
(1) The number of game rounds for which the win/fail determination process is performed may be determined by lottery with reference to the win/fail tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the period during which the success/failure determination process with reference to the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode is performed becomes longer.

In addition, a lottery or a success/failure table for the high-probability mode for switching from the success/failure determination processing referring to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode to the success/failure determination processing referring to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode each time the game cycle is completed. A lottery may be performed to switch from the success determination process referring to B to the success determination process referring to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode. When the success/failure tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode are switched, the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G is also switched. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G each time a game round is started.

(2) A situation where the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and a situation where the number of times the game has been executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is more than 40 times, or a second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264 In a situation where the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is more than 60 times, when a case of winning a jackpot occurs continuously, a success/failure table C for the high probability mode. to the high probability mode success/failure table B, and from the high probability mode success/failure table B to the high probability mode success/failure table A. According to this configuration, by preventing the continuous occurrence of a situation in which the number of game rounds is large when a big win is won, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration about not winning a big win immediately. becomes possible.

(3) When the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, it is not limited to the configuration in which the success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. For example, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode. A configuration in which processing is performed may be employed. According to this configuration, when the jackpot results become the probability variable jackpot results A and B, it is possible to give a sense of security to the situation that the jackpot winning probability continues to be high until the next jackpot is won.

(4) A configuration may be adopted in which the number of steps in which the various right/wrong tables are changed is four or more. In this case, a configuration may be provided in which a success/failure table D for the high-probability mode, which has a lower jackpot winning probability than the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode, is set. Specifically, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success/failure table D for the high probability mode is referred to up to 20 times after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. The success/failure determination process is performed, and the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode when the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 21 to 40 times, If the number of game rounds executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 41 to 60 times, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The success/failure determination process may be performed by referring to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode when the number of times the game has been played is 61 to 100 times. In addition, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table D for the high probability mode until the number of game times executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 30 times. After the opening/closing execution mode is completed, the success/fail determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table C for the high-probability mode until the number of game rounds executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 31 to 50 times, and the opening/closing execution mode is performed. The success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode until the number of game rounds executed after the end of the game is 51 to 70 times, and executed after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode when the number of game rounds is 71 to 100 times. According to this configuration, it is possible to create more situations with different jackpot winning probabilities than when the number of stages in which various tables are changed is three.

(5) When the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode reaches the preset upper limit number of times, the success/failure determination process for the high-probability mode is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the process is switched to the success/failure determination process referring to the tables A, B, and C. FIG. Also, in this case, the hit/fail table C for the high-probability mode, the hit/fail table B for the high-probability mode, and the hit/fail table A for the high-probability mode are set in order of higher probability of winning the jackpot. , the hit/fail determination process may be performed with reference to the hit/fail tables A, B, and C for the high-probability mode with a high jackpot winning probability. Here, if there is a long period of time during which the jackpot is not won, the player feels frustrated that the jackpot is not won. In this respect, according to the present configuration, when the number of times the game is played after the opening/closing execution mode ends reaches the upper limit number of times, the success/failure determination process referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is performed. Since the process is switched to the success/failure determination process referring to the success/failure tables A, B, and C, the probability of winning the jackpot increases. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frustration of the player by providing the benefit of increasing the probability of winning the jackpot against the occurrence of a long period of time during which the jackpot is not won.

(6) When the jackpot winning probabilities are displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, a configuration may be adopted in which not only one jackpot winning probability is displayed but a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are displayed. Specifically, for example, when the first variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, "1/10 or 1/30" may be displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. Further, when the second variable probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, it may be configured such that "1/15 or 1/30" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting the set jackpot winning probability.

(7) Even when the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability may be displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G. According to this configuration, by looking at the lower left of the display screen G, it is possible to grasp the current jackpot winning probability without fail.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
The conditions for referring to the success/failure tables A and B for each high-probability mode in the success/failure determination process are different from those of the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration will be described in detail below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the eighteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed at step S3205 in the game round control process (FIG. 58) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing variation start processing executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twentieth embodiment.

First, in step S6001, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. It is determined whether or not the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0" in subsequent step S6002. The jackpot continuation counter is a counter for identifying whether or not the MPU 262 is in a situation where the success/failure determination processing is performed by referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the high probability mode.

Here, in this embodiment, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode, a success/failure table A for the high-probability mode, and a success/failure table B for the high-probability mode are set. In addition, multiple types of jackpot results are not set. In this embodiment, the success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table corresponding to the value of the jackpot continuation counter instead of performing the success/failure determination process with reference to the success/failure table corresponding to the type of the jackpot results.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S6002, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S6001 is checked by referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode in step S6003. judge.

When a negative determination is made in step S6002, it is determined whether or not the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" in step S6004. A situation in which the jackpot continuation counter is "1" is a situation in which the jackpot is won when the jackpot continuation counter is "0".

When the affirmative determination is made in step S6004, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S6001 is checked in step S6005 with reference to the success/failure table B for the high probability mode. judge.

If a negative determination is made in step S6004, the success/failure table A for high probability mode is referred to in step S6006 to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S6001 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. judge. A negative determination in step S6004 means that the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "2". A situation in which the jackpot continuation counter is "2" is a situation in which the jackpot is won when the jackpot continuation counter is "1".

When comparing the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode, the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode wins more than the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. It is designed to increase the odds of winning. According to this configuration, when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "2", the jackpot winning probability is higher than when the jackpot continuation counter is "1".

Further, in this embodiment, when the jackpot continuation counter is ``1'' or the jackpot continuation counter is ``2'', the state in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won. Further, when the jackpot continuation counter is "0", the state in which the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won.

Also, when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" or "2", the current jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the next jackpot is won. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter is "1", "1/15" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the next jackpot is won, and when the jackpot continuation counter is "2", "1/10" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the next big win is won. However, the jackpot winning probability is not limited to being displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen G, and may be displayed anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player. Also, instead of displaying the jackpot winning probability on the lower left of the display screen G, an image corresponding to the jackpot winning probability set at the present stage may be displayed on the display screen G.

When the process of step S6003 is executed, when the process of step S6005 is executed, or when the process of step S6006 is executed, when the jackpot is won (step S6007: YES), the jackpot result in step S6008 Execute the stop result setting process for In this process, the RAM 264 stores information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 233 when the result is a big win.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of types of jackpot results are not set, the type determination processing executed in step S5810 and step S5812 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 94) A flag setting process corresponding to the type determination process is not executed.

When the process of step S6008 is executed, 1 is added to the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S6009. In the following step S6010, it is determined whether or not the jackpot continuation counter is "3".

If the determination in step S6010 is affirmative, the jackpot continuation counter is cleared to "0" in step S6011. In this process, the jackpot continuation counter is cleared to "0", so an affirmative determination is made in step S6002. In other words, when the jackpot win is won in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is "2", the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode in the next success/failure determination process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6007, the process of step S6012 is executed. The processing of step S6012 is the same as the processing of step S5813.

When a negative determination is made in step S6010, when the process of step S6011 is executed, or when the process of step S6012 is executed, the process of step S6013 is executed. The processing of step S6013 is the same as the processing of step S5814.

In the following step S6014, the variation command and the big hit winning command are set. The jackpot winning command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 290 to specify that the winning result is a jackpot winning.

The variation command and the jackpot winning command set at step S6014 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 at step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). When the sound emission control device 290 receives a jackpot winning command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same even numbered pattern or the same odd numbered pattern is established on one effective line L1 to L5. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the types of symbols (the types of even-numbered symbols and the types of odd-numbered symbols) and the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the process of step S6014, the process of step S6015 is executed. The processing of step S6015 is the same as the processing of step S5816.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process in this embodiment is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, but the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different from that in the eighteenth embodiment. In the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode in this embodiment, when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" or "2", a high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264. Further, when the jackpot continuation counter is "0", the high frequency support flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the present embodiment, the success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table corresponding to the values of the jackpot continuation counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, so the opening/closing execution mode end process is not performed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure mode for the low-probability mode, and when a jackpot is won, the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 becomes "2". Until then, the success/failure determination processing is performed with reference to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, the success/fail determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode until the jackpot is won a plurality of times. Here, when comparing the success/failure table for the low-probability mode with the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode, the former has a lower jackpot winning probability. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a benefit for winning a big win in a situation where the odds of winning a big win are low.

In addition, when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1", the hit/fail determination process is performed with reference to the hit/fail table B for the high probability mode, and the jackpot continuation counter is set to "2". , the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode, which has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. Here, since the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode has a higher jackpot winning probability than the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode. In this case, there is a high possibility that the number of times the game is played until the jackpot is won is smaller than in the case where the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. The number of games executed until the jackpot is won in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is "2" is the number of games executed until the jackpot is won in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is "1". , even if the number of game rounds executed until the jackpot is won increases in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is "1", the number of game rounds executed until the jackpot is won is increased. It is possible to suppress the frustration caused by the large number of times.

<Another example of the twentieth embodiment>
(1) When the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1", the hit/fail determination process is performed with reference to the hit/fail table A for the high probability mode, and the jackpot continuation counter is set to "2". , the success/failure determination process may be performed by referring to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. Here, the case where the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is more successful than the case where the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode. There is a high possibility that the number of game rounds that have been executed will increase. In this situation, if the number of games played until the next big win is won increases, there is a high possibility that the players will become frustrated with the increase in the number of games played until the next big win. . Therefore, after a situation in which the number of times of games executed until winning a big win is likely to increase, it is preferable that the number of times of games executed until winning the next big win is as small as possible. In that respect, according to this configuration, after the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and the jackpot is won, the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode with the highest probability of winning the jackpot is referred to. Then, the success/failure determination process is performed. As a result, after a situation in which the number of times the game is played until winning the jackpot is likely to increase, the number of times the game is played until the win is likely to decrease. It is possible to suppress the frustration caused by the large number of games played until the jackpot is won.

(2) When a jackpot win is won in a situation where the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0", and when the same combination of odd-numbered symbols is established on one activated line L1 to L5. and when the same even-numbered symbol combination is established on one activated line L1 to L5, the period during which the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode is different. may be configured. Specifically, when the same even-numbered symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5, refer to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode until the jackpot continuation counter reaches "3". When the success/failure determination process is performed and the same combination of odd-numbered symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5, refer to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode until the jackpot continuation counter reaches "5". It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the propriety determination process is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the combination of symbols established on one pay line L1 to L5.

(3) When the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" or "2", the state in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won. For example, the pattern in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won, the pattern in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the preset upper limit number of times, and the high-frequency support mode It is good also as a structure with which the pattern which does not become is set. In this case, a lottery process may be used to determine one of the three types of patterns. The lottery process may be performed when a big win is won in a state where the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, and when the second big win is won counting from the case where the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the jackpot is won. good. According to this configuration, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the high-frequency support mode will continue until the next big win is won.

Further, in a configuration in which the pattern of the support mode is determined by a lottery process, when the lottery mode is a low probability mode and when the jackpot is won, and when the lottery mode is a high probability mode, the above support mode is selected. A configuration may be adopted in which the support mode patterns selected in the lottery process for determining the pattern are distributed differently. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won while the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, there is the highest possibility that a pattern in which the high-frequency support mode continues until a preset upper limit number of times is reached is selected. If a jackpot is won while the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a pattern that does not lead to the high-frequency support mode is selected with the highest probability. According to this configuration, it is possible to vary the benefits that the player can receive depending on the situation.

In addition, in the configuration in which the pattern of the support mode is determined by lottery processing, the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" or "2" and the high frequency support mode is not used. When winning, the jackpot continuation counter may not be incremented by one. Since the jackpot continuation counter is not incremented by 1, the hit/fail judgment processing is performed again with reference to the hit/fail tables A and B for the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the benefit of winning the jackpot in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode. In addition, when a jackpot is won in a situation where the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is ``2'' and the situation is not in the high-frequency support mode, the jackpot continuation counter is subtracted by 1. may be

(4) When the jackpot winning probabilities are displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, a configuration may be adopted in which not only one jackpot winning probability is displayed but a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are displayed. Specifically, a configuration in which "1/10 or 1/15" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G may be adopted. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting the set jackpot winning probability.

(5) If the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" or "2", refer to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode and the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the success/failure determination process is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter is "1", the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 50 times. Judgment processing is performed, and when the jackpot continuation counter is "2", the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode is referred to when the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 51 or more. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the success/failure determination process is performed. Further, when the jackpot continuation counter is "2", the success/failure determination process is performed by referring to the success/failure table B for the high-probability mode until the number of game rounds executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 30 times. If the jackpot continuation counter is "2" and the number of games executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is 31 or more, the success/failure determination is made by referring to the success/failure table A for the high-probability mode. A configuration in which processing is performed may be employed. According to this configuration, since the jackpot winning probability is changed in the middle, it is possible to attract players to the game compared to the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is not changed in the middle.

(6) A configuration may be adopted in which the number of steps in which various right/wrong tables are referred to is three or more. In this case, a high-probability mode success/failure table C having a lower jackpot winning probability than the high-probability mode success/failure table B may be set. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0", the win/loss determination process is performed with reference to the win/fail table for the low probability mode, and the jackpot continuation counter is set to " 1", the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode success/failure table C, and if the jackpot continuation counter is "2", the success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode success/failure table B. Judgment processing is performed, and when the jackpot continuation counter is "3", the success/failure determination process may be performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, the benefit of winning a jackpot in a situation where the lottery mode is a low-probability mode is increased, so it is possible to increase motivation for the game in a situation where the lottery mode is a low-probability mode. becomes. In the above configuration, the jackpot continuation counter is cleared to "0" when the jackpot continuation counter reaches "4".

(7) As the types of jackpot results, a variable jackpot result and a normal jackpot result are set, and in the event of a variable jackpot result, the jackpot is won twice counting from the time when the jackpot result is obtained. , the success/failure determination processing may be performed by referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the type of the jackpot result is the variable probability jackpot result. Further, in this configuration, the success/fail determination process may be performed by referring to the success/failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode with different probabilities of winning the jackpot, depending on the number of consecutive jackpot winnings. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter is "1", the hit/fail determination process is performed with reference to the hit/fail table B for the high probability mode, and when the jackpot continuation counter is "2", a high probability The success/failure determination process is performed with reference to the success/failure table A for the mode, and if the jackpot continuation counter is "0", the success/failure determination process may be performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. .

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above embodiments. Moreover, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the combined configuration.

(1) When a prize is awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out. The predetermined number may be one or two or more. In addition, when a prize is awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out regardless of whether or not the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is reached. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out only when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during a period different from the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35. good. In these cases, the profit of the payout of the game ball is given to the fact that the prize is won in the through prize winning section 35 for distribution during a period different from the effective period of prize winning of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution. . Further, instead of this configuration, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out only when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35. good. In this case, it is possible to increase the advantage of the valid winning period.

(2) When a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode is surely generated, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35, a distribution is performed. A lottery process for determining whether to generate the minute execution mode (for example, a probability of 10% is generated) is executed, and when the lottery process is generated and won, the distribution execution mode is activated. It is good also as the structure which generate|occur|produces. In this case, the valid winning period of the distribution through winning section 35 may be continued until the distribution execution mode occurs. When the number of winning prizes reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or when the number of occurrences of the lottery process reaches a specific number (for example, 10 times), the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 ends. good too.

(3) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started when the prize winning effective period of the distribution thru winning section 35 is started, the distribution thru As a configuration in which the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started at the timing when the distribution execution mode is started or the timing when the distribution execution mode is started during the prize valid period of the prize winning section 35. good too.

(4) In the second distribution execution mode, in place of the configuration in which V prizes are basically not generated, even in the second distribution execution mode, V prizes are less likely to occur than in the first distribution execution mode. A configuration in which a prize can be won may be adopted. For example, while the opening mode of the distribution winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged in the V guidance position is the first distribution mode. The period of the second distribution execution mode may be shorter than that of the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V-induction position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. A game ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being placed at the V-induction position. In these cases, V wins can occur in regular games even in the second distribution execution mode, so it is possible to increase the degree of player's attention to the second distribution execution mode.

In this configuration, the same open/close execution mode may occur when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode. In addition, instead of this configuration, when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the game shifts to the opening and closing execution mode which is more advantageous to the player than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. may be configured. For example, when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the number of executions of the round game that enables winning to the special electric winning device 37 is higher than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. As a result, the number of winnings to the special electric winning device 37 during the opening/closing execution mode may increase. Also, for example, when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the upper limit number of winning to the special electric winning device 37 in each round game is larger than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. As a result, the number of game balls to be put out during the opening/closing execution mode may be increased. In these cases, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction that the V winning has occurred in the second allocation execution mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the V winning is relatively low.

(5) When a V winning occurs in the second allocation execution mode in each of the above embodiments, the opening and closing execution mode may not occur.

(6) When a V win occurs in the second allocation execution mode in each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 may output an external signal to the management computer of the game hall.

(7) If a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the sorting execution mode, an abnormality occurs in any one of the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44, or a predetermined combination. It is good also as a structure by which alerting|reporting is performed. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 may output an external signal to the management computer of the game hall.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the same open/close execution mode occurs when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode. may be This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the opening/closing execution mode.

(9) A third distribution execution mode may be set in addition to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments. For example, while the opening mode of the distribution winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the third distribution execution mode, the period in which the switching piece 66 is arranged in the V guidance position is the first swing. The period of the third distribution execution mode may be shorter than that of the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the third distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V-induction position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. A game ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being arranged at the V guide position.

(10) The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 is not limited to the configuration in each of the above embodiments. In addition, the rolling part is provided with a plurality of drop holes for game balls, and the game balls that have won a prize in the sorting prize winning device 36 roll in the rolling area and then fall into one of the drop holes. good too. Then, when the game ball falls into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize, the configuration may be such that the transition to the open/close execution mode occurs as the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the game ball is led to the rolling area so that the game ball can fall into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize, whereas in the second distribution execution mode , the game ball may be led out to the rolling area so that the game ball does not fall into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize.

(11) The special electric prize winning device 37 may not be provided, and each round game may be performed by opening the distribution prize device 36 in the open/close execution mode.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is generated as a privilege when a V prize is won in the distribution execution mode, the winning/failure lottery mode after the distribution execution mode may be configured to be a high probability mode. The support mode after the execution mode may be configured to be the high-frequency support mode, or may be configured to generate a large amount of game balls to be paid out.

(13) Reservation information (hereinafter referred to as first reservation information) acquired when winning to the first operation unit 32 occurs and suspension information acquired when winning to the second operation unit 33 occurs ( hereinafter referred to as second pending information) may be stored separately. In this case, it may be configured such that the player's advantage is different between the first reservation information and the second reservation information when the success/failure determination process is executed. For example, the case where the success/failure determination process is executed for the second reserved information may be more advantageous to the player than the case where the success/failure determination process is executed for the first reserved information. Specifically, the case where the hit/fail determination process is executed for the second reserved information and the hit result is more likely than the hit result when the hit/fail judgment process is executed for the first reserved information Alternatively, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process may be increased.

Further, in the configuration in which the first pending information and the second pending information are stored separately as described above, regardless of whether it is the first pending information or the second pending information, the order in which it is acquired determines whether it is correct or not. It may be configured to be a processing execution target, and regardless of the order in which it is acquired, the second pending information may be prioritized over the first pending information to be the execution target of the propriety determination processing.

(14) In the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 may not be arranged at the V guidance position to ensure that the V prize does not occur.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of V winning in the first distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of V winning in the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the number of times the special electric prize winning device 37 wins in the opening and closing execution mode increases because the number of times of execution of the round game that enables the winning of the prize to the special electric prize winning device 37 increases. may be configured. Also, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the first distribution execution mode is better than the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the second distribution execution mode. Alternatively, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 37 in each round game may be increased, so that the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening/closing execution mode may be increased as a result.

(16) If the result of the winning/failure determination process is a winning result, the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35 does not occur, but the distribution execution mode occurs, and in the distribution execution mode, V A configuration may be adopted in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs when a prize is won. In this case, in the distribution execution mode, a game ball that has won the distribution prize device 36 may be configured to generate a V prize with a predetermined probability of greater than 0% and less than 100%. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode is generated when the result of the win/fail determination process is a winning result, when the game ball enters the first ball entering section, the ball enters the second ball entering section. is possible, and when a game ball enters the second ball entry portion, the distribution execution mode occurs, and when V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode may occur. .

(17) In the distribution execution mode, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 may be configured not to be in the driven state, and in the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state, whereas the first In the distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may not be driven. In the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be driven, but in the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be configured so as not to be in a driving state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 may be configured not to be in the driving state, and in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state. However, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may not be in the driven state, and in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be Although it can be in the driving state, the guiding unit 52 may not be in the driving state in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

(18) A configuration may be adopted in which the distribution through winning section 35 is provided below the second operating section 33 . In this case, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 does not enter the driving state during the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, and the second operating section 33 is guided during a period different from the winning valid period. A configuration in which the unit 52 can be in a driven state may be adopted.

(19) Even if the results of the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process result in a high-probability winning result, if the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the success/failure lottery mode after the distribution execution mode ends is set to the low-probability mode. It may be configured to be In this case, the support mode may be configured to be set to a low frequency support mode, or may be configured to be set to a high frequency support mode that continues until the next occurrence of the winning result. It may be configured to be set to a high-frequency support mode that continues until the game cycle is completed.

In addition, even if the result of the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process is a low probability hit result, if the opening and closing execution mode does not occur, the support mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be

(20) When the distribution execution mode is entered, the V winning detection sensor 69 may reliably detect the game ball regardless of the type. For example, the path through which the game balls that have won the prize distribution device 36 pass does not branch into the discharge passage area 65b and the V prize passage area 65c, but has only the V prize passage area 65c. A game ball that has won a prize in the device 36 may pass through the V winning passage area 65 c and be reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 . Further, instead of this configuration, the passage through which the winning game balls of the sorting prize winning device 36 pass is branched into the discharge passage region 65b and the V winning passage region 65c as in the above embodiments. Even in the distribution execution mode, at least one of the game balls winning the distribution winning device 36 passes through the V winning path area 65c and is reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. may be configured to perform drive control.

(21) When a game ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36 is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 replaces the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is reliably generated. It is good also as a structure which an open-close execution mode generate|occur|produces with a predetermined probability (probability greater than 0% and less than 100%) when a game ball is detected in . For example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the lottery process is executed by the main side MPU 92, and when the lottery process results in a winning, the open/close execution mode may be generated. . As a result, the player expects not only the occurrence of the V winning, but also the occurrence of winning in the lottery process.

(22) Display control based on commands output from the main controller 81 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 101 based on commands output from the main controller 81 The configuration may be such that the device 111 controls the sound emission control device 101 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 81 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 81 . Also, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 101 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 101 to the display control device 111 are arbitrary.

(23) The device that executes the game round effect is not limited to the pattern display device 44, and is configured to execute the game round effect by operating a movable decorative member. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by lighting a predetermined light-emitting portion, or a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by combining all or part of the above-described modes. good.

(24) Other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that enters a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded upon entry, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mammoth ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Also, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are recycled without being discharged to island facilities. In addition, the player cannot replenish the pachinko machine with game balls, the number of game balls usable by the player is managed as data, and the shooting operation is performed in a situation where the number of usable game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which game balls are shot and the number of usable game balls is subtracted when the shooting is performed. In this case, when a prize is generated in the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution prize winning device 36, or the special electric prize winning device 37, etc., the number of game balls that can be used increases in terms of data. becomes.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, only the first distribution execution mode may exist as the distribution execution mode. In this case, when the distribution execution mode occurs, V winning is generated by continuing the shooting of game balls aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 . When this configuration is applied to the fourth to eighth embodiments, the first distribution execution mode is reliably generated when the transition to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process.

(26) In the above-described fourth to eighth embodiments, if a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. Although the transition certainly occurs, the distribution probability between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may vary according to the game state. For example, in the case of the fourth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when any of the first to fifth high probability results is obtained, the first distribution is performed than when the low probability results are obtained. A configuration may be adopted in which the distribution probability to the execution mode is increased and the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is different for each of the first to fifth high probability winning results. Further, for example, in the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, in the distribution determination probability lottery process, the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is changed, and in the success/failure determination process At least one of the probabilities is corrected so that the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the hit result is selected and the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is equal to or less than a predetermined value. good too.

(27) When the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is changed with the result of the high probability hit result in the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, It is good also as a structure changed into the probability higher than the said probability set ignited by the low certainty hit result. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of having a high probability hit result.

(28) In the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, when the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process is changed as a result of the high probability hitting result, the low probability hitting result It may be configured such that the probability can be changed to a probability lower than the set probability when the probability becomes. However, in order to secure the advantage of having become a highly accurate hit result, in this case, the probability that the hit result is selected in the success judgment process and the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process Winning and Transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process so that the composite probability obtained by accumulating the probability is higher than the composite probability of each probability set as a result of the low probability hit result It is preferable that the probability of winning is set.

(29) In the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process are determined. At least one of the probability that a winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability of winning in the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process is corrected so that the integrated combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value. In addition to or instead of this, there is a probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process so that the above synthesis probability is equal to or greater than a specific value, and a transition to a distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. At least one of the winning probabilities may be modified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the combination probability from becoming lower than expected.

(30) In the above fifth embodiment to the above seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are high. When the probability is set to be higher than that at the time of the low probability, the probability may be corrected so that the combined probability obtained by accumulating the probability always becomes the predetermined probability. For example, in the fifth embodiment, in the distribution determination probability correction processing (step S2307), the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination processing is increased so that the combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. Fixed.

Further, for example, in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process A situation can occur in which one of them is set to a probability at a low probability and the other is set to a probability triggered by a high probability result. In such a case, while one of the probabilities set as the probability at the time of the low probability remains as it is, the other probability is set so that the combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. As a result, when a high-probability hit result occurs in at least one of the win/fail determination process and the distribution determination process, the combined probability becomes the predetermined probability.

Further, for example, in the seventh embodiment, one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is selected first. A situation can occur in which the number of continuations is "0" and the probability of the low probability is set, while the number of continuations is 1 or more and the probability of the high probability is maintained. In such a case, at the timing when the number of continuations on one side is "0" and the probability is set to a low probability, the probability of the side with the number of continuations of 1 or more is higher than before so that the above-mentioned combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. will be changed with high probability. As a result, chances for changing the probability are diversified.

(31) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode according to the probability. may be different, may be configured not to notify the probability at all, or may be configured to perform notification indicating whether or not the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability.

(32) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process may be notified as it is, and according to the probability The selection probabilities of the notification modes may be different, the probability may not be notified at all, or the notification indicating whether or not the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability may be performed.

(33) In the above-described eighth embodiment, the V winning lottery process may be configured such that the probability of winning the V winning prize is notified as it is, or the selection probability of the notification mode is different according to the probability. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the probability is not notified at all, or the configuration may be such that a notification indicating whether or not the probability is equal to or greater than a predetermined probability is executed.

(34) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is not executed unless the opening/closing execution mode that has shifted due to the occurrence of V winning is terminated. Even if does not occur, if the transition to the distribution execution mode occurs, the game state transition processing (FIG. 37) may be executed, and even if the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur The configuration may be such that the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed when the game round resulting in a winning result in the win/fail judgment process ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning a transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will vary.

(35) In the fifth embodiment, in the game state transition process (FIG. 39), the probability lottery process for distribution determination may be executed prior to the probability lottery process for win/fail determination. In this case, if the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the winning result will be shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the success/failure determination is made. The probability that the winning outcome will be selected in the process will be modified.

(36) A configuration in which a situation in which a higher probability than the low probability is set or can be set continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment is changed to an embodiment other than the seventh embodiment. may be applied to

(37) In the above seventh embodiment, when the probability is set and the number of continuations is set with the high probability result as a trigger, the set probability is ``0''. It is good also as a structure held until it becomes. This makes it easier for the player to understand the set state of the probability.

(38) In the above-described eighth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning results being selected in the win/fail determination process does not change. In this case, the probability of winning the shift to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process and the probability of winning the V prize in the V prize lottery process will change. For this configuration, a configuration in which probability correction processing is executed so that the combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, or as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the trigger for changing each probability is different may be applied, and a configuration in which the situation where the probability is higher than the low probability or can be higher continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment may be applied. may apply.

(39) In the above-described eighth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process does not change. In this case, the probability that a winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability of winning a V prize in the V prize lottery process will change. For this configuration, a configuration in which probability correction processing is executed so that the combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, or as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the trigger for changing each probability is different may be applied, and a configuration in which the situation where the probability is higher than the low probability or can be higher continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment may be applied. may apply.

(40) In contrast to the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is surely generated when the game round that resulted in a winning result in the winning judgment process ends, the probability of winning in the winning judgment process becomes higher than when the probability is low. A configuration may be applied in which this situation continues until the opening/closing execution mode occurs a predetermined number of times, and there are a plurality of types of the predetermined number of times. In this case, the pending information acquired based on the winning of the first operation unit 32 and the pending information acquired based on the winning of the second operating unit 33 are stored separately, and which of the pending information is The selection rate of the predetermined number of times, the number of types of the predetermined number of times, and the expected value of selection of the predetermined number of times may be different depending on. As a result, it is possible to change the selection mode of the predetermined number of times according to the type of the actuating portions 32 and 33 that triggered acquisition of the hold information, thereby diversifying the game.

(41) There are three or more types of probabilities that result in a win in the win/fail determination process, in contrast to the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is reliably generated when the game cycle that resulted in a hit in the win/fail determination process ends. configuration may be applied.

(42) Lottery processing for determining the number of counts by winning game balls into the general winning opening 221, the upper working opening 223, or the lower working opening 224 during the round game, or deciding whether to continue the round game A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process is performed in order to do so. Specifically, in each round game, when winning to the general winning opening 221, the upper working opening 223, or the lower working opening 224 occurs, whether or not the lottery process for determining the count number or the round game continues It is good also as a structure by which lottery processing for determining is performed. Further, according to the number of winnings to the general winning opening 221, the upper operating opening 223, or the lower operating opening 224, the count number or the continuation rate of the round game may be changed. With this configuration, not only the game ball wins to the big win hole 222a during the round game, but also the game ball wins to the general win hole 221, the upper operation hole 223, or the lower operation hole 224. It is possible to expect.

(43) Display control based on commands output from the main controller 260 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 300 is controlled by the sound emission control device 290 based on commands output from the main controller 260 The device 300 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 290 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 290 and the display control device 300 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these two control devices may be may be integrated into main controller 260 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into main controller 260 . Also, the configuration of commands output from the main controller 260 to the sound emission control device 290 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 290 to the display control device 300 are arbitrary.

(44) The device that executes the game round effect is not limited to the pattern display device 231, and is configured to execute the game round effect by operating a movable decorative member. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by lighting a predetermined light-emitting portion, or a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by combining all or part of the above-described modes. good.

(45) Winning/failure determination processing is performed according to the winning of the operation openings 23 and 24, and when a big hit result is obtained in the winning/failure determination processing, the game state shifts to the opening and closing execution mode, and the game ball is set to a predetermined value. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration in which a player wins an area and a game ball wins a prize in a big win area provided in the predetermined area, resulting in a big win, and the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Applicable.

(46) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded upon entry, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mammoth ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Also, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are recycled without being discharged to island facilities. In addition, the player cannot replenish the pachinko machine with game balls, the number of game balls usable by the player is managed as data, and the shooting operation is performed in a situation where the number of usable game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which game balls are shot and the number of usable game balls is subtracted when the shooting is performed. In this case, when prize balls are generated by winning into the upper working port 223, the lower working port 224, or the big prize winning port 222a, the number of usable game balls increases on the data.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
State setting means (function for executing distribution standby processing in the main side MPU 92) for setting a state (distribution execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
A privilege (transition to opening/closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of step S1311 in the main side MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless a privilege giving opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
A privilege (transition to opening/closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of step S1311 in the main side MPU 92);
Predetermined lottery means (in the first embodiment, step S1003 and step S1004 are executed in the main MPU 92) for executing a predetermined lottery process based on occurrence of a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution) a function to execute the processing of steps S1802 and S1803 in the main MPU 92 in the third embodiment);
a first state setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1104 and S1105 in the main MPU 92) that sets a state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
a second state setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1106 and S1107 in the main side MPU 92) that sets a state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result; ,
with
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the privilege grant opportunity may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the above. The gaming machine is characterized in that the opportunity to give the privilege is more likely to occur than in the case of a non-specific result.

According to the feature A2, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery process executed based on the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity is a specific result, the privilege provision opportunity is more likely to occur than when the result is a non-specific result. As a result, the player not only expects that the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means will be executed, but also expects that the result of the predetermined lottery process will be a specific result. Therefore, the number of objects expected by the player increases, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed not only when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result, but also when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result. As a result, when the predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, the variable ball entrance control of the variable ball entrance means is executed regardless of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature A3. Characteristically characterized in that the variable ball entry means or the variable ball entry means different therefrom (special electric prize winning device 37) is then opened as the award of the privilege based on the occurrence of the privilege awarding opportunity. The gaming machine described in A2.

According to the feature A3, when the privilege granting opportunity occurs, the variable ball entering means or the variable entering means different from the variable entering means is opened separately from the variable entering means for the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity. state. As a result, it is possible to extend the state in which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state by generating the opportunity to give the privilege.

Feature A4. Means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving to the player a given object, which is either a game ball or information on the number of usable game balls, based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means ), the gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3.

According to feature A4, since the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases as a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It is possible to raise the degree of attention to. With the configuration of feature A2, when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the variable ball entrance control of the variable ball entrance means is executed. Even if the result of (1) is a non-specific result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely lowered.

Feature A5. In the state where the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the total period of the open state of the variable ball entry means is variable in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. It is set to a period that allows a specific number of game balls to enter the ball entry means,
In the state where the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specified result, the total period of the open state in the variable ball entry means is related to the shooting cycle of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the period is set to allow the specific number of game balls to be entered into the variable ball entry means.

According to feature A5, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, it is equivalent to the case where the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result while the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is being executed. number of game balls can be entered into the variable ball entry means. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result.

Feature A6. A state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, and a state in which the variable ball entrance control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specified result The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means differs depending on the state.

According to feature A6, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result in relation to the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the state where the variable ball entering control of the variable ball entering means is executed. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage between the case and the non-specific result.

Feature A7. The game according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege when the privilege granting opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process is not executed. machine.

If a privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, there is a high possibility that the privilege grant opportunity is caused by fraudulent activity. Under such circumstances, according to the feature A7, if a privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process is not executed, the privilege is not granted, so that the privilege is not granted for such fraudulent activity. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A8. The predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entering portion (distribution through winning portion 35),
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during a period different from the predetermined effective period, the The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A7, wherein a predetermined lottery process is not executed.

According to the feature A8, since the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, the game ball is first entered into the predetermined ball entering portion in order to generate the privilege giving opportunity. After that, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. As a result, the target to which the game ball is aimed is changed step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section during the prescribed validity period, the prescribed lottery process is executed, and even if the game ball enters the prescribed ball entry section during a period different from the prescribed validity period, the predetermined Lottery processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry portion triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and it is possible to set the execution frequency of the predetermined lottery process to an appropriate frequency.

Feature A9. When the privilege provision opportunity occurs in a state in which the variable ball entry control is executed triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the non-specific result, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result Means ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A8, characterized by having a function of executing the processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main side MPU 92 (the display side MPU 113).

According to the feature A9, whether the privilege provision opportunity occurred in a state where the variable entrance control is being executed triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming a non-specific result, or whether the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result. It is possible to clearly grasp whether the privilege provision opportunity has occurred in the state where the variable ball entry control is being executed with the fact that it has become as a trigger.

Feature A10. The game machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, further comprising result notification means (distribution display section 42c) for notifying information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.

According to feature A10, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature A11. first control means (main side MPU 92) having the privilege provision means, the predetermined lottery means, the first state setting means, and the second state setting means;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the result notification means is controlled by the first control means.

According to feature A11, it is possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification means.

Feature A12. When a specific lottery opportunity (a prize winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a predetermined valid period (winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35) in which the predetermined lottery opportunity can occur specific lottery means for executing specific lottery processing for determining whether or not to generate
A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( A gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92.

According to feature A12, the means for informing that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the means for informing the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result informing means. are provided separately as As a result, each content can be individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means.

Feature A13. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit production is started, and when the predetermined effective period is executed after that, the specific production means (symbol) is arranged so that the specific unit production is continued during the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to feature A12, further comprising means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the display device 44).

According to feature A13, a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the predetermined effective period and during the predetermined effective period, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of the effect during these periods. In addition, in the configuration in which a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the predetermined effective period and including the predetermined effective period, each content can be monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means. It is possible to do it individually.

Feature A14. Any one of the characteristics A10 to A13, wherein the notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is started when the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed is started. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process at the start of the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed.

Feature A15. The game according to any one of features A10 to A14, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is continued while the variable ball entry control is being executed. machine.

According to the feature A15, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process by checking the result notification means at an arbitrary timing while the variable ball entry control is being executed.

Feature A16. When a specific lottery opportunity (a prize winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a predetermined valid period (winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35) in which the predetermined lottery opportunity can occur specific lottery means for executing specific lottery processing for determining whether or not to generate
A specific unit effect is started by a specific effect means (symbol display device 44), and a unit effect control means (display side) for making the execution mode of the specific unit effect correspond to the lottery result of the specific lottery process after the lapse of a predetermined period. MPU 113);
with
The execution mode of the specific unit performance is an execution mode corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, and the predetermined effective period occurs in a situation where the specific unit performance is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A15.

According to the feature A16, by executing the specific unit performance corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process, it is possible to provide the performance corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. In this case, the specific unit performance is continued for a predetermined effective period even after the execution mode becomes an execution mode corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery process is the winning result. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the predetermined effective period by using the specific unit performance that has been executed before the predetermined effective period is started.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the unit effect control means continues the specific unit effect even in a state where the variable ball entry control is executed.

According to feature A17, by executing the specific unit effect including the state in which the variable entry control is executed, the period before the start of the predetermined effective period, the predetermined effective period, and the variable entry control are executed. It is possible to provide a series of specific unit effects using the period of time.

Feature A18. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the unit performance control means, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs, sets the execution mode of the specific unit performance to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity.

According to the feature A18, when the privilege giving opportunity occurs in the state where the variable entrance control is executed, the execution mode of the specific unit performance becomes a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity, so that the specific unit performance is performed. It is possible to notify the occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity by using it.

Feature A19. The unit effect control means performs variable display of patterns in a plurality of variable display areas as the specific unit effect. In a situation in which the same type of pattern is stop-displayed in some of the plurality of variable display regions to form a combination of ready-to-win patterns, the variable display of the patterns is continued in the remaining variable display regions, The game according to feature A18, characterized in that, when a privilege giving opportunity occurs, a pattern of the same kind as a pattern forming the combination of the ready-to-win patterns is stop-displayed in the remaining variable display area. machine.

According to feature A19, it is possible to execute a series of effects using variable display of patterns during the period before the predetermined effective period starts, the predetermined effective period, and the period during which the variable entry control is executed. . In addition, when the predetermined valid period starts, the reach variation display is started, and when the opportunity to grant the privilege occurs, the combination of the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed. It becomes possible to notify using the aspect of.

Feature A20. A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( a function of executing the processes of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92;
Predetermined operation means (vibration means) is provided so that when the predetermined unit motion is started and the predetermined unit motion is terminated, the operation content corresponds to whether or not the privilege giving opportunity occurs in the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed. predetermined operation control means for controlling the minute display unit 42c) (function for executing the processes of steps S905, S1001, S1101, S1201, S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A20, the operation means for informing that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, the state in which the variable ball entry control is being executed, and the presence/absence of the privilege giving opportunity. are separately provided as specific operation means and predetermined operation means. Thus, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the predetermined effective period and including the predetermined effective period, each period can be individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. can be done.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to characteristic A20, wherein the predetermined action control means starts the predetermined unit action when the predetermined valid period starts.

According to feature A21, the manager of the gaming hall can clearly grasp whether or not the predetermined validity period has started by confirming whether or not the predetermined unit action has started in the predetermined action means. .

Feature A22. The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the specific action control means terminates the specific unit action before the predetermined valid period starts.

According to feature A22, the result of the specific lottery process is notified by the specific action means before the predetermined effective period starts. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the predetermined validity period that occurs thereafter is valid by checking the specific action means.

Feature A23. a first control means (main side MPU 92) having the predetermined lottery means, the specific lottery means, and the privilege provision means;
Second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the specific effect means based on information transmitted by the first control means;
with
The game machine according to any one of features A20 to A22, wherein the first control means has the specific action control means and the predetermined action control means.

According to feature A23, since the specific action means and the predetermined action means are directly controlled by the first control means, it is possible to improve the reliability of the contents of the specific action means and the predetermined action means. On the other hand, since the specific effect means is controlled by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

Feature A24. The privilege granting means is provided when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in a state in which the variable ball entry control triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery processing becoming the non-specific result, and when the predetermined lottery processing is performed. Characteristic features A2 through A2, characterized in that the awarding mode of the privilege is different from when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in a state where the variable entrance control triggered by the result becoming the specified result is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of A23.

According to the feature A24, the manner in which the privilege is granted when the privilege granting opportunity occurs differs depending on whether the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result or a specific result. Even if the processing result is a non-specific result, the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, and if the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the state where the variable entry control is executed, the privilege is given. It is possible to make a difference corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process also in the content of the privilege in the given configuration.

Feature A25. Based on the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity, a specific game state in which the variable ball entry means or a variable ball entry means different from it is in an open state occurs after that as the award of the privilege,
The privilege granting means, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result and the privilege grant opportunity is generated, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result and the privilege grant opportunity is generated, The gaming machine according to feature A24, characterized in that the minimum time required until the specific gaming state ends is differentiated.

According to the feature A25, the specific game state ends when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result and a privilege grant opportunity occurs and when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a specific result and a privilege grant opportunity occurs. Due to the difference in the minimum time required to reach, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two in terms of the appearance of the action contents of the game.

Feature A26. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is in the open state in the specific game state, means (payout device 86, payout control device 87),
The privilege granting means generates the specified gaming state when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs, and the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specified result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs. Compared to the case where the shooting operation is performed in the same manner, the expected number of grant targets in the specific game state is made to be about the same. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein:

According to the characteristic A26, when a specific game state occurs, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an advantage or a disadvantage according to the result of the predetermined lottery process with respect to the grant number of the grant target in the specific game state.

Feature A27. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the specified result and the privilege granting opportunity is generated in the specific game state due to the fact that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the non-specific result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A26, characterized in that the minimum time required to finish the game is made longer than the specific game state due to the occurrence of a.

According to the feature A27, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends is longer, so that It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity is legitimate.

Feature A28. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the specified result and the privilege granting opportunity is generated in the specific game state due to the fact that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the non-specific result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A27, characterized in that the period during which the variable ball entry means to be opened in the specific game state is maintained in the closed state is longer than in the specific game state due to the occurrence of .

According to the feature A28, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends is lengthened while not affecting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state. becomes possible.

For the configuration of features A1 to A28, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning a prize to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a specific period (distribution execution mode) or a period that allows the specific period to start (distribution a specific lottery means (a function of executing steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a prize winning valid period of the through prize winning section 35;
A predetermined lottery for executing a predetermined lottery process when a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning a prize in a through prize winning section 35 for distribution) occurs based on a game operation of a player after the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result. means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1003 and S1004 in the main MPU 92; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1802 and S1803 in the main MPU 92);
a specific period setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1107 in the main side MPU 92) for performing the specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when the lottery result of the specific lottery process is the winning result, the lottery result of the specific lottery process is not the specific period corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. After that, a specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process executed by the generation of the predetermined lottery opportunity based on the game operation of the player is performed. As a result, in a situation in which the occurrence of the specific period is confirmed, the player performs the game operation while expecting that the content of the specific period will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entering portion (distribution through winning portion 35).

According to the feature B2, since the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, in the configuration for generating the predetermined lottery opportunity based on the game operation of the player, the predetermined lottery opportunity It is possible to clarify the occurrence conditions.

Feature B3. After the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result, a predetermined valid period (a winning valid period for the distribution through prize winning section 35) is generated,
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during a period different from the predetermined effective period, the The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein a predetermined lottery process is not executed.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to limit the situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry portion triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and even though the result of the specific lottery process is not the winning result. It is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery process from being executed without fail.

Feature B4. When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, either the game ball or the usable game ball number information is provided in either the predetermined effective period or a period different from the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to feature B3, further comprising means (a payout device 86, a payout control device 87) for awarding an object to the player.

According to the feature B4, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering portion, the grant mode is given to the player even if it is a period different from the predetermined effective period, so the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering portion. It is possible to give a profit to the player for the occurrence of the entry of the ball.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period setting means starts the specific period when the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to the feature B5, the predetermined lottery opportunity can be set not only as the execution timing of the predetermined lottery process but also as the start timing of the specific period. As a result, it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game content compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, further comprising result notification means (distribution display section 42c) for notifying information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.

According to feature B6, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B7. a first control means (main side MPU 92) having the specific lottery means, the predetermined lottery means, and the specific period setting means;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the result notification means is controlled by the first control means.

According to feature B7, it is possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification means.

Feature B8. A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( A gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92.

According to feature B8, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notification means. are provided separately as As a result, each content can be individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means.

Feature B9. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit production is started, and when the specific period is executed after that, the specific production means (symbol display device) is arranged so that the specific unit production is continued during the specific period. 44) is provided with a means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the gaming machine according to feature B8.

According to feature B9, a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the specific period and including the specific period, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of the effects during these periods. In addition, in the configuration in which a series of effects including before the start of the specific period and during the specific period are executed by the specific effect means in this way, each content can be individually monitored by checking the specific action means and the result notification means. can be done.

Feature B10. The game machine according to any one of features B6 to B9, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is started when the specific period is started.

According to feature B10, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process at the start of the specific period.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is continued during the specific period.

According to the feature B11, it is possible to grasp the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process by checking the result reporting means at any timing of the specific period.

Feature B12. variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
with
The specific period is a period during which the variable entrance control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the privilege granting opportunity is generated by a game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature B12, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For the configuration of features B1 to B12, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. In a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player receives a privilege (transition to the opening and closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation. (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92) for providing the
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 and a function to execute the processing of step S1306);
with
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (the processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit action depending on whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the feature C1, the privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity during the specific period, so that the player performs the game operation while expecting the privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the predetermined unit action is performed by the predetermined action means during the specific period, so that it is possible to ascertain whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined action means. In addition, in a configuration in which a privilege may or may not be granted depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs during a specific period, a predetermined The execution mode of the unit operation changes. As a result, the predetermined unit motion can function not only as the motion for notifying the specific period, but also as the motion for notifying whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred during the specific period.

Feature C2. A first control means (main side MPU 92) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The first control means is
In a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player receives a privilege (transition to the opening and closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation. (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92) for providing the
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 and a function to execute the processing of step S1306);
with
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (the processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit action depending on whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the characteristic C2, the privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity during the specific period, so that the player performs the game operation while expecting the privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the predetermined unit action is performed by the predetermined action means during the specific period, so that it is possible to ascertain whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined action means. In addition, in a configuration in which a privilege may or may not be granted depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs during a specific period, a predetermined The execution mode of the unit operation changes. Thereby, it is possible to make the predetermined unit action function not only as an action for notifying the specific period, but also as an action for notifying whether or not a privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period.

Further, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means for executing processing for controlling the execution of the effect, the predetermined operation means is the second control means. is directly controlled by the first control means instead of This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the contents of the predetermined operating means.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the mode determining means makes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit action is terminated correspond to whether or not the privilege giving opportunity occurs during the specific period. .

According to feature C3, it is possible to ascertain whether or not a privilege provision opportunity has occurred during a specific period by checking the notification result when the predetermined unit motion is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of confirmation when confirming whether or not the opportunity to provide the privilege has occurred, based on the content of the predetermined operation means, an easy-to-understand timing.

Feature C4. The specific period is configured to continue until a termination condition is satisfied even if the privilege grant opportunity occurs,
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the predetermined motion control means terminates the predetermined unit motion when the specific period ends.

According to feature C4, the specific period continues even if the privilege grant opportunity occurs, so that the period during which the specific period is executed does not fluctuate according to the occurrence timing of the privilege grant opportunity. It becomes possible. Further, since the predetermined unit action ends when the specific period ends, it is possible to grasp the end timing of the specific period by checking the predetermined action means.

Feature C5. The mode determination means makes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit action is terminated correspond to whether or not the privilege provision opportunity occurs during the specific period,
The gaming machine is provided with notification executing means (display-side MPU 113) for executing notification corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the specific period. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized by:

According to the feature C5, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege provision opportunity has occurred in a specific period by checking the notification result when the predetermined unit motion is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of confirmation when confirming whether or not the opportunity to provide the privilege has occurred, based on the content of the predetermined operation means, an easy-to-understand timing. On the other hand, when a privilege giving opportunity occurs during a specific period, the corresponding notification is executed, so that the player can easily grasp that the privilege giving opportunity has occurred.

Feature C6. Means for starting the specific period (step S1104 ~ a function to execute the processing of step S1107),
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined action control means starts the predetermined unit action when the predetermined valid period starts.

According to feature C6, it is also possible to notify that the predetermined effective period is reached by using the predetermined unit operation.

Feature C7. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning a prize in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, the specific period or a period that allows the specific period to start (distribution through winning unit 35 a specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a winning valid period (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( a function of executing the processes of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C7, the operation means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the operation means for notifying that it is the specific period and the presence or absence of the privilege giving opportunity. are separately provided as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. This makes it possible to individually monitor each period by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means.

Feature C8. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit production is started, and when the specific period is executed after that, the specific production means (symbol display device) is arranged so that the specific unit production is continued during the specific period. 44) is provided with means (display side MPU 113).

According to the feature C8, a series of effects including before the start of the specific period and during the specific period are executed by the specific effect means, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of the effects during these periods. In addition, in the configuration in which a series of effects including before the start of the specific period and during the specific period are executed by the specific effect means in this way, each period can be individually monitored by checking the specific action means and the predetermined action means. can be done.

Feature C9. variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
with
The specific period is a period during which the variable entrance control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the privilege granting opportunity is generated by a game ball that enters the variable ball entering means.

According to the characteristic C9, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 or the feature C2 is provided, and the specific unit action is executed by the specific action means during the specific period, thereby clarifying that it is the specific period and that the privilege provision opportunity has occurred. It is possible to grasp the

For the configuration of features C1 to C9, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. In a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player receives a privilege (transition to the opening and closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation. (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92) that provides
As the specific period, at least a first specific period (first distribution execution mode) and a second specific period (second distribution execution mode) are set so that the degree of expectation for occurrence of the privilege provision opportunity is different. cage,
The privilege granting means is characterized in that the mode of granting the privilege differs between when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the first specific period and when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the second specific period. game machine.

According to the feature D1, the privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity during the specific period, so that the player performs the game operation while expecting the privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as the specific period, there are a first specific period and a second specific period so that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the opportunity to give the privilege is different. As a result, the specific period is diversified in relation to the degree of expectation of occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity, and from this point as well, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this case, the mode of granting the privilege differs between when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the first specific period and when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the second specific period. As a result, it is possible to not only differ the degree of expectation of occurrence of the privilege provision opportunity between the first specific period and the second specific period, but also make it possible to differentiate the awarding mode of the privilege to be provided when the privilege provision opportunity occurs. , the difference between the first specific period and the second specific period can be clarified.

Feature D2. Based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity, a specific game state (opening and closing execution mode) in which the predetermined variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 37) is opened after that is generated as the privilege is given. ,
The privilege granting means, when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the second specific period, until the specific game state ends The game machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the required time is made different.

According to the feature D2, the minimum time required to end the specific game state differs between when the privilege grant opportunity occurs during the first specified period and when the privilege grant opportunity occurs during the second specified period. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two in terms of the appearance of the action contents of the game.

Feature D3. Means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving to the player a given object, which is either a game ball or usable game ball number information, when a game ball enters the predetermined variable ball entry means. prepared,
The privilege giving means fires in the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity in the first specific period and the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity in the second specific period. Characteristic feature D2, characterized in that the number of grants of the grant target expected in the specific game state is about the same as compared with the case where the operation is performed in the same manner. game machine.

According to the feature D3, when the specific game state occurs, regarding the number of grant targets in the specific game state, there is no advantage or disadvantage according to the type of the specific period that triggered the occurrence of the specific game state. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature D4. The second specific period is configured to have a lower degree of expectation that the privilege grant opportunity will occur than the first specific period,
The privilege giving means is such that the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the second specific period is higher than the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the first specific period , the gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized by lengthening the minimum time required until the game ends.

According to the feature D4, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the occurrence of the second specific period, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends becomes longer, so the privilege grant opportunity occurs. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to check whether the game is legitimate or not.

Feature D5. The privilege giving means is such that the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the second specific period is higher than the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the first specific period , The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the period during which the variable ball entry means to be opened in the specific game state is maintained in the closed state is lengthened.

According to feature D5, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends is lengthened while not affecting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state. becomes possible.

Feature D6. variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
with
The specific period is a period during which the variable entrance control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the privilege granting opportunity is generated by a game ball that enters the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature D6, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For the configuration of features D1 to D6, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (function of executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, function of executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (situation where the probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability changing means capable of producing a situation with a probability different from 6 and the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main side MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process can vary, and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which each lottery process is executed. In addition, both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the case of a predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process fluctuate at the same time, and the content of the game that progresses through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. can be made very different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. Predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the specific lottery result in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature E2, in order to provide the predetermined privilege, at least the first lottery process must result in a predetermined lottery result and the second lottery process must result in a specific lottery result. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes for targets that the player who expects to receive the predetermined privilege pays attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process affects the probability of giving a predetermined privilege. In this case, the configuration of feature E1 is provided, and both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can be different from those in the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to diversify the provision probabilities of the predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. In addition, it is possible to largely change the provision probability of the predetermined privilege without largely changing the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature E2, the second lottery process may be triggered only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, a specific lottery result must be obtained in the second lottery process in order to provide the predetermined privilege, and a predetermined lottery result must be obtained in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the first lottery process.

Feature E3. Characteristic feature E1 or E2, characterized in that at least one of the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process has three or more types. game machine.

According to feature E3, at least one of the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are present in three or more types, so that the probability of each lottery process is determined. Along with being able to diversify, it is also possible to diversify the combination probability of those lottery processes.

Feature E4. The probability changing means determines the predetermined lottery result in a plurality of kinds of lottery processes, including the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the probability is varied so that an increase in the combined probability of the probability of becoming equal to the combined probability in the predetermined situation is up to a predetermined increase.

According to feature E4, in a configuration in which both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuate, a plurality of types of lottery processes including them can provide a predetermined lottery result. It is possible to prevent the combination probability of the probability of obtaining a lottery result from becoming extremely higher than in the case of a predetermined situation.

Feature E5. The probability changing means changes the target probability, which is one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process, to the other in the plurality of types of lottery processes. Correcting means for correcting according to the probability of the lottery process (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2307 in the main MPU 92, in the sixth embodiment, the processing of steps S2505 and S2605 in the main MPU 92 function to execute (in the seventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S2708 and S2808 in the main side MPU 92)).

According to feature E5, by correcting the target probability according to the probabilities of other lottery processes, the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different. Even if it is the structure which fluctuates to , it becomes possible to make the amount of increase with respect to the said combination probability in the predetermined situation to the predetermined amount of increase.

Feature E6. The probability varying means varies both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process when a predetermined variation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to feature E6, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuate together.

Feature E7. The probability variation means is
a first variation means (a function of executing a first game state transition process in the main side MPU 92) for varying the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process based on the occurrence of the first opportunity;
a second variation means (a function of executing a second game state transition process in the main side MPU 92) for varying the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process based on the occurrence of the second opportunity;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E7, a situation in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process fluctuates and a situation in which the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result fluctuates in the second lottery process separately occur. This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized by having at least one of the following configuration (1) and the following configuration (2).
(1) The first variation means is configured such that, in the first lottery process, the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or a situation in which the first opportunity occurs a predetermined number of times. It has a means for continuing until (the function of executing the processing of steps S2701 and S2711 in the main side MPU 92).
(2) The second variation means determines that the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or the situation that the second opportunity occurs a specific number of times. It has a means for continuing until (the function of executing the processing of steps S2801 and S2811 in the main side MPU 92).

According to feature E8, at least one of the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process continues to a certain extent in which the probability is different from the probability in the predetermined situation. becomes possible. This makes it possible to continue the situation in which the probability fluctuates to some extent.

In addition, in the feature E8, the configuration may include means for varying the predetermined number of times or means for varying the specific number of times. In this case, it is possible to diversify the mode of continuation of the situation in which the probability fluctuates.

Feature E9. The first variation means causes the situation in which the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process is or can be different from the probability in the predetermined situation, to continue until the first opportunity occurs a predetermined number of times. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2701 and S2711 in the main MPU 92),
The second variation means causes the situation in which the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or can be, to continue until the second opportunity occurs a specific number of times. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2801 and S2811 in the main MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are or can be different numbers of times.

According to feature E9, it is possible to continue to some extent the situation in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different from the probability in the predetermined situation. . This makes it possible to continue the situation in which the probability fluctuates to some extent. In addition, since the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are different or may be different times, even if the duration of the situation in which the probability fluctuates in one of the first lottery process and the second lottery process has ended, Regardless, it is possible to continue the situation in which the probability fluctuates for the other. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the fluctuation modes of the respective probabilities, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature E10. The probability changing means sets one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process to be higher than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation. A gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics E1 to E9, characterized in that it can cause a situation in which the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the given situation is higher than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the given situation.

According to feature E10, one of the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process is more favorable than the predetermined situation and the other is less favorable than the predetermined situation. It is possible to generate This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

Feature E11. Notification corresponding to one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is executed, and notification corresponding to the other is not executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2211 in the main side MPU 92, sound and light side MPU 103).

According to the feature E11, while the notification corresponding to one of the probabilities is executed, the notification corresponding to the other is not executed, so that the content of the notification is confirmed while grasping the part of the lottery probability. It is possible to create a situation that predicts the lottery probability of the part. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the manner of paying attention to the game in relation to each lottery probability, and to improve the interest in the game.

Feature E12. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (function of executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, function of executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (situation where the probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability changing means capable of producing a situation with a probability different from 6 and the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main side MPU 92);
Predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the specific lottery result in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E12, the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process can vary, and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which each lottery process is executed. In addition, both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the case of a predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process fluctuate at the same time, and the content of the game that progresses through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. can be made very different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in order to provide a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in at least the first lottery process and a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes for targets that the player who expects to receive the predetermined privilege pays attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process affects the probability of giving a predetermined privilege. In this case, both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can be different from those in the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to diversify the provision probabilities of the predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. In addition, it is possible to largely change the provision probability of the predetermined privilege without largely changing the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature E12, the second lottery process may be executed only when the first lottery process results in the predetermined lottery result. In this case, a specific lottery result must be obtained in the second lottery process in order to provide the predetermined privilege, and a predetermined lottery result must be obtained in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the first lottery process.

For the configuration of features E1 to E12, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the winning/failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
Probability changing means (steps S2705 to S2708 or steps S2805 to S2808 in main side MPU 92) capable of creating a situation in which the probability of special lottery result in the special lottery process is different from the predetermined situation functions to perform) and
a return means (a function of executing step S2712 or step S2812 in the main MPU 92) for restoring the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to the probability in the predetermined situation when the return condition is satisfied;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of return conditions exist.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the probability of obtaining the special lottery result in the special lottery process returns to the probability in the predetermined situation. As a result, if the probability of a special lottery result is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the return condition makes it difficult for the player to return to the predetermined situation. A player expects a return condition that makes it easy to return to the predetermined situation if the situation is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. After setting the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to be different from the predetermined situation, if a special opportunity occurs in a situation where the return condition is not satisfied, the special lottery The gaming machine of feature F1, wherein the resulting probabilities are variable.

According to the feature F2, the probability of obtaining a special lottery result can change even in a situation where the return condition for returning to the probability in the predetermined situation is not satisfied, so that the setting mode of the probability is diversified, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F3. The probability changing means is capable of generating a situation in which the probability of a special lottery result in the special lottery process is different from a predetermined situation when a special opportunity occurs, and in the special lottery process, the The situation in which the probability of a special lottery result is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or can be, continues until the special opportunity occurs a special number of times,
The return condition is satisfied as at least one condition that the special opportunity has occurred the special number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein there are a plurality of types of the special numbers.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the situation in which the probability of obtaining a special lottery result varies from the probability in the predetermined situation. In this case, for example, if the probability of obtaining a special lottery result is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the number of times that the situation in which the probability fluctuates will continue for a long time will be selected. If the probability of obtaining a lottery result is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the number of continuations in which the situation in which the probability fluctuates does not continue will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For the configuration of features F1 to F3, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the winning/failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
Selection means for selecting the probability of obtaining a special lottery result in the special lottery process from among three or more types of probability A function to execute processing, and a function to execute the first game state transition processing and the second game state transition processing in the main side MPU 92 in the sixth and seventh embodiments). game machine.

According to the feature G1, since there are three or more types of probabilities of special lottery results, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the probabilities, and to improve the interest of the game.

For the configuration of feature G1, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, and feature I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 222) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state (a function of executing a large winning opening opening and closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
an end executing means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control unit 260) for terminating the predetermined game state by closing the variable ball entry means when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
Means for changing the end condition (in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3504 to S3514 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, in the tenth embodiment, the processing of step S3716 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. In the twelfth embodiment, the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 executes the processing of step S4412. Function, in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4603 to S4610 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260, in the fourteenth embodiment, executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4817 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 Function, in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5113 to S5116 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260, in the sixteenth embodiment, executing the processing of steps S5510 to S5515 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, since the end condition that triggers the end of the predetermined game state changes, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the end condition as well as whether or not the end condition is satisfied.

Feature H2. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 222) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state (a function of executing a large winning opening opening and closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
End execution means (main control) for closing the variable ball entry means and ending the predetermined game state by closing the variable ball entry means when the game balls of the end trigger number (count number) enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the device 260;
Number difference means (main controller in the ninth embodiment) that allows the number of end triggers to differ between the predetermined game state executed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined game state executed at a different timing In the tenth embodiment, the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 performs the processing of step S3716, and in the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H2, the number of end triggers can be different between a predetermined game state executed at a predetermined timing and a predetermined game state executed at a different timing. This makes it possible to raise the degree of attention to the number of termination triggers.

Feature H3. Means for shifting the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win/fail determination process) is a predetermined winning result (the function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 ),
A configuration in which the predetermined game state can occur multiple times in the specific game state,
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the number difference means makes it possible for the number of end triggers to differ among a plurality of the predetermined game states included in one specific game state.

Here, if the number of end triggers is the same among a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state, when a small number of end triggers is set, a predetermined game state with a large number of end triggers is generated. It becomes impossible to execute the predetermined game state while expecting to play. In that respect, according to the feature H3, the number of end triggers can be different between a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state. Therefore, even if a small number of end triggers is set, it is possible to execute the predetermined game state while expecting the occurrence of a predetermined game state with a large number of end triggers.

Feature H4. The number difference means is a number information group (count number distribution table A , B, C, and D) to set the number of end triggers for each of the predetermined game states.

According to the feature H4, by referring to the number information group, it is possible to set information on the number of end triggers set for each of a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process of setting information on the number of end triggers set for each of a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state.

Feature H5. A plurality of types of the predetermined winning results are set,
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the number differing means varies the setting mode of the number of end triggers for the predetermined game state included in the specific game state according to the type of the predetermined winning result.

According to the feature H5, the setting mode of the number of end triggers differs depending on the type of the predetermined winning result. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the types of predetermined winning results.

Feature H6. As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (normal jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable variable jackpot result),
In each of the specific game state executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific game state executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained, the number difference means The end trigger number of the predetermined game state of predetermined execution times including at least the first execution time is the specific game state which is executed with any of the first predetermined winning result and the second predetermined winning result as a trigger. The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized in that it is set in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to identify whether there is one.

According to the feature H6, the number of end triggers of the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution times including at least the first execution time is the specific game state executed with any of the first predetermined winning result and the second predetermined winning result as a trigger. It is set in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to identify whether it is. As a result, it is possible to execute the predetermined game state while making the player expect that the specific game state will be executed with the predetermined winning result desired by the player as a trigger.

Feature H7. The number difference means makes the total number of the end trigger numbers set in each of the plurality of predetermined game states in each specific game state between one specific game state and another specific game state the same. However, the game machine according to any one of features H3 to H6, wherein the number of end triggers of at least some of the predetermined game states included in these specific game states is made different.

According to the feature H7, it is possible to diversify the mode of the specific game state by allowing the setting mode of the number of end triggers of the predetermined game state to be different between the plurality of specific game states. In addition, even if the setting mode of the number of end triggers in the predetermined game state can be different in this way, the total number of end triggers between a plurality of specific game states is the same, so that the specific game state is advantageous. It is possible to obtain the above-described effects while not giving a difference in the power.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics H2 to H7, wherein the number difference means determines the number of end triggers by lottery.

According to feature H8, since the number of termination triggers is determined by lottery, it is possible to expect that the number of termination triggers will increase.

Feature H9. Means for shifting the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win/fail determination process) is a predetermined winning result (the function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 ),
The predetermined game state (round game) can occur multiple times in the specific game state,
The gaming machine according to feature H8, wherein the number difference means determines by lottery the number of end triggers for each of the plurality of predetermined game states included in the specific game state.

According to the feature H9, the number of end triggers for each of the plurality of predetermined game states included in the specific game state is determined by lottery. Therefore, even if the number of end triggers for one predetermined game state is reduced, it is possible to expect that the number of end triggers for the next predetermined game state to be executed will be increased.

Feature H10. The number difference means is
Distributing lottery objects, which are either game balls or objects thrown in by the throwing means, to any of a plurality of types of target areas (first hole 351, second hole 352, third hole 353). means (clone 350);
number setting means for setting the number corresponding to the type of the target area to which the lottery object is distributed as the end trigger number (function for executing the process of step S3716 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The gaming machine according to feature H8 or H9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H10, it is possible to perform a physical lottery using the sorting means. In this case, since the lottery result is derived without using the internal lottery, it is possible to increase interest in the lottery operation using the lottery object.

Feature H11. A configuration in which the lottery object is supplied to the sorting means when a sortable condition is satisfied,
The number setting means sets the number equal to or smaller than the smallest number among the numbers corresponding to the type of the target area to the end when the condition for setting the end trigger number is not met. The gaming machine according to feature H10, characterized in that it is set as the number of opportunities.

According to the feature H11, if the distribution possible condition is not satisfied in the situation where the number of end triggers is set, the number equal to or smaller than the smallest number among the numbers corresponding to the type of the target area is set as the number of end triggers. , it is possible to make the player want to establish the distribution possible condition at any cost. This makes it possible to attract players to the game.

Feature H12. Means for shifting the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win/fail determination process) is a predetermined winning result (the function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 ),
A configuration in which the predetermined game state can occur multiple times in the specific game state,
The number difference means is
The derivation trigger number, which is either the total number of the end trigger numbers set in each of the plurality of predetermined game states in one specific game state and the number that can be derived from the total number, is defined as the derivation trigger number Derivation trigger determination means (function for executing the processing of step S4004 in MPU 262 of main controller 260) that determines that is different between a plurality of the specific gaming states,
Number deriving means (step S4007 in MPU 262 of main control unit 260) for deriving the number of ending triggers for each of the plurality of predetermined gaming states included in the specific gaming state from the number of deriving triggers determined by the deriving trigger determining means. function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H12, the number of end triggers for each of the predetermined game states included in the specific game state is derived from the number of triggers for trigger determined by the trigger trigger means. As a result, the game machine does not have to store all the end trigger numbers set for each of the predetermined game states, so that the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Feature H13. The gaming machine according to feature H12, wherein the number deriving means makes the number of end triggers the same among a plurality of the predetermined game states included in one specific game state.

Here, if the number of end triggers differs among a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of withdrawal triggers determined by the withdrawal trigger determining means. . In that respect, according to the feature H13, since the number of termination triggers is the same among a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state, the player can grasp the number of withdrawal triggers determined by the withdrawal trigger determination means. It is possible to make it easier to

Feature H14. Means for executing an increase process for increasing the number of game balls usable by the player by a predetermined number when one game ball enters the variable ball entry means (a step in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 S4405 to step S4406 function) is provided,
The game according to feature H12 or H13, wherein the number of withdrawal opportunities is a number assuming a total increase in the number of usable game balls due to the increase process in one specific game state. machine.

According to the feature H14, even if one of the number of derivation opportunities is selected by the derivation opportunity determination means, the end assuming the total increase in the number of usable game balls by the increase processing in one specific game state It is possible to derive the trigger number.

Feature H15. As the specific game state, a first specific game state (the upper limit of the number of rounds is 1R) in which the number of executions of the predetermined game state is the first number, and a second specific game state in which the number of times the predetermined game state is executed is the second number The game state (the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R) is set,
Any one of the characteristics H12 to H14, wherein the withdrawal opportunity determination means can determine a predetermined number as the number of withdrawal opportunities in any of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H15, the same number of derivation opportunities can be selected even between specific game states in which the number of executions of the predetermined game state is different. As a result, it is possible to obtain substantially the same profit even between specific game states in which the number of executions of the predetermined game state is different. In addition, in a specific game state in which the number of executions of the predetermined game state is small, the number of triggers for ending the predetermined game state increases, so that it is possible to give unexpectedness.

Feature H16. The gaming machine according to any one of features H12 to H15, wherein the withdrawal opportunity determination means determines the number of the withdrawal opportunities by lottery.

According to the feature H16, since the number of derivation opportunities is determined by lottery, it is possible to expect that the number of derivation opportunities will increase.

Feature H17. As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (normal jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable variable jackpot result),
The derivation opportunity determination means is the specific game state executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific game state executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature H16, wherein a lottery for the number of derivation opportunities is performed so as to provide different lottery modes.

According to the characteristic H17, the lottery mode of the number of derivation opportunities differs according to the type of the predetermined winning result. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the types of predetermined winning results.

Feature H18. Means for shifting the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win/fail determination process) is a predetermined winning result (the function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 ),
A configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs in the specific game state,
As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (normal jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable variable jackpot result),
The number difference means differs between the specific game state executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific game state executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H17, wherein the number of end triggers is determined so as to achieve a determination mode.

According to the feature H18, the manner of determination when determining the number of end triggers differs according to the type of the predetermined winning result. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the types of predetermined winning results.

Feature H19. The game machine according to feature H18, wherein the predetermined game state occurs only once in the specific game state.

According to the feature H19, in a configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs only once in the specific game state, the number of termination triggers for the predetermined game state fluctuates, so that the amount of variation in the number of termination triggers can be increased. , it is possible to give unexpectedness.

For the configuration of features H1 to H19, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 222) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state (a function of executing a large winning opening opening and closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
an end executing means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control unit 260) for terminating the predetermined game state by closing the variable ball entry means when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
Means for allowing the timing at which the end condition is established to be varied (in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3504 to S3514 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260; in the tenth embodiment, the main controller 260 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing in steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, and in the twelfth embodiment, the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 , the function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4814 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the 14th embodiment, and the step S5113 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the 15th embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S5116, a function of executing the processing of steps S5510 to S5515 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the 16th embodiment, and a step S5701 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the 17th embodiment ~ a function to execute the processing of step S5704);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, the timing at which the end condition is met can vary. As a result, it is possible to execute the predetermined game state while anticipating that the period until the end condition is satisfied will be longer.

Feature I2. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 222) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state (a function of executing a large winning opening opening and closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
an end execution means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control unit 260) for terminating the predetermined game state by closing the variable ball entry means when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
End lottery means for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied or the content of the end condition by end lottery (in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4412 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, in the fourteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4814 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I2, whether or not the termination condition is established or the content of the termination condition is determined by the termination lottery. In this case, the player cannot grasp the timing at which the predetermined game state ends or the content of the termination conditions. As a result, when the completion lottery determines whether or not the end condition is established, the player can be excited for a long period of time as to whether or not the predetermined game state continues, and the content of the end condition is determined by the end lottery. In this case, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the content of the end condition.

Feature I3. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 222) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state (a function of executing a large winning opening opening and closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
an end execution means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control unit 260) for terminating the predetermined game state by closing the variable ball entry means when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
Termination lottery means for determining whether or not the termination condition is satisfied by an end lottery (in the twelfth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4412 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260; in the 14th embodiment, the A function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4814 in the MPU 262);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I3, whether or not the termination condition is met is determined by a termination lottery. In this case, the player cannot grasp the timing when the predetermined game state ends. As a result, it is possible to make the player excited for a long period of time as to whether or not the predetermined game state will continue.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the termination lottery means executes the termination lottery when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means.

According to the feature I4, the termination lottery is executed when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. As a result, the player is given a sense of tension that whether or not the termination condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means and a sense of expectation that the termination condition is not satisfied. becomes possible.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the end lottery means executes the end lottery each time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means.

According to feature I5, the end lottery is executed each time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make the player excited as to whether or not the predetermined game state will continue each time the game ball enters the variable ball entering means.

Feature I6. The termination lottery means is arranged so that the probability of the completion of the termination condition corresponds to the time required from when one game ball enters the variable ball entering means until when the next game ball enters. Second, the game machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the end lottery is executed.

According to feature I6, the probability that the termination condition is met corresponds to the time required from when one game ball enters the variable ball entering means until the next game ball enters. Since the player wants to grasp the probability that the end condition is satisfied, the possibility of constantly grasping the time required from the entry of one game ball to the entry of the next game ball into the variable ball entry means. is high. The player is made to concentrate on a predetermined game state for a long period of time by constantly grasping the time required from the entry of one game ball to the entry of the next game ball into a variable entry means. becomes possible.

Feature I7. The ending lottery means has a higher probability that the ending condition is met as the time required from the entry of one game ball into the variable ball entering means to the entry of the next game ball becomes longer. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I6, wherein the end lottery is executed as follows.

According to feature I7, the longer the time required from when one game ball enters the variable ball entering means until when the next game ball enters, the higher the probability that the termination condition will be met. In this case, there is a high possibility that the player will play the game so as to shorten the time required from when one game ball enters the variable ball entering means until when the next game ball enters. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state from being unnecessarily long by preventing the variable ball-entering means from being in the open state for a long period of time.

Feature I8. Means (step in MPU 262 of main controller 260) for preventing the completion condition from being established until the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means after the start of the predetermined game state reaches the number of lottery triggers function of executing the processing of S4409).

Here, even if the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means after the start of the predetermined game state does not reach the number of lottery triggers, there is a possibility that the end condition will be satisfied. The state may end quickly. In this case, the player feels frustrated that the predetermined game state has ended so quickly. In this respect, according to feature I8, the end condition is not established until the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means after the start of the predetermined game state reaches the lottery trigger number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the predetermined game state ends immediately. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration caused by the rapid termination of the predetermined game state.

Feature I9. Means for shifting the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win/fail determination process) is a predetermined winning result (the function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 ),
A configuration in which the predetermined game state occurs in the specific game state,
As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (normal jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable variable jackpot result),
The end lottery means differs between the specific game state executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific game state executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I8, wherein the end lottery is executed so as to achieve a lottery mode.

According to feature I9, the lottery mode of the ending lottery differs depending on the type of the predetermined winning result. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the types of predetermined winning results.

Feature I10. Means for shifting the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win/fail determination process) is a predetermined winning result (the function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 ),
The game machine according to any one of features I3 to I9, wherein the predetermined game state occurs only once in the specific game state.

According to feature I10, it is not determined by lottery whether to open the variable ball-entering means after once closing the variable ball-entering means, but whether to continue the open state is determined by lottery. Since the open state is continued as it is when it is determined and the winning is continued, a waiting time is generated until the open state is resumed in the configuration in which whether or not to continue the open state is determined by lottery. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

For the configuration of features I1 to I10, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device 222) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 262 of main controller 260) for shifting game state to specific game state (open/close execution mode);
with
A game state in which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state, and a predetermined game state (round game), which is a game state in which the variable ball-entering means is in the closed state and ends when an end condition is satisfied, is the specified game state. It is a configuration that can occur multiple times in the game state,
When the continuation condition is satisfied, the gaming machine comprises a continuation means ( In the 14th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4810 to S4816 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, and in the 15th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5111 to S5116 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) with
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied can vary.

According to the feature J1, since the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is variable, it is possible to expect that the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied will be the highest.

Feature J2. The continuation means are
Continuation determination means for determining whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied after the predetermined game state of the predetermined number of executions is completed (in the fourteenth embodiment, steps S4810 to S4815 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 A function to execute processing, a function to execute the processing of steps S5111 to S5115 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fifteenth embodiment);
If the continuation determination means determines that the continuation condition is satisfied, the means for starting the predetermined game state of the next execution round (in the fourteenth embodiment, the processing of step S4816 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5116 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J2, the player is not informed whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied until the predetermined game state of the predetermined number of execution times is completed. It is possible to make the player's heart throb as to whether or not is established.

Feature J3. The game machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the specific game state does not set an upper limit for the number of times the predetermined game state is executed.

According to the feature J3, the upper limit of the number of executions of the predetermined game state is not set in the specific game state. In this case, the specific game state continues until the continuation condition is no longer satisfied. This makes it possible to expect that the continuation condition will continue to be satisfied.

Feature J4. Continuation probability setting means for setting the probability that the continuation condition is established to the probability corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means function).

According to the feature J4, the probability that the continuation condition is established is set to the probability corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

Feature J5. The continuation probability setting means sets the probability that the continuation condition for the predetermined game state of the next execution time is satisfied for the predetermined execution time to the variable ball entry in the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time. The gaming machine according to feature J4, characterized in that the probability is set corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the means.

According to the feature J5, the probability that the continuation condition for the predetermined game state of the next execution time is satisfied for the predetermined execution time is the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time. It is set to the probability corresponding to the ball outcome. As a result, it is possible to make the player excited as to whether or not the probability that the continuation condition will be met increases each time the predetermined game state is started.

Feature J6. Characteristic feature J4 or J5, characterized in that the continuation rate setting means tends to increase the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means increases. game machine.

According to the feature J6, the greater the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means, the higher the probability that the continuation condition is established. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of having a large number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means.

Feature J7. The variable ball entry means is configured such that a game ball entered by the variable ball entry means flows into either a specific area (passage for continuation 401) or an area (passage for counting 400) other than the specific area. and
According to any one of features J4 to J6, wherein the continuation rate setting means tends to increase the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied as the number of game balls entering the specific area increases. The game machine described.

According to the feature J7, it is possible to provide the player with the joy of winning the game ball in the variable ball entry means and the anticipation of the game ball entering the specific area.

Feature J8. The variable ball entering means is a guiding means (seesaw 390), the game machine according to feature J7.

According to the feature J8, it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area, but also to the guidance means. In addition, compared with the configuration in which the variable ball entering means does not have the guiding means, it is possible to entertain the process until the game ball enters the specific area.

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the continuation condition is satisfied based on the result of a game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature J9, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

Feature J10. The variable ball entry means makes it easy for the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means to flow into either a specific area (passage for continuation 401) or an area (passage for counting 400) other than the specific area. Provided with guidance means (seesaw 390) for guiding the game ball so that
A configuration in which the continuation condition is established by the game ball flowing into the specific area,
The gaming machine includes a variable means ( A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S5110 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 .

According to the feature J10, the period in which the guidance means is in the specific guidance state for guiding the game ball so that it is easier to flow into the specific area varies. As a result, it is possible to make the user expect that the period of time in which the specific induction state is set becomes longer. In addition, according to the feature J10, it is possible to vary the period of the specific induction state according to each predetermined game state, so it is possible to vary the probability that the continuation condition is established for each predetermined game state. .

Feature J11. The variable means is characterized by switching the guiding state of the guiding means during the predetermined game state according to the number of game balls entering the variable ball-entering means generated in one time of the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature J10.

According to the characteristic J11, the guidance state of the guidance means is switched in the middle of the predetermined game state according to the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means generated in one predetermined game state. Therefore, not only the winning number of game balls into the variable ball entry means in one predetermined game state, but also the operation of switching the guidance state of the guidance means in one predetermined game state and the number of times the switching operation occurs. can also be noticed.

Feature J12. The variation means is arranged such that the period in which the induction means is in the specific guidance state is longer in the predetermined game state that is the rear execution round than in the predetermined game state that is the front execution round. The gaming machine according to feature J10 or J11, characterized in that

According to the feature J12, the period during which the guidance means is in the specific guidance state is longer in the predetermined game state that is the later execution round than in the predetermined game state that is the front execution round. In this case, as the number of times the predetermined game state is executed increases, the predetermined game state tends to continue. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the predetermined game state continues a large number of times.

Feature J13. When the induction means is set to the specific induction state in one of the predetermined game states, the variation means sets the period of the specific induction state in the predetermined game state a plurality of times with a period of another induction state interposed. The gaming machine according to any one of features J10 to J12, characterized in that the period in which the specific induction state is to be generated is aggregated as one period and generated instead of being generated.

According to the feature J13, when the induction means is set to the specific induction state in one predetermined game state, the period of the specific induction state in the predetermined game state may be generated a plurality of times with other induction state periods interposed. Instead, the period during which the specific induction state occurs is aggregated and generated as one period. Here, since it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific area when the guidance means is in the specific guidance state than when the guidance means is in another guidance state, the guidance means is switched from the specific guidance state to another guidance state. In this case, the player feels frustrated. In the feature J13, the periods in which the specific guidance state occurs collectively occur as one period, so it is possible to minimize the number of times the guidance means changes from the specific guidance state to another guidance state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's frustration from increasing.

Feature J14. Features J1 to J13 characterized in that the continuation condition is established when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the predetermined number of execution times is equal to or greater than the continuation reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature J14, the continuation condition is established when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in a predetermined game state in a predetermined number of execution times is equal to or greater than the continuation reference number. In this case, the player can specify that the predetermined game state will continue when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the predetermined number of execution times becomes equal to or greater than the continuation reference number. becomes. Therefore, by setting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means that determines that the continuation condition is established, the player is given a sense of security for the continuation of the predetermined game state. becomes possible.

Feature J15. Characteristic J14, characterized in that the continuation reference number is equal to or greater than the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state in the execution time before the predetermined execution time. The game machine described.

According to the feature J15, the continuation reference number is set to a number equal to or greater than the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state in the execution time before the predetermined execution time. As a result, the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the predetermined game state of the current execution is greater than the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the predetermined game state of the previous execution. It is possible to cause the player to execute the predetermined game state while making him expect something.

Feature J16. Means for ending the predetermined game state when the end reference period has passed in the predetermined game state (function for executing the processing of steps S5506 and S5510 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260),
The gaming machine according to feature J15, characterized in that the end reference period is set longer in the predetermined game state that is the later execution round than in the predetermined game state that is the preceding execution round. .

According to the feature J16, the end reference period is longer in the predetermined game state that is the later execution round than in the predetermined game state that is the earlier execution round. In this case, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in a predetermined game state for a predetermined number of executions will be equal to or greater than the continuation reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit for the large number of times the predetermined game state has been executed.

Feature J17. Means for terminating the predetermined game state when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state (in the fourteenth embodiment, steps S4809 to S4810 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 In the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5109 and S5111 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260),
Features J1 to J16, characterized in that the continuation condition is satisfied when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the predetermined number of execution times exceeds the termination trigger number. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature J17, when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a predetermined game state of a predetermined execution time exceeds the end trigger number, the predetermined game state of the next execution time is surely started. be. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means in a predetermined game state in a predetermined number of execution times exceeds the number of termination triggers.

For the configuration of features J1 to J17, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A predetermined ball entry portion (upper operation port 223, lower operation port 224) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion (function for executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3008 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
Addition determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the addition correspondence information (in the eighteenth embodiment, the processing of steps S5801 to S5809 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 In the 19th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5911 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, In the 20th embodiment, the processing of steps S6001 to S6007 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 function) and
A state in which the game state is shifted to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination is a grant correspondence result in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. Transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 262 of main control device 260);
with
As modes of the grant determination, a low-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively low, a first high-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than that in the low-probability mode, and the grant correspondence result and a second high-probability mode having a higher probability than the first high-probability mode.

According to the feature K1, a plurality of high probability modes are set. This makes it possible to draw attention to which of the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode the current grant determination mode is.

Feature K2. When the result of the grant determination is a predetermined grant correspondence result (probability variable jackpot result B) among the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state is the first high probability mode. Means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5804 to S5805 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
When the result of the grant determination is a specific grant corresponding result (probability variable jackpot result A) among the grant corresponding results, the second high probability mode and the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state means (function for executing the processing of steps S5802 to S5803 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
The grant determination when a predetermined switching condition (the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 10 or more) is established in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the first high probability mode. The execution target mode is a high probability mode other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode, and the execution target mode of the grant determination is the second high probability mode. 20 times or more) is established, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to a high probability mode other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode. Means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5806 to S5807 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized by comprising:

If the first high-probability mode or the second high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is met, then before the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is met, I feel frustrated that I didn't get the grant response result. In this regard, according to the feature K2, when the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is met, the mode is changed to a high-probability mode other than the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress frustration caused by the fact that the provision correspondence result is not obtained before the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is satisfied.

Further, the switching conditions for changing to the high-probability mode other than the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode are different between the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode. there is This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the type of the grant correspondence result.

Feature K3. Execution of the grant determination is made to correspond to one game cycle in which the game cycle motion is started and ended in a state in which the motion result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is obtained. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for controlling the game turn execution means so that the game turn operation is executed,
The switching conditions are set such that the specific switching conditions are set such that the number of times of the game in which the corresponding high-probability mode continues increases or tends to increase more than the predetermined switching conditions. The gaming machine described in K2.

According to the feature K3, the switching condition is set such that the number of times the corresponding high-probability mode continues to be played increases or tends to increase under the specific switching condition as compared with the predetermined switching condition. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure the advantage for the fact that the result of the grant determination is the result corresponding to the specific grant.

Feature K4. When one of the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, the switching condition (the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "1" is "2") is established, the switching means (MPU 262 of the main controller 260 A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S6004 to S6006 in .

According to the characteristic K4, the high probability mode is maintained even if the execution target mode of the provision determination is switched. As a result, it is possible to change the setting state of the execution target mode of the grant determination while giving the player a sense of security that the high probability mode will continue.

Feature K5. Execution of the grant determination is made to correspond to one game cycle in which the game cycle motion is started and ended in a state in which the motion result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is obtained. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for controlling the game turn execution means so that the game turn operation is executed,
The switching means, when one of the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, when the game round of the switching reference number of times is executed, The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the other of the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode is set as the execution target mode of the grant determination when the switching condition is met.

According to the feature K5, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the trigger for switching the execution object mode of the grant determination while maintaining the situation of the high probability mode.

Feature K6. The switching means is
Means for setting the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state to the second high probability mode (processing for setting the first probability variable mode flag to the RAM 264 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
Means (main controller 260 A process of setting the second probability variable mode flag in the RAM 264 in the MPU 262);
The gaming machine according to feature K4 or K5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K6, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state is the second high probability mode with the highest probability of the grant correspondence result among the execution target modes of the grant determination. Here, the player desires that the grant determination result is reached as soon as possible. Therefore, by setting the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state to the second high probability mode with the highest probability of the grant correspondence result among the execution target modes of the grant determination, until the grant correspondence result is obtained It is possible to prevent the number of times the game is executed from becoming too large. This makes it possible to meet the needs of the players.

In addition, when the switching condition is established in a situation where the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, the execution target mode of the grant determination is switched from the second high probability mode to the first high probability mode. Since the probability of winning a jackpot is set lower in the first high-probability mode than in the second high-probability mode, it is possible to make the player think that he/she wants to achieve the awarding result at all costs before the switching condition is satisfied. becomes. This makes it possible to increase the player's concentration on the game.

Feature K7. When the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state becomes one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode, the grant determination when the switching condition is satisfied becomes the other of the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode, and the other mode after the switching is continued until the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K4 to K6, characterized by:

According to the feature K7, it is possible to change the setting state of the execution target mode of the grant determination while providing a sense of security that the high probability mode will continue until the grant determination result becomes the grant correspondence result.

Feature K8. As a mode of the grant determination, there is a third high-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than that of the second high-probability mode,
The game machine is
When the result of the grant determination is the first grant corresponding result (probability variable jackpot result A) among the grant corresponding results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state is the first high probability mode , means for setting a predetermined high-probability mode that is one of the second high-probability mode and the third high-probability mode (function for executing the processing of steps S5802 to S5803 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
When the result of the grant determination is the second grant corresponding result (probability variable jackpot result B) among the grant corresponding results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state is the first high probability mode means for setting a specific high-probability mode, which is one of the second high-probability mode and the third high-probability mode other than the predetermined high-probability mode (steps S5804 to S5805 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 function to execute the processing of
with
The switching means satisfies a first switching condition (the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 20 or more) in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the predetermined high probability mode. the mode for execution of the grant determination is a high-probability mode other than the predetermined high-probability mode and the specific high-probability mode among the first high-probability mode, the second high-probability mode, and the third high-probability mode. A second switching condition (the number of games executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends is 10 or more) in a situation where a certain special high probability mode is selected and the execution target mode of the grant determination is the specific high probability mode. The game machine according to any one of features K4 to K7, wherein the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the special high probability mode when is established.

According to the feature K8, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific game state is different depending on the type of grant correspondence result, but the execution target of the grant determination after the switching condition corresponding to each is established. The modes are the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference in the benefit received according to the type of the grant correspondence result from becoming too large.

Feature K9. Execution of the grant determination is made to correspond to one game cycle in which the game cycle motion is started and ended in a state in which the motion result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is obtained. a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for controlling the game round execution means so as to execute the game round operation;
Means for setting a specific state in which the execution target mode of the grant determination is a mode with a higher probability of the grant correspondence result than the low probability mode (a first probability variable flag or a second probability variable flag in the RAM 264 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 flag setting process) and
Means (steps S5908 and S5910 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) for setting a predetermined state in which the execution mode mode of the grant determination is the low probability mode when the number of game rounds is executed in the specific state a process that executes the process of
Means for setting one of the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode in the specific state (a function of executing the processing of steps S5905, S5907, and S5909 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 )When,
When a switching condition is established in the specific state and the execution target mode of the provision determination is the one mode, the execution target mode of the provision determination is the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode. Mode switching means for setting the other mode among the modes (function for executing the processing of steps S5904 to S5909 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K9, when the switching condition is satisfied in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is one of the modes in the specific state, the execution target mode of the grant determination is the first high-probability mode or the second high-probability mode. When the mode is switched to the other mode and the number of game rounds of the end opportunity is executed in the specific state, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to a predetermined state of the low probability mode. This makes it possible to draw more attention to the switching conditions.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to feature K9, wherein the one mode is the first high-probability mode and the other mode is the second high-probability mode.

According to the feature K10, there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been played until the grant correspondence result is obtained in the specific state is close to the end opportunity number. This makes it possible to make the player's heart pound as to whether or not the specific state will end.

Feature K11. The mode switching means, when a predetermined switching reference number of game rounds is executed in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode in the specific state, as satisfaction of the switching condition, The gaming machine according to feature K9 or K10, wherein the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the other mode.

According to the feature K11, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the trigger for switching the execution object mode of the grant determination while maintaining the situation of the high probability mode.

Feature K12. Means (a step in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 for making the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific game state end become one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode) A function to execute the processing of S6004 to step S6005);
When the game state transitions to the specific game state in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific game state ends is the first high means for setting the other mode of the probability mode and the second high-probability mode (the function of executing the processing of steps S6004 and S6006 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature K12, when the game state transitions to the specific game state in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is one mode, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific game state ends is the first The mode is the other of the high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely experience both the situation in which the execution target mode of the grant judgment is the first high probability mode and the situation in which the execution target mode of the grant judgment is the second high probability mode. becomes.

For the configuration of features K1 to K12, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of features I1 to I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The feature group A, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature group I, the feature group J, and According to the invention according to the characteristic group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding a pachinko machine, there is known a configuration in which a predetermined game state is entered when a winning result is obtained in a lottery or when a game ball passes through a predetermined area. Then, when a predetermined game state is entered, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A game machine that stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a certain period of time or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 32... 1st operation|movement part 33... 2nd operation part 35... Through prize-winning part for distribution 36... Distribution-winning device 37... Special electric prize-winning device 42a... Special figure display part 42c... Distribution display unit 44 Symbol display device 69 V winning detection sensor 86 Payout device 87 Payout control device 92 Main side MPU 103 Sound and light side MPU 113 Display side MPU 222 Variable winning device, 222m...Continuous hole, 223...Upper operation opening, 224...Lower operation opening, 260...Main control unit, 262...MPU, 264...RAM, 264b...Various counter areas, 350...Clune, 351...First hole , 352... Second hole, 353... Third hole, 390... Seesaw, 392... Movable member, 400... Passage for counting, 401... Passage for continuation, PA... Game area.

Claims (1)

A predetermined ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion;
grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to grant correspondence information;
a state transition means for shifting a game state to a specific game state advantageous to a player based on the fact that the grant determination result is a grant correspondence result in which the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
with
As modes of the grant determination, a low-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively low, a first high-probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than that in the low-probability mode, and the grant correspondence result and a second high-probability mode having a higher probability than the first high-probability mode.

Images